2015 The Second American Civil War

Book 1

REVISED August 2015

6th Edition 08-2015

Copyright©2014 IJT

Ira. J. Tabankin

Knoxville, TN 37920

Dedication

This book is dedicated to my wife and true love, Patricia.

The following is a work of fiction. Any resemblance to actual names, persons, businesses, locations, and incidents, is strictly coincidental.

Thanks

I’d like to thank the many members of the survivalistboards.com who helped me with their knowledge, comments and encouragement. Special thanks to those members who helped edit and make this published version possible.

“When the people fear the government, there is tyranny. When the government fears the people, there is liberty.”

— Thomas Jefferson

The Constitution is not an instrument for the government to restrain the people; it is an instrument for the people to restrain the government.”

— Patrick Henry

Prologue

The year 2014 started bright and cold; a polar vortex brought bitterly cold temperatures to the eastern half of the country while the western half experienced the worst drought in over a century. The President among others blamed the unusual cold weather on Global Warming. The President told the country he needed to act since Congress refused to do anything. The President said he couldn’t wait because hundreds of Americans are freezing to death. They are dying because the Republican-held House refused to pass his Global Warming and Carbon Tax laws. The President said he had a pen and a telephone with the pen he was going to sign executive orders to take action when the deadlock on Capitol Hill harmed the American people. Executive order followed executive order; the President pushed beyond the limits of the separation of power. One party held the House and the other held the Senate; nothing could be agreed upon to bring the President under control, which he knew, so the President ruled as king.

The two political parties argued with each other over every issue, the only result being public accusations of each other. Neither party wanted to work with the other. The suffering of the average American family increased daily. The average American family saw their disposable income decreased 30% in five years. At the same time, the cost of food increased to the highest levels since records were kept.  Further increasing the average American’s pain level, the cost of electrical energy skyrocketed, in some areas; the cost increased 50% from the same period a year ago. In addition to the increased costs of fuel and food, the Affordable Health Care Act brought increased costs for basic health care. Many newly insured families didn’t understand they had to pay their deductible before their insurance started making payments. They put off seeing a doctor because they couldn’t afford to pay to deductible. The number of people who sought health care decreased from 2012. The Affordable Health Care turned out to neither affordable or able to provide health care to many who needed it.

Increased consumer costs added with lower incomes resulted in reduced consumer spending resulted in less demand for products and services. Lower demand resulted in fewer people who are needed to make products people no longer had the funds to purchase. While the official government published unemployment rate fell to 5.5%, the actual U6 rate increased to 11.5%. Millions of the unemployed gave up looking for jobs they couldn’t find. On one hand, the unemployment rate went down, on the other hand, over 130 million working age Americans were without a job. When the unemployed reached the end of their benefits, they were dropped from the official government roles, they were no longer counted as unemployed. As people dropped from the unemployment rolls, or they gave up looking for a job the unemployment rate quickly Dropped. Enabling the President and the national media to claim his economic programs are improving the economy quicker than any other President in history. The mainstream media didn’t question why the number of the unemployed decreased at the same time the number of the unemployed increased; or why the amount of consumer spending decreased. Spending and demand usually increased when unemployment decreased because more people are working. The media also ignored the number of people working part-time jobs that increased 100% from two years ago. One of the reasons behind the sudden increase in part-time employment is the Affordable Care Act, which set 29 hours as the cut-off between full time and part time employment. Part-time employees didn’t require their employer to provide them with health care benefits. Hence, tens of thousands of full-time employees found themselves part-time overnight without any benefits.

The mainstream media loved the President; they helped him get elected. In their eyes, the President could do no wrong. The President could shoot someone on national television, and the media would claim the victim shot himself. Those, who held jobs in the lower tier of the economy, demanded the minimum wage be increased to $15 an hour. The President said he agreed with them; he signed an executive order increasing the minimum wage to $15 an hour in increments starting April 1, 2014, setting the stage he thought for his party to win the 2014 midterms and the 2016 Presidential elections. Many small companies said they wouldn’t be able to afford the increased wages. On April 1, 2014, thousands of small businesses made the announcement they were closing their businesses. The increase in the minimum wage cost the economy 475,000 jobs, when these newly unemployed complained to the President, he responded with he was helping them find better-paying jobs. The President said he was making it possible for people to spend more time with their families. The President said he was considering issuing an executive order making it illegal for companies to close without getting permission from the Department of Labor. Before he could sign the order thousands of additional “mom and pop” companies closed their doors, afraid they wouldn’t be able to close once this new executive order was signed.

An unforeseen result of the ACA was many single-doctor offices couldn’t afford the changeover from paper to electronic files, they either merged with large medical groups or they took early retirement. In September 2014, there are 21,000 fewer doctors than there was in January 2014. As the demand for doctors is increasing, the number of doctors decreased.

These events set the stage for the 2014 midterm elections, where the right wing of the Republican Party ran candidates who struck a chord with Middle America. The country was tired of the lies and unemployment the Democrat party provided during the previous five years.  The Republicans increased their control of the House and won 8 Senate seats giving them control of both houses for the first time in ten years. The American people had had enough of the current President’s policies. The suffering and frustration of the average American family have reached their highest level in over one hundred years.

The right wing of the Republican Party demanded a price, the impeachment of the President, for turning out the votes which enabled the Republicans to win the Senate. The senior members of the Republican Party tried to talk the newly elected members out of their plan, they urged the new Congressmen and women to have patience and wait. The freshmen flatly refused to wait. They told the party leaders they’d been sent to Washington to do a job; that job was to impeach President Obsma. In the third week of January 2015, the House of Representatives brought articles of impeachment against President Obsma. The press went into full defensive mode; they ran hour-long programs on the benefits of the President’s programs. They tried to tarnish the Republicans, they even tried to blame the increased out of pocket costs of the Affordable Health Care Act on the Republicans. The media claimed Republicans named the ACA Obama Care just to try to push the blame off of themselves and onto the President, who was trying to improve the lives of everyone. The press blamed the high number of unemployment on the right. The press turned all of the President’s failures around and blamed the Republicans for them. Republican lawmakers gave interviews wrote, “OPED” stories, all to no avail, every night the evening news reports are filled with stories explaining the “crimes of the right." The House leadership thought the articles of impeachment would sit in committee for months if not forever. The Speaker of the House didn’t want to go down in history as the man who impeached the first African American President. President Obsma spent January and February 2015 traveling the country blaming the right for his problems. The last week of February saw a massive blizzard hit the North East. Parts of the country were buried under five feet of snow and ice. From Washington DC to Portland, Maine, the country was frozen and stalled. The Press and the President blamed the Republicans for being against his ‘Global Warming’ programs. The media blamed the 21 lost lives from the blizzard on Global Warming.

In the middle of one of the worst blizzards in the country's history, a third of the country also had to endure brown and blackouts, due to the closure of eleven coal-fired power plants. The EPA passed new, much lower emissions rules on coal-fired power plants. When the plants closed, the country lost 15% of its electrical power. The media went into overdrive showing pictures of freezing families, blaming them on the right wing of the Republican Party. The mainstream media’s evening news programs are filled with images of homeless families freezing to death. In 2008, the President promised to bankrupt the coal industry which supplied 60% of the country’s electrical power; in January 2015, his EPA started making his promise come true.

The press, finding the average American's weren't going along with their agenda reverted to the race card. The President demanded time on every network to announce his pending impeachment was based on his skin color. He claimed white Republicans and rich white people who funded the Republican’s victories in the midterms couldn’t accept a black President. He called on the black community to support him. He called on the African American youth to rise up and force Congress to listen to them. The President tried to add class warfare to the issues facing the country. He demanded the rich accept him by paying their fair price. The local Hip Hop radio stations broadcast calls for local uprisings to support the President. They demanded the rich pay their fair share so they could have more. Before the radio stations’ calls for an uprising, the inner city young filled the streets, overturning cars, setting fire to everything in their path. They attacked anyone who happened to get in their way or were in the wrong place at the wrong time.

Local fire departments refused to put out the fires because they were being fired upon. The inner city fires were set like fly traps to catch and kill the local first responders. The mobs also set traps for the police; they waited until the police are almost at their location; then they laid boards with nails across the street blowing their tires. When the police cars became immobile, they were attacked by the protesters. The local gangs egged on by the radio stations and the press increased the level of their destruction. They chant “Leave the President alone.” The inner city fires burn out of control for three days. The lead story on every mainstream media news program is the rioting which are blamed on rich white people who refused to accept the President. The fires can even be seen from orbiting satellites. The Federal Government re-tasked the satellites so they could take high-resolution images suitable for broadcast. The images were distributed to the media to use in support of the President. Senior African American leaders go on national television blaming the radical right wing for causing the riots by their non-acceptance of a black President. Their speeches only increase the tension between the races. Many moderate inner city leaders call for peace only to be gunned down in cold blood. On the third week of rioting, thirty State Governors jointly call up their National Guard units to control the rioting. The Governors appear on television together to beg for peace and restraint. The Governors explain the need for additional force to save lives and property. They order the Guard units to restore peace to the inner cities. Armed MRAPs and armored personnel carriers drive down main street USA. The images of the US military patrolling US streets shocks many in Middle America. The Governors announce if the Guard units are fired upon the Guard is authorized to use deadly force to protect lives and property.

The President’s advisors inform him the National Guard could stop the rioting and would restore order. Thus allowing Congress to move forward with the impeachment process. The President issued an executive order federalizing the National Guard thus taking them out from under the state governor’s control. He issued an order as the Commander in Chief to stop the National Guard from interfering with the people expressing their first amendment rights. The President went on national television claiming the Republicans are trying to violate the US Constitution; he and he alone was taking steps to protect the people’s rights.

The national media fell over themselves praising the President. They pointed out he was the only “adult” in Washington DC who was concerned about protecting the rights afforded to every citizen. The press reported that white people are trying to take the bill of rights away from African Americans and other monitories. The rioting continues and expands into the bedroom communities surrounding the cities; they are egged on by those calling for the righting of the wrongs the white race has done to the black race for hundreds of years. The President and the media successfully shift the focus from the pending impeachment to a race war. Many bedroom communities watched the race war on television, only to discover the race war was now in their own communities. Families found themselves disagreeing and in some cases entering into fist fights over the question of who’s right. Children who rode to school together now faced off across race lines. The President, who ran for office as the “Great Uniter” drove a wedge between the races. Part of his promised transformation of the country was a race war that spread across America.

The Chairman of the Joint Staff, General Dempsey asked to meet with the President. The President kept him waiting for three days and only then allowed him to meet with the condition that some of the President’s senior advisors were present during the meeting.

“Mr. President, it’s my duty to inform you that the military is very concerned about the very real potential of a civil uprising. Sir, we, the senior officers of the military forces are requesting you make a national broadcast and request everyone return to their homes. Sir, you can calm the situation down, you are the only person the young will listen to.”

“General thank you for coming to see me today; I’m afraid that I see things differently than you do. I see our cities burning out of control because our first responders are not responding. I see people who have finally had enough from being enslaved, people who are expressing their first amendment right to free speech. People who may be a little out of control; however I see a bigger threat than these poorly misunderstood youth.”

“Sir, what is this threat you see?”

“General, I’m glad you asked. The biggest threat, I see to the American people, are the 350 million guns in the hands of mostly racist white people. People who are using their guns to shoot the poor inner city, misunderstood youth who have no other way to express themselves. I want the military to take the list of registered firearm owners, and confiscate their weapons and ammunition. We have to get these weapons, not just assault rifles, but handguns, shotguns, and hunting rifles out of the hands of racist people who are endangering innocents.”

“Mr. President, the US Military can’t operate within the borders of the United States. The American military isn’t going to go house to house to take legally owned weapons.”

“General, what if these weapons were no longer legal?”

“Sir, the Second Amendment provides legal ownership of firearms by citizens.”

“General, you’re correct, however, I have here in my hands, an executive order declaring Martial Law and placing the second amendment on hold for the duration of the National Emergency. This order will increase the security and safety of our people. This order will allow us to save innocent lives. I’m sure you and the entire military agree we must do everything possible to save even a single innocent life. General, under this declaration of Martial Law, the military is allowed, and I’m ordering you to operate within our borders.”

“Mr. President, there are many in the military who won’t accept this order, there are many who won’t fire on US citizens.”

“General, my advisors have spent five years ensuring the senior officer ranks will support me and will follow my orders without pause; if you personally won’t, I accept your resignation.”

“Mr. President, I’m sorry you feel this way, I can’t follow your orders; as such, you’ll have my resignation on your desk within the hour.”

“General, I had a feeling you would say this, so I took the liberty of having a resignation ready for your signature.” Pulling an envelope from his desk, the President hands it to the General. “Here, just sign your name, and Mr. Dempsey, remember the secrecy oath you signed. If you breach your NDA and make any public statements, I’ll consider it a breach of your NDA and have the FBI arrest you for treason. Are we clear Mr. Dempsey?”

“Yes Mr. President you’re very clear. Hand me my resignation you so thoughtfully had ready for me.”

The President appears on national television to announce the declaration of Martial Law and the requirement to turn in all firearms within 60 days.

Chapter 1

My name is Brad Jones; my five closest friends and I are at my house drinking beers waiting for the big game to start.  We’re annoyed when the pre-game program is interrupted by the President. He’s sitting behind his desk in the Oval Office; wearing a black armband on his right arm. Which he says is to remember all of the dead innocents lost because so many in the country have refused to accept him as President. He says the first six years of his Presidency has been marked by the far right wing of the Republican Party fighting him at every turn. The right wing is made up of wealthy white families who refuse to accept a black man as President. He announces he’s declaring Martial Law because it’s the only way to bring law and order back to the country. As part of Martial Law, he announces he is putting the Constitution on hold for the duration of the existing national emergency.  He said the second amendment is hereby placed on hold, all weapons are to be surrendered to local police offices or military bases within sixty days. The guns will be held for the duration of the emergency. Receipts will be given to every gun owner. After the national emergency, the firearms will be returned to their owners. President Obsma also announces a government buyback program. The Federal Government will pay $400 for each weapon turned in and $1 for every round of ammunition. Anyone not turning their weapons in or not selling them to the government within the sixty-day grace period will be arrested. The penalty is five years in a Federal prison plus a fine of $5,000 per weapon,

My friends Hal Jackson a software designer, Ron Black a county sheriff, and Brian Grovers, who's a sales manager and me, stare at the television with our mouths hanging open. We all owned firearms, all of the guys we hung out with did. Hal, Brian, and Ron are veterans. Ron stares at the image on the screen saying, “He can’t do that!”

I responded, “Ron, old buddy he just did. Are you going to carry out your new orders?”

“Guys, I’ve got to go, I want to get changed and go to the station to see what’s going on.”

Ron leaves while the rest of us are still in a state of shock. Ten minutes later we see his cruiser pull out of our subdivision with his emergency lights flashing. Brian says, “Guess he got new orders, what are you going to do with your weapons?”

Hal looks at the TV saying, “I don’t know, I have a couple I bought from friends who didn’t go through an FFL, it was legal to do so if both parties signed a bill of sale. We both signed the form and then ripped it up. The law never said we had to save the bill of sale. I don’t know if Ron will go along with collecting our weapons, he’s one of us. The part of the President’s speech about turning them into a local military base really concerns me, it sounds like the asshole has decided to order the military to assist the local sheriffs. I don’t like this at all. He started the damn riots with his last national speech. He’s using the riots he stirred up it to do a gun grab, once he has our weapons, we’ll never see them again. This so called national emergency won’t end until he’s President for life.”

I say, “I bet a lot of people are going to turn in their guns and ammo just to get paid, with so many unemployed, many can use the extra money.”

Hal snorts in disgust, “How could so many be unemployed? Didn’t we have a recovery summer and a recovery fall and super jobs winter? Hell look at the unemployment rate; it’s under 6% we’re almost at full employment.”

Laughing, I reply, “Yeah, that's why 55 million, are on welfare, and 130 million are out of a job. Listen, good buddy, the game doesn’t seem very interesting anymore; mind if we do this again another day, I’ve got a lot to think about.”

Hal frowns, he puts his hand on my shoulders, “Brad, please, don’t do anything crazy. I know you’ve been in touch with the local militia; Ron and I talked about it; buddy some of those guys are little off. You know they’re being watched. If you hang out with them, you’ll end up being on someone’s watch list.”

“Hal, we both own AR 15s, don’t you think that puts both of us on the government hate list? I wonder what Ron’s being told at the station, think he’ll share the information with us?’

“Man I hope so, I’m going to leave and sleep on what to do, catch you tomorrow.”

As Hal leaves, I open another beer and collapse in my recliner, Brian says, “What the fuck is the stupid President thinking? Does he want to rip the country apart and cause more upheaval? Hal was right about one thing, at the prices the government is offering to pay for our guns and ammo, a lot of people will be turning theirs in just to get the money they need to feed their families. Damn him.”

Before Brian can finish his statement, Senators Paul Rand and Ted Cruise make a national live announcement, “Good evening our fellow Americans, we heard at the same time you did the illegal message the President made. We pushed for the impeachment of the President because he’s ruling vs. governing; he’s not our king; we have three branches of government. Our government was set up by our founding fathers with checks and balances. The President’s order tonight is ILLEGAL, we are not turning in our guns, we urge you not to turn in yours either. We are moving ahead with the impeachment of the President as quickly as possible.” Before they can complete their speech, the television screen goes black, replaced by the symbol of the Department of Homeland Security, a voice over says, “The previous message has been deemed to be illegal and in violation of the new Martial Law rules for broadcasting. We urge you to check out these new broadcast rules at www.DHS.gov/martiallaw/broadcastrules.gov. DHS is quickly moving to protect you from the civil unrest which caused our President to declare Martial Law. Agents of the TSA will shortly be at every subway station, bus station. Within 30 days, we’ll have agents at toll booths performing random stops to ensure everyone is safe in this time of unrest. Rest assured we will protect you and your property. If you see someone with a gun, or anyone talking subversion, sedition or treason report it at once to our special toll-free number of 888 555 1776. Trust in your government to protect you and keep you safe. Shortly you’ll be seeing members of the American military on our streets; they are here to protect you. When you go to bed this evening, rest easy knowing your government never sleeps.”

The television screen returned to the news broadcast with the anchors discussing the new rules. I turn to the Wolf News Network, seeing a message on my television, “THIS STATION HAS BEEN STOPPED FROM BROADCASTING DUE TO A VIOLATION OF THE SEDITION ACT. THIS STATION’S BROADCAST LICENSE HAS BEEN REVOKED. PLEASE TURN TO YOUR MSNBC STATION TO RECEIVE THE LATEST NEWS.” I sit in my recliner with my mouth open. I can’t believe what I see, first Martial Law, and now on air censorship. Brian looks at the screen, saying, “I think I’m going to take off, I have a bad feeling where all of this is going to lead. I’d like to be home with Terry and Daniel before the shit hits the fan.”

Shortly after Brian leaves and before I can catch my breath, my doorbell rings. Getting up to see who’s there I look through the front window, not seeing anyone, I wonder if it was a late package delivery. Opening the door, I notice a small white note sticking out from under my front mat. I don’t see anyone around who could have left it, bending down I grab the note. The note’s printed on plain white paper; it says, “Tonight, 0300 basement of Jakes.” Jake is one of our local gun stores, it’s where the members of the militia hang out.

Almost a third of the 225 channels on my cable system are no longer on the air. They display the same message like that on Wolf News. Censorship is in full effect for the first time in our history. I’m trying to decide if I should go to Jake’s this evening, do I have anything to lose? What happens if the police bust the store? Are we going to be doing anything illegal? I don’t think so, maybe they have an insight to what’s going on. Maybe they’ll have a plan how to evade having to turn in our guns. I decide I have nothing to lose by going.

Before I do anything else, I figure this is a good time to take inventory of my supplies. I separate the guns I bought through an FFL and those purchased through a private sale into two different stacks. I walk around my house trying to figure out where I can hide the privately purchased ones so in a house to house search they won’t be found. I figure whoever comes looking for them will have a metal dictator so burying them is out as is just hiding them inside our walls. I wish I could talk to Ron about it; however, I’m not sure which side of this mess Ron is going to fall on. I’ve known Ron since we were little kids; I know he knows right from wrong. I hope he comes out of the right side. If he supports the President’s plan, I’m going to be very disappointed in him.

I’ve been buying ammo every month for a couple of years; I’d lost count of how much I actually had. I was surprised to find I had over 10,000 rounds per caliber. I can sell some and come out way ahead while still holding on to thousands of rounds, that is if I can figure out a place to hide them. I have a bad feeling that the supply chain for ammo has been closed, whatever is used or sold will be gone forever. I’m going to head over to my local Wal-Mart before another shoe drops driving food and water prices up and supply down.

Chapter 2

Ron arrives at the local sheriff’s station he works out of; he’s met at the door by an Army Major wearing an Army combat uniform with an MP (military police) armband. He asks for Ron’s ID after checking to make sure Ron is assigned to this station, he directs Ron to the conference room where Ron discovers it’s filled with every officer assigned to the station. Ron realizes he’s the last one to arrive. Taking a seat Ron nods to his friends, everyone in the room is quiet. The local Sheriff and the Army Major take the stage; the Sheriff begins, “Good evening everyone, I’m sorry to have to call you all back to work. I realize many of you just got home after your shifts. I’m sure you’ve all heard the President’s speech tonight. Major Sparrow would like to address us.”

The Major moves to the podium, “Deputies, thank you for accepting the call to return to the station. I’m sure you realize we’re all going to be very busy since Martial Law has been declared. We have a number of tasks assigned to us. First and foremost is to maintain the peace. We are going to have a zero tolerance policy for any infractions. I don’t care if someone is driving one MPH over the limit, you will pull them over and give them a citation, there will be no more warnings or talking’s too. We are going to enforce the curfew. Now you may not have heard yet, but tomorrow the President is going to announce a national curfew. No one without a special pass will be allowed outside their homes from 9PM to 5AM local time. Within a week special license plate stickers for those who work critical night shifts or in the medical industry and emergency workers will be distributed, this will enable us to determine if someone should be out at night or not. Next we’re going to set the station up to receive all of the firearms that are going to be turned in. These turned in weapons will be removed from the station in an armored vehicle. The same armored vehicle will be bringing the cash to purchase the firearms under the President’s plan. Everyone selling a firearm is to be fingerprinted, and their facial photograph will be entered into our data files as an ex-weapons owner so we can check on them later to ensure they didn’t hide any firearms. Copies of all locally purchased firearms are being sent to the electronic file folder listed on the forms. After 60 days, we will use the copies of forms 22-33 and 29-37a to start going home to home collecting the firearms that haven’t been turned in or sold to the government. You, the local sheriffs and we the military police will be working together during this very difficult time of trouble. Working together, we can ensure peace and safety for the citizens. Does anyone have any questions?”

An African American sheriff’s sergeant stands up and asks, “Major, all of us took an oath to uphold the Constitution, gun grabs or whatever else you call them, and I don’t care if you call it a buy back or whatever, is illegal. It violates the second amendment; I can’t break my oath by following an illegal order. Any illegal order is one doesn’t need to be obeyed. Major, I for one can’t and won’t go house to house taking people’s legally owned firearms away from them.”

“Sergeant you of all people should realize the need to remove all firearms off of the streets. In addition, you know any order by the President of the United States isn’t illegal. By the very nature of the order coming directly from the President, it’s a legal order. Are you telling me that you are refusing to follow a direct order from the President?”

“Major, taking people’s firearms won’t remove them from the streets. If the President gives an order that breaches the Constitution then, it’s not a legal order. By the way, why are you here? Why are you operating inside the country? Why are you breaking your own oath?”

“Sergeant, I took an oath to follow the orders of my Commander in Chief and the officers appointed over me. The Commander in Chief has given the military a direct order. My oath forces me to carry out my orders.”

“Major, your orders from the President are clearly illegal, you shouldn’t be following them, and his latest orders breach our Constitution. Our Constitution stands above the President. It stands above all of us. It’s what holds out country together.”

“Sergeant, if you feel so strongly, I’m going to make you and everyone else here a one-time offer, you can remove your badge and gun, stand up and leave. If you do leave, you will be a normal citizen as they say, a little person. Or you can stay, and my offer is, I’ll forget what you just said. However, if you leave and are found to own a firearm after the 60 days, you will be arrested. If you break any law, you will be arrested. Do any of you wish to resign?”

All of the deputies look around the room; the sergeant stands making his way to the front of the room. Soon Ron too stands, in all, 25 of the 35 sheriff’s deputies resign. They turn in their badges and side arms. All 25 walk out of the station led by the now ex-Sheriff.  Major Sparrow looks disgusted at those leaving, saying, “You’re all traitors, you’re all a disgrace to the uniforms you wore; none of you should have ever been allowed to wear the uniform of a county sheriff. Get out of here, don’t take your patrol car home. I assure you if we catch you doing anything illegal you will be arrested and tossed into jail with the same people you put there. Think about the warm welcome you’ll receive from them. Now get out of my sight you traitors.”

The ex-Sheriff tells his people, “Be safe out here, I fear we just made an enemy who will seek revenge. He will be keeping both of his eyes on each of us. My gut tells me this isn’t going to end well. We all swore an oath to protect the Constitution and the people in this country, I fear both are about to be trampled into the dirt.

My phone rings, I’m wondering who the hell it is at this hour, checking the caller ID I see it's Ron. “Hey buddy, what’s up?”

“Brad, I need a favor, can you come by the station and pick me up?”

“Sure, what happened, did you wreak the cruiser again and they don’t have a spare?”

“Buddy, it’s a long story, I’ll tell you when I see you.”

“You’re lucky; I just got home from shopping, man, and you should have warned me the stores were going to be a war zone. See you in ten minutes, need anything else?”

“Brad, I had no idea the stores were going to be a problem, no one told us at the station. I don’t need anything but a ride; I’ll tell you everything when I see you.”

@@@@@

Senators Paul Rand and Ted Cruise are stopped by a group of TSA agents as they are trying to leave the Capitol building. They’re taken to a local police station where they’re told they can’t make any phone calls; their cell phones are taken away. They’re told to just wait until they are picked up and taken to a new federal facility. Paul looks at Ted saying, “What the fuck? Why is a bunch of TSA agents arresting us?”

Ted frowns, saying, “I think we just lost our country, America is being ruled by a dictator who is using the power of the DHS to back up his wishes. I guess they found us guilty of treason or something because we spoke out against our new dear leader.”

“Any idea where they’re going to take us?”

“Yes, there’s an FEMA camp outside of Manassas, Virginia, I guess the DHS has turned it into a camp to hold those of us that have spoken out against the President.”

“What do you think the military is going to do?”

“I’m betting that half or more are going to revolt. I’d say we’re looking at a new civil war, may God have mercy on our country.”

@@@@@

34 Republican state Governors place what they hope is a secure conference call together. The Governor of Michigan starts the call off, “Ladies and Gentlemen, the President has just declared himself a dictator. He’s set up network censorship; he’s announced a total ban on all firearms, while doing nothing about the rioting that he’s calling innocent youths expressing their first amendment rights. He caused the rioting and refuses to do anything to stop it because he’s trying to avoid impeachment. He has to be stopped, I don’t know about you, but four of my largest cities are nothing but burnt out shells, we’ve had thousands killed, raped and injured. I for one am not going to turn in my shotgun or my M1. I suggest we call a state's convention to pull the rug out from under the President.”

Each Governor shares their story of destroyed cities, killed and raped citizens, and the loss of the National Guard. While discussing when and where to hold the states convention their conference call is cut off, each governor hears a recorded message, “This communication has been disconnected due to a breach of the Sedition act. All parties of this call should remain where you are; members of the Department of Homeland Security are on their way to secure all parties of this illegal call.”

@@@@@

The Service Chiefs are meeting in the War Room, which is located 100 feet under the Pentagon is a secure conference room. US Army Lieutenant General Simpson looks around the room, saying, “Friends, speaking for myself, I can’t follow the President’s illegal orders. What about the rest of you?”

Four star Commandant of the US Marine Corps, Marine General Brownstone says, “General, speaking for myself, I agree, and I can say most of my Marines will follow me in not following his orders, General Bracken how about the Air Force?”

“Gentlemen, I took the same oath like the rest of you, I gave my word to follow the orders of the Commander in Chief and the officers appointed over me. I’ve spent the last 29 years following those orders, how can I change now?”

Admiral Zander, the Chief of Naval Operations, replies, “I can’t and won’t follow illegal orders. I took the same oath like the rest of you; his order is clearly illegal, and he’s doing away with our Constitution. My oath first binds me to defend the Constitution. I can’t follow an order that violates the Constitution. The Navy will not follow his orders. General Simpson, are you sure about the Army?”

“Gentlemen, as I said I also can’t follow his orders, I know that many of the Army’s officers WILL follow his orders, he’s all but pruned my most experienced and loyal officers. I think the Army is going to split, maybe 50/50. Admiral, are you sure all of your ship captains are going to agree with you?”

“General, no, I’m not 100% sure. I know some will follow the President’s orders. I know that the carrier captains won’t follow him. I handpicked each and every one of them. It’s the submarine commanders that concern me. I think that at least 60% of the attack boat commanders will follow me; the strategic commanders are picked by a committee, those I really worry about. Each boat carries 24 Trident D5 ballistic missiles with either four or eight thermonuclear warheads.

“One of my major concerns is fully a third of my Marines are deployed outside of CONUS, some on the Admiral’s ships if those captains follow the President’s orders there may be bloodshed on the open seas. Admiral, how do we get our deployed people home with their weapons, supplies and vehicles ASAP?”

“General Bracken, we can’t allow the Air Force to fight against the rest of us, it’ll be a bloodbath. In addition, we need your aircraft to protect us from anyone who is going to want to use the current situation against the country. What about the country’s strategic forces?”

“Admiral Zander, I suggest we poll our missile officers and also your Trident captains, we can’t allow the strategic forces going off the reservation. That would be too dangerous. We might have to take control of the birds if the crews don’t remain loyal. We need their birds to keep the wolves at bay.”

The Admiral stands to address his three counterparts, “Gentlemen there’s one topic that we haven’t spoken about, it’s hanging in the air like a lead balloon, we all know what it is, yet none of us want to say it, so I will, should we overthrow him?”

There’s silence in the conference room; no one wants to be the next person to speak. Finally, General Simpson stands, “Admiral, in the 239 years our great nation has existed we’ve never had a military coup, and that’s what it’ll be if we step in and overthrow the President. We’ve always had the support of the population, we’ll never maintain the people’s support if we overthrow their legally elected government.”

“General, given what’s happened, can you say it’s still a legally elected government?”

“Admiral, the people elected him, as such he’s the legally elected President. He may have wandered off the reservation, but he is still our Commander in Chief. May I suggest we break for an hour or two and then reconvene? I’d like to speak with a few of my staff.”

“General, that’s agreeable to me; the other topic, we need to discuss, is what should we do if our friends at DHS decide they want to enter the Pentagon for our protection?”

General Brownstone laughs saying, “Let them try I don’t think our mobile security force will honor their ID cards.”

“General, I suggest we inform the security detail to lock the building down.”

“Admiral, a very good idea.”

Picking up the telephone on the table, General Simpson says, “This is General Simpson speaking for the commanding officers of the Army, Marines, Air Force and Navy, this is a direct order, lock down the Pentagon, set Threatcon Delta. I don’t care who shows up at the front door, or any ID card or pass signed by anyone, and I mean anyone, not even the President. The building stays locked down until further notice. Am I clear?”

“Sir, this is Colonel Watkins, sir, Threatcon Delta, yes sir, total lockdown, sir what are our ROE (rules of engagement)?”

“Colonel, the four of us, have agreed that use of deadly force is authorized. Son, get us locked down and secure, open up the arms lockers. While you’re at it, please appoint Captain Grover, USMC to lead the mobile security force.”

“Sir, yes sir. Sir, are you really sure you want Captain Grover to command the mobile security force? I assume the general is fully aware of the Captain’s typical assignments?”

“Colonel, we’re very familiar with the Captain, most of his orders have originated from the four of us. I think he’s the perfect person to put the fear of God in anyone who attempts to enter the Pentagon by force.”

“Yes sir, you’ve got that one right. I’ll contact the Captain right now; I’m sure he’ll enjoy himself commanding the mobile security force. General, what do I do when he asks for a platoon of M1 tanks?”

“Give them to him and stand back.”

The alarms in the Pentagon sound, a computer generated voice says, “Attention, attention, now set THREATCON DELTA, repeat now set THREATCON DELTA this not a drill, this is not a drill. Use of deadly force is authorized. The building is now on total lock down. All security squads report to battle stations. External guard stations are to lock down the entrances and exits. No one goes in or out. TREATCON DELTA TREATCON DELTA. NO DRILL.”

@@@@@

The President’s Secretary of Homeland Security informs the President, “Mr. President, the Pentagon isn’t answering any calls. I’ve personally tried calling. I get a recorded message informing me that the Pentagon is on something called a total lockdown and now operating on Threatcon Delta this is not a drill, repeat this is not a drill.”

The President responds, “Send some of your people over there to make them understand. I’m tired of the military thinking they live under a different set of rules. Well, their day has now come; they will either swear allegiance to me personally or they are gone.”

“Yes sir, I’ll send an armed team to collect the service heads and have them brought here so you can give them a direct order.”

“Do it now. I want them standing in front of me within the hour.”

Chapter 3

We live in Northern Virginia; which is a very conservative area, Romney won our county by a wide margin, our Republican Congressman has held office for twenty years. I thought there might be a small local reaction to the President’s speech; I was not prepared for the scene that greeted me when I arrived at our local Wal-Mart. Looking at the people running in and out of the store, one would have thought the President announced the world was going to end. The store resembled a battle zone; people are grabbing food and just running out of the store without stopping to pay. There are three county sheriffs trying to maintain order at the front of the store, they are not succeeding. In fact, they are being pushed aside by the waves of scared people. My first stop is the sporting goods department, it’s been ransacked, the ammo case glass doors have been broken, all of the ammo is gone. The front case which yesterday held 30 different types of sporting knives is broken, all of the knives are gone. Even the rifles, which had trigger locks on them, are missing. I push my shopping cart to the camping aisles, where much to my surprise most of the dried food is still on the shelves; I fill my basket with all of it, plus all of the water filters and ten one pound bottles of propane. In the event of a power loss or gas, shut off, I’ll have light and some heat. I got a real surprise when I rounded the aisle and saw all of the bows and arrows are untouched, while the firearm section has been ransacked; all of the hunting bows are untouched. I grab two recurve bows and all of the arrows I can fit in my cart. The previous ransacking of the store must have been pretty bad because they're no cashiers, people are running in and out of the store with loaded carts or armfuls of food; some are carrying out large screen TVs and DVD players. I push the cart to my car’s trunk; I just dump everything in the trunk as quickly as I can so I can return to see what other treasures I can find. BANG BANG BANG, Crap, someone’s shooting it out at the front of the store. Three sheriff’s deputies are running towards the gunshots; they run to the right-hand door, allowing me to get in the left-hand doors. Most people are grabbing everything from the food half of the store; I return to the camping section where I grab a couple of sleeping bags and two inflatable sleeping mattresses. I also grab all of the batteries I can locate, flashlights and slow burning candles. My gut says that either the power is going to be too expensive to use, or the grid is going to collapse. I luck out in finding two first aid kits jammed in the back of the wrong shelf; this gives me four counting the two I have at home. I’m about to head to the health and beauty section when the sheriffs make an announcement they are closing the store. Anyone caught inside the store in two minutes will be arrested or shot. Damn, time to get the hell out of Dodge. I make it out of the store as the doors are closed, and metal fencing from the warehouse section of the store is strung across the front of the Wal-Mart. Since I still have room in the car, I head over to Sam’s. When I get there I find it locked and ten private armed security guards standing in front of the store. My next stop is the Wegmans grocery store, they have private armed security who are only allowing one person into the store as one exits, I stand in line with about 50 others, soon it’s my turn to enter the store, many of shelves are empty, some are even turned over. I’m looking for canned goods and bottled water. There’s a sign limiting bottle water to two cases per person; I take my two and head to the canned goods section, I grab a hundred cans of various types of soup, canned tuna and chicken, If things turn to crap, I want as many supplies as I can get my hands on. Standing in the checkout line, I see shotgun armed employees escorting shoppers to their cars. The woman behind me tells me her neighbor was here earlier, she got jumped as she was putting her food into her car. A group of kids came up behind her, hit her in the head with a metal pipe, stealing her car full of food, leaving her bleeding in the parking lot. I thought to myself; the President’s announcement has done nothing but open the gates of hell and let loose all of the scum. What’s going to happen when he takes all of our firearms away?

On the way home I tune to the Rash Linebacker show only to find out he too is off the air. I shouldn’t have been surprised. I try to tune to the patriot station on Sirius; it’s not there, all, I get, is an announcement saying, “This station is currently off the air due to technical issues, please try to tune in later.” I can guess the technical reasons are more censorship. I try watching CNN. The anchor is saying, “I can’t understand why people aren’t more ecstatic about the President’s new policies, look at how hard he’s working to ensure those evil guns are forever removed from our streets making all of us so much safer.” The reporter goes on saying, “The President is doing everything possible to protect the first amendment rights by allowing people to express themselves.” She doesn’t say a word about the President overturning the second amendment, or the damage the inner city youth are doing while expressing their first amendment rights. It’s only a matter of time before these gangs; start attacking whites and Latinos everywhere, when that happens we are going to have a full-blown race war on our hands.

I want to get home and hide my “loot” before another shoe drops. I wonder if our neighborhood will see the fighting and burning the cities are experiencing.

I put everything in my hiding spots. I still don’t have a good idea where to hide my AR 15 and shotgun which I purchased from a friend. I’ve been buying ammunition for years, I have over 25,000 rounds stored in the quest bedroom. All of it is stored in 50 caliber ammo cans. I decide to disassemble my two non-registered long guns to make them easier to hide. There's no way I'm going to turn in or sell back these two firearms. I also need to hide my ammo and cleaning kits. I'll find a way to hide what's mine, or they can kill me to take them from my cold dead hands.

@@@@@

Senators Rand and Cruise are led out of the sheriff’s office to a waiting DHS blacked out bus with bars welded over the windows. Senator Rand says, “Well look who’s here, we have most of our party on the bus with us, we could hold our next convention right here.” No one laughs, many are injured, some have bandages wrapped around their heads, and a few have their suits ripped. Senator Cruise asks, “What the hell happened to you?”

The Senator from Mississippi responds for the group, “When the two of you went off to make a live broadcast and be big heroes; the DHS goon squad entered our conference room, they told us we were under arrest for violation of the Sedition Act. We didn’t even realize the sedition act was still on the books. A few of us refused to go with the DHS agents; the goons beat them and then turned on the rest of us with clubs. Two of the women were led away, we heard them screaming a couple of rooms down the hall, while none of us could leave the room to try to save them. We can only imagine what happened to them. Once we got on the bus, they changed their story and said they are taking us into protective custody. To protect us from the angry mobs. Yet it was our protectors who beat us.”

“Have you seen any Democrats?”

“Senator Ried showed the DHS goons where we were meeting. He told us we were committing an act of treason. He called the DHS security forces to protect us from the masses wanting our heads for allowing Americans to freeze to death. He said he’s worried about our safety once he announces we’re opposing the President’s policies. He said it didn’t matter anyway because he was putting the Senate into recess; he’ll personally advise the President during the recess.”

A voice from the back of the bus asked, “Does anyone know where they’re taking us?”

Senator Rand replies, “I guess we’re going to the FEMA camp outside of Manassas Virginia.”

Another voice said, “I’m Jewish, there can’t be concentration camps in America. I won’t accept it; I think we need to form a committee to investigate who built them and who funded them.”

Senator Cruise responds, “We as a body funded them, plus we allowed them to purchase 1.6 billion bullets didn’t any of you wonder why and whom they were going to use those bullets to against?”

“So smart one, how are we going to get out of the camp they send us to? How are we going to put a stop to all of this?”

Cruise responded, “We aren’t, the only way, I see us getting out of that camp, is if the military busts us out or if the people rise and overthrow the President. If I were you, I’d pray for the military.”

“Why?”

“Have you seen the images from Syria or Lebanon or for that matter any modern country where there’s been a civil war? Did you happen to notice the damage an all-out civil war causes? Lebanon used to be a major holiday resort, the Middle East Rivera, look at it now; it’s a government less war zone twenty years after their civil war, look at Syria or central Europe. Look at what happened in Egypt. Is this what you want for America? If the military steps up, they can toss the pain in the ass out of the White House and return the rule of law to the country. The longer the lawlessness goes on, the worse the future of our country is going to be. Unless there is a change, someone is going to have to remove both the President and his idiot Vice President from office.”

The senior Senator from Arizona speaks up saying, “Senator, come on, those were civil wars brought on by religious factions, we wouldn’t have similar civil war here. We can talk it out and reach a compromise with the other side, I’m telling you, there’s no need for all of this. If they would just let me talk to Senator Ried, I’m sure, we can work it out.”

Senator Cruise responds, “Senator, if you want to leave the bus, do so, I’m not going to help you, after all you told the press you thought I was crazy, remember?”

“Cruise, you know I didn’t mean that, we just didn’t agree on the same course of action with the government shutdown.

“Senator leave if you want, I won't put it past the DHS to shoot you and blame it on the Tea Party.”

“They wouldn’t shoot me; I ran for President.”

“Then make a try for it, me? I’m going to stay right here; at least I won’t be shot escaping.”

The Senator from North Carolina asks, “Senator Cruise do you think your constituents in Texas will turn over their firearms?”

“Senator, they will, as soon as they are pried out of their cold dead hands. There’s no way Texas is going to go along with the President. What worries me is, do any of you remember the Goggle search by state analysis they ran back in January of 14? Google published a report on what people in each state searched for with auto-complete. Out of the 50 states, 15 or 16 searched for “secede” I’m afraid we’ve reached the tipping point. Ten years ago a President would never think of using executive orders like the current one does, ten years ago no one would search for how to secede. I’m afraid the President is going to push the people over the edge. Half don’t pay any taxes, the other half wonders why they are supporting the nonworking half. The nonworking half wants more from the working, and this President wants to give it to them. His recent announcements may be just the spark that lights a fuse we can’t put out. I better grab a seat; it looks our driver is coming, along with a couple of armed security goons.”

The driver climbs into the bus, saying, “Senators, the President has deemed you’re not safe here in Washington, he worries that the hordes of unhappy people will come after you because you refused to pass his policies. He thinks the people will hunt you down and do you harm. As such, he asked us in the Department of Homeland Security to take you into protective custody. Any rumors of your being under arrest are false, we’re here to help and protect you. We’re going to be taking you to Manassas; there we can ensure your safety and security. Please don’t try to leave the bus; you may have noticed the windows have bars welded over them so any unhappy citizens won’t be able to get to you. Now sit back and relax, we should be at your new home in about 90 minutes. We’ll have a nice hot meal waiting for you.”

The bus pulls out of the Senate parking lot followed by five black Suburbans with flashing red and blue strobe lights.

The Senator from Alabama responds to Senator Cruise, Senator, the people of my state have had enough, I agree with you, we’re at a tipping point and I too think we’re heading over the edge into the unknown. The question is what can we do about it, or should we do anything about it?”

Senator Cruise responds, “Senator, I don’t think that the answer is in our hands, we’re going into protective custody that means we don’t get a vote. I’m afraid that we may be witnessing the end of our great country. When the President said he was going to transform the country, none of us knew what he meant, well we see the transformation right now and I can tell you, I’m scared of what I’m seeing.”

Senator Rand starts singing, “We’re off to see the wizard, the wonderful wizard of OZ.”

@@@@@

Two DHS Suburbans arrive at the main entrance to the Pentagon; a US Marine corporal holds his hand up to stop the vehicles. He approaches the driver’s window of the lead Suburban. “Welcome to the Pentagon, may I ask what your business here is today?”

“We’re here to escort the services commanding generals to the White House; we’re here under the direct orders from the President.”

“May I please see the orders?”

“We don’t have them in writing; he told us to come and bring the service commanders to see him.”

“I see, by the way, are you armed?”

“Corporal, of course, we’re armed. What does that have to do with anything?”

“Sirs, since the Navy Yard shooting, you, the DHS have made rules forbidding outside weapons on military facilities, including the Pentagon. I’m going to have to ask you to give me your weapons and allow me to inspect your vehicles before you can enter the Pentagon.”

“Corporal, are you crazy? We’re not going to hand over our firearms to you or anyone else for that matter, now raise the gate and allow us entry, I told you we’re here on direct orders from your Commander in Chief.”

“Yes, I know what you told me. However, you are here without any written orders. You lack today’s automatic entry code word; your vehicles don’t have a valid DoD entry pass sticker, and you’re carrying weapons, which I’ve informed you are not allowed to carry on to US Military facilities, as such, I’m sorry, but I’m not going to be able to allow you entry. We all have our orders we have to follow; mine are in writing if you’d like to inspect them.”

“I don’t want to see your orders; I want you to raise the gate and allow us entry.”

“Sirs, I’m sorry. I have my orders. If you give me a minute, I’ll call an officer to join us, maybe they can sort out your concerns and listen to your complaints about my performance.”

Four Marine Hummers shortly arrive at the main gate, all have manned M2 heavy machine guns mounted on top of them. A US Marine Captain exits the lead Hummer, “Corporal is there a problem here?”

“Sir, these vehicles claim to be from the Department of Homeland Security on direct verbal orders of the Commander in Chief himself. They say they are here to escort the service chiefs to a meeting at the White House, sir, they have no written instructions; they are armed, and they lack the proper code word, they also lack a valid DoD parking/access decal. As such I have refused them entry. I did offer to allow them entry if they left their firearms with me, sir I explained the no guns policy, they didn’t accept my instructions. Sir.”

“Corporal, thank you for a very clear and concise report; I’ll take it from here.”

“Yes sir, I’ll be right here if you should require anything.”

Turning to face the DHS vehicles, “Now Gentlemen I’m US Marine Captain Grover, what part of the corporal’s instructions did you not understand?”

“Now look here Captain, we are here at the direct orders of the President.”

“Orders you can’t produce, the corporal informed you that outside weapons are not allowed on US Military facilities after the Navy Yard shooting, I would have assumed that the DHS would be happy to see we’re following your department’s instructions. I would suggest you turn around, and return with the proper written orders, plus without your weapons. My people will escort you off of the Pentagon property.”

The Suburbans turn around and leave the Pentagon. The agents are trying to figure out how to explain their failure to the President.

@@@@@@

Some of the evening news sound bites are;

“The President orders all firearms to be turned in, God Bless the President, he’ll save thousands of lives.”

“The President put a stop to any additional government shutdowns, protecting jobs.”

“The President declares Martial Law to provide first amendment protection to all."

“The President extends his personal protection to members of the Republican Party who is being threatened by the very people the Republicans have left behind because they are not rich white business owners.”

“HOORAY, no more guns! The President saves our children, keeps his promise to save our children’s lives.”

“Hateful, racist Republicans are taken to a secure location to protect them while they rethink their decision to try to impeach the President, who has done more to bring about equality than any other President in history.”

@@@@@

Texas Governor Lawson calls the state legislative back to Austin to attend an emergency meeting. “Ladies and Gentlemen, I’m sorry to drag you all back to Austin on such short notice, given the recent remarks from our President, I fear we as proud Texans have to make a very important decision to protect our citizens. I’m proposing a radical move, one that scares even me. It's one I think is required given the current actions of the President. I’m proposing that the great state of Texas invoke the clause we forced on the Federal Government when we joined the union. To refresh your memories, when Texas joined the union, we were not a territory; we were an independent nation, as such we had a line inserted into our agreement whereby we could exit the union at any time if we felt we had no choice. Ladies and Gentlemen, I stand before you today to say the time has come for Texas to leave the union. We can’t subject our citizens to illegal policies. We can’t allow our people to be ruled by a dictator whom the current President has become. There are rumors that he has had all of the Republican Senators arrested! Is this who we want to follow? What will he do next? As the Governor for all of the people in our great state, it’s my responsibility to protect them to the best of my ability and right now, the best of my ability is to remove them from these grossly illegal executive orders. What will we do if he outlaws oil and gas drilling? Ladies and Gentlemen I don’t think we have an option. I open the floor for comments and debate.”

After three hours of debate the vote’s taken, no one is surprised that Texas votes to leave the union and once again become the Independent Nation of Texas. The Governor says, “I’ll send a special note to the White House and will make a public address to the people of Texas and the world tonight.”

When the President reads the note from the Governor of Texas, he calls his Secretary of the Department of Homeland Security, “I want as many agents as possible sent to Austin, arrest the Governor and state legislators who voted for this bill. I want your people in Austin within three hours. I want this man stopped before he can make his national announcement.”

“Mr. President, Texas has a very strong National Guard and many military bases. Sir almost every citizen is armed, they won’t be pleased to see us cross their border. There could be bloodshed.”

“Good, it’s time to show these racists they can’t get away with disrespecting me.”

“Yes sir, I have people in New Orleans, who can be in Austin in a couple of hours.”

“Get it done, I want you to go there yourself to supervise the return to law and order in Texas. We have to bring them down to size and do it now before it’s too late. If we delay other states may try to do the same thing. This could ruin my Presidency. It’ll ruin all of the good work I’ve done for the people of this country. We can’t allow some rich white racists to slow the progress we’re making in transforming this nation. If they get away with this, think of how history will say about me. I will not go down in history as the President that was in office when the Union broke apart. I won’t stand for it.”

A DHS Gulfstream lands in Austin to a surprise. The plane is met on the runway by five military light armored vehicles (LAVs) all repainted with, “Texas Rangers” on them. A Texas Ranger exits one of the LAVs and asks the pilot of the DHS airplane for their visa.

“What the hell do you mean where are our visas? We’re the Department of Homeland Security. We can go anywhere we want; we’re here on official business, now stand aside, and you won’t get your pretty looking troopers hurt. We’re calling the shots here, if you don’t listen to us, we’re close Dallas Fort Worth Airport, hell, maybe we’ll stop screening everyone in the state of Texas, then no one will be able to fly in or out of your little pissant state, now get out of our way.”

The Ranger responds, “I asked you for your visa, this is now the Independent Nation of Texas, our Governor, our new President has informed the American President that any member of the American Federal Government will require a visa to enter Texas, so where are your visas?”

“Look asshole, we don’t have nor do we need a visa, now get out of our way, we’re on official business.”

“If you exit the airplane without a valid visa we will be forced to arrest you.”

“Try it and see who gets arrested.”

The airplane door opens; the first people exiting the plane are wearing body armor and are holding M4 assault rifles. They exit the plane, and surround the Texan Ranger, “Now who’s screwed?”

The Texan Ranger smiles while responding, “You are.” With that the plane is surrounded by 100 Texan Rangers holding M16s or M4s, in addition heavy machine guns on the LAVs point at the Gulfstream and the DHS agents who exited the plane.

The DHS lead agent says, “You wouldn’t dare shoot at a US DHS agent, you’ll end up breaking rocks or worse for the rest of your worthless lives.”

“Really? If you don’t put your weapons down and raise your arms, we’ll open fire. Then we’ll send your bullet-ridden bodies back to DC freight collect.”

“Bullshit, now get out of our way.” At the same time, one of the DHS agents takes a pot shot at one of the Texan Rangers blocking their exit. The Texans return fire killing every agent while also hitting the Gulfstream. When the Governor hears the report, he says, “Well damn, they ruined a perfectly good Gulfstream dock their pay each $1 for a month until the airplane is paid for and give each Ranger a medal. I wanted to add that plane to our fleet. I think the first rounds have been fired in the next civil war. Wrap their bodies and send them back to the White House. Send him a bill for the bullets we used and the cost of shipping their bodies back. Alert the Texas Rangers we may be invaded. Has anyone been able to reach the commanding general at Fort Hood?”

“Sir, so far no one is responding at any of the military bases in Texas.”

@@@@@

Arriving at the Sherriff station, I pick up Ron saying, “Ron, what happened to your car? Hit the speed bump too hard again?”

“Brad, I wish that was the problem, I resigned from the Sheriff’s Department as did most of the deputies.”

“What the hell happened?”

“When I got to the station, there was an Army Major waiting for us, he informed us we are going to go house to house searching for firearms, he wants us to break the Constitution. I and many of my brothers and sisters refused. Even our Sheriff refused to follow his orders. We swore an oath we intend on keeping; we call ourselves the Oath Keepers.”

“Jesus Ron, are we headed for a military takeover?”

“I honestly don’t know, by the way, do you mind stopping by Wegmans?”

Laughing, I reply, “Ron, that’s something we should chat about. Every store is a battle zone. You might be OK in your uniform, however, once you see what’s going on; you won’t believe it.”

“Has rioting broken out here in our town?”

“I wouldn’t call it a riot, I think civil disobedience might be a better term. Regular folks like us are clearing the shelves of food and water. Most stores are either closed or have private armed security guarding them.”

“Crap, not what I expected. I thought it would be tomorrow after the President’s announcement tonight.”

“Wait, he’s going to make another announcement tonight? What now? Aliens are landing?”

“Wish they would, no he’s going to announce a national curfew.”

“He’s what?! The country is going to go insane; the economy is going to tank even worse than it is.”

“Yes it is, I wonder what he’s going to do next.”

@@@@@

Texas Governor now the President of the Republic of Texas Lawson address the citizens of Texas and America. He announces Texas has seceded, most Texan’s listening cheer and celebrate the announcement. However, President Lawson is cut off by the DHS before he completes the third of his remarks. The story is carried on the internet that so far hasn’t been fully censored. It isn’t for lack of trying, talk radio and right wing news programs are using international servers making it legally harder for the feds to them shut down. The mayors and political elite in upstate New York, meet in a private dining room, they discuss how unhappy their people are with their Governor and his far left policies. The Mayor of a small town outside of Buffalo says, “The Governors remarks that if you’re pro-gun, and conservative ‘there’s no place in New York for you’ have already cost the state millions in tax revenue, entire businesses have packed up and left the state leaving tens of thousands unemployed for the state to support. My town has lost 20% of our tax base; our largest employer made parts for AR rifles packed up and moved to Alabama. They left all of their workers unemployed.” The Mayors decide to break away from New York City and form a new state, one that respects the interests of all of their citizens. They reach agreement that the upper third of the state will form a new state. They inform their now ex-Governor of their decision to form a new state with the name of New Amsterdam. The reaction by the far left wing Mayor of New York City is pure joy, if the upper third of the state splits off, then New York City can become a state with him as its first governor. Upon hearing the news from New York, the President laughs. He tells his Chief of Staff, “The crazy fools, even if the state legislative agrees to allow these right wing racists form a new state; Congress has to approve and with me now controlling Congress that’s not likely to happen. The fools, I haven’t even started using my pen and telephone yet.”

The divide in the country between left and right deepens every day. Neighbors fight each other, some supporting and others opposing the President. Lifelong friendships and families are broken.

Even before the President’s remarks, Western Maryland had started to secede from Maryland as had North East Colorado. The leaders of both groups decide the time is right to push their initiatives. At 7:00 PM EDT, the two break off groups make their announcements; they too are going to break off from their parent states and form two new states. The country waits for the next shoe to drop. There have rumors all day of what the President might announce tonight.

At 9:00 PM EDT Ron and I sit in front of my TV watching a very tired looking and upset President addresses the nation. He said; “My fellow Americans, the past couple of days has seen many rumors spreading around the country, rumors about arrests of members of Congress and the Senate, programs being taken off the air, shortages of food, and radicals in a few states saying they are breaking away from their core states. I’m happy to report all of these are false. Ask yourself why would all of these things happen now? Why are these rumors being spread now? I’ll tell you why, the NRA has decided to fight me in trying to save your children’s lives. I’m trying to save lives while the Republicans and their supporters in the NRA are trying to stop me. Do you want me to save your children? Do you want guns off your streets? Do you want an end to drive-by shootings? Do you want an end to gangland shootings? Of course, you do. I’ve heard it’s not fair to hunters; I have to pose the question to all of you, in today’s world why should anyone be hunting. What if they miss their target, a poor little Bambi deer and the bullet they fired enters a school and kills your child, will you still think I'm unfair to the hunters then? I’ve been told people need guns for self-protection, I ask you, self-protection from whom? Senator Dianne Feinsteind has made many scientific studies that show once guns are off the streets the outlaws will turn theirs in too. So why does anyone need a gun? Look at the damage guns have done to our country, we rank within the top 5 in murders, shouldn’t America rank at the bottom? We can do this by simply taking guns off our streets. Am I just taking them away from people? No, I’m buying them; I’m offering a very good price for each firearm and bullet. My program is putting money; billions of new dollars in people’s hands to pay their bills, these billions will quickly give the economy a massive shot in the arm. To make it even easier on the gun owners, I’m happy to announce that if your base income for last year was less than $250,000 then the funds paid to you for your gun and bullets will be tax-free. Yes, tax-free; don’t you want a few hundred or even a few thousand tax-free dollars in your pocket? Even if you have 10,000 or more bullets and your income last year was under $250,000 that $10,000 paid to you is tax-free. Have a lot of bullets? Behind in your bills, sell us your bullets, and you’ll be current. Want a new car, sell us your firearms and bullets. Who wouldn’t want tax-free cash? This is a one-time offer. When the 60-day window closes, I promise you it won’t be reopened. This is your one chance to earn tax-free dollars. You don’t even have to wait, bring your gun to the police station, and you’ll walk out with cash in your pocket. Not a check, but CASH. Cash you can spend anywhere. So why are people fighting me? It’s because, after six years, the rich white Republicans have decided they can’t accept a black man as their President. They are fighting me at every step. They fight me over every policy which is meant to improve your lives, to protect your children. They even fought me over me trying to pay for universal preschool for every child. Did they fight President Bush when he passed no child left behind, no, they fight me because I’m black. They fight every black; they fight to hold all of us back. It’s time for the end of income equality; it’s time for the tax rate on the rich to be increased with the money flowing to the poorest. As such tonight I’ve signed an executive order to increase the tax rate on all income over $250,000 to a rate of 50%, I’m also doing away with all income taxes for anyone making less than $25,000 a year. Those of you in the bottom tier will no longer have to shoulder the burden of high taxes; the rich will cover what you owe. I’m sure the rich will fight me over this policy, to protect everyone; I signed an executive order creating a national curfew starting tonight. I know many of you work evenings; those in the health industry have to be available 24 hours a day, first responders need to get to their stations and return home when their shifts are over, we are distributing a new national license plate sticker to show that the owners of these stickers have a need to be out in the evenings. After all, why would any normal person want to be out and about at 3 or 4 AM? Even you singles; your dates are usually over by then, if not just shorten them a little; you all need your rest. There may be some confusion in the next couple of evenings while everyone gets used to the new rules so no fines will be levied on anyone for the first five evenings. I’m doing these things for you, for your children, I do what I do because I promised you change would come and benefit those who needed it the most. My fellow Americans I’ll speak with you again in a couple of days until then, bless all of you and your families. God bless the United States. Good night.”

I look at Ron and say; “The shit’s going to hit the fan now.”

Ron replies, Brad, you know a few of the local militia leaders don’t you?”

“Ron, how are you asking me this? As a sheriff or as my concerned friend?”

“As your friend.”

“Then meet me here at 2:30AM”

“Didn’t you hear what the President said about a curfew?”

“Bullshit, he also said no fines will be issued for a while, tonight everyone’s going to be confused, if you're serious be here at 2:30 and don’t wear your uniform, a few of these good old boys won’t like it.”

“See you in a few hours.”

Chapter 4

The Secretary of Homeland Security stands in front of the President’s desk in the Oval Office, “Mr. President we were unable get in the Pentagon and bring the senior commanders to meet with you.”

“What do you mean you couldn’t get in the Pentagon? Did you get lost? It’s that big ugly five-sided building just across the river. Do you want me to send my protective detail with you so they can show you where it is?”

“Mr. President, we found the Pentagon, when we arrived we were stopped at the gate, we were stopped because we didn’t have a valid DoD decal in addition we had our weapons. It seems we, the DHS, pushed for a new regulation that forbid bringing outside weapons onto military bases. We were asked to leave our weapons with the Guard; since we refused to leave our weapons with the Guard we weren’t allowed into the facility. We’re working with the AG (Attorney General) to issue us a special permit to bring our weapons onto their facility.”

The President gets very angry, “You wrote a regulation without a backdoor for your own department use and got caught up in it?”

“How the hell can I yell at the military for following your regulation? You’re an idiot; you didn’t need weapons; I sent you there to bring the assholes here for a meeting, not kill them. Get back there and bring them here.”

“Yes sir.”

@@@@@

The 11:00 PM sound bites on the national news programs are;

“The President cuts taxes!”

“The President announces a new plan to boost the economy.”

“The President announces income equality and a tax cut all at the same time, no one else could have pulled this off.”

“The President offers tax-free cash payments to gun owners.”

“The President’s plan will enable night shift workers much safer commutes by taking many people off the roads.”

@@@@@

The press swarmed to central Illinois to cover the first “official” gun buyback; a 68-year-old white male brought his 12 gauge shotgun, his.22 caliber Ruger 10/22 rifle and two bags filled with bullets to his local police station to sell back. He held his two long guns up over his head as he approached the police station on Main Street in Bloomington, Illinois. He smiled saying, I’m going to get a handful of cash. He entered the police station carrying the two guns, twenty minutes later he exited showing the crisp eight new $100 bills. When he turned to the left and moved out of the lights of the station six African American teenagers’ jump him, they shoved a revolver into his face demanding his money. He had no choice but to hand the $800.00 over; the youths grabbed the money; gun slapped him in the face and took off into the dark. The press recorded the entire event; none lifted a hand to help the poor man. None ran inside to get him help from the police; it was more important to record the event, true to the media’s progressive leanings, only the story showing the buy back was shown on the news programs. The mugging was edited out of the media’s reports.

@@@@@

At 2: 30AM Ron knocks on my front door, I’m dressed in old jeans and a leather jacket, he’s in his best torn and painted on jeans, I’m proud of him for leaving his uniform home. I look into his eyes, “Ron; we’ve been friends for over thirty years, please tell me this isn’t a sting operation.”

“Brad, I promise you, it’s not. I want to learn about these people, I think we’re facing a bad situation; I have a lot of specialized knowledge, I want to help where I can.”

“If you want to be all you can be, why didn’t you join the Army?”

“Brad cut the bullshit, when are we leaving?”

“Right now, and look Ron, please forget you were ever a sheriff, some of these guys may, well, just forget your past and don’t stare at any of them.”

We pull into Jakes’ parking lot at 2:50AM, I knock three times on his back door, then two more times; the door opens a crack, they see me, opening the door to allow me to enter. As I cross the threshold of the home that serves as Jakes gun store, they see Ron behind me. A strong hand pushes against my chest.

“Who the fuck is that with you?”

“Close friend. Known him more than thirty years.”

“What’s he do?”

“Currently unemployed has some unique knowledge that could help us. I vouch for him.”

“OK, hey you FNG (Fucking New Guy) we don’t use names, we don’t want to know yours, you don’t want to know ours, got it?”

Ron looked surprised, responding, “Yes, no names if you want to address me, I guess FNG will do.”

“Good, he’s got a sense of humor, I like that.”

“You’re the last to arrive, grab a seat and a cup of shine, we got some hot information from one of our friends. He told us that the military hasn’t decided yet if they’re going to support the President on his illegal gun grab. Most of their bases are in lock down. No one in and no one leaves. They are patrolling their fence lines with M4s and live ammo. We’ve had reports of C17s flying in and out of military bases around the clock. One of my brother’s buds told him that two carrier battle groups are heading home, one turned around before they reached their deployment location.”

Ron looks surprised and asks, “May I ask how you got this information?”

“Yeah, you can ask, but I ain’t saying, why do you want to know? Trust me, there is something brewing in the military.”

Ron says, “I know firsthand that some in the military are supporting the President’s gun grab, I heard there’s an Army major in the Leesburg sheriff’s office. I heard he’s the one calling the shots.”

“How do you know this?”

“I ain’t saying.” Smiling Ron takes a gulp of his shine and almost chokes, he’s coughing, his eyes tear, we all laugh at his little problem, I say, “Pretty smooth isn’t it? Smoother than paint thinner, I guess this batch is about 150 proof.”

“Next time warn the new guy.” We all laugh so hard tears form in our eyes.

One of the guys in the store who’ve seen here a couple of times asks, “What are we going to do?”

Jake says, “I got me an entire shop and warehouse full of guns, I ain’t selling them to the government at a loss I could sell them some of my ammo, at $1/round I figure I can make enough to retire.”

Ron asks, “Is the government buying back weapons in stores or just in private hands?”

Jake frowns saying, “The asshole didn’t say, and I could always fill out the forms to say their all mine if I had to. As to the ammo, I’ve got more than enough stashed away.”

I laugh and respond, “You’re not going to retire until they lay you in a pine box. You’re not going to sell the government any ammo either; my gut says we’re all going to need all we can get.”

“Yeah, yeah, go ahead and take my millions away from me, make me work until I’m an old man.”

“Hey asshole, you are an old man.”

After the laughing dies off, we discuss what we can do to hide our weapons. Jake suggests we give them to him; he’ll bury them on his farm. Jake says, “I’m going to start transporting most of my store’s inventory to the farm at dawn.

Ron says, “Buddy, make sure you bury them deep, I hear they are bringing in mine detection and metal locators, they’ll also have ground penetrating radar they can use to search for buried weapons.”

“I figured that, I have a little surprise for them; I’m not saying shit right now, don’t know you well enough yet. Bring me anything you want hidden in two days. Take them apart and carry them in a briefcase or small backpack. I’ll tag them; record the serial number and hide them, when the time comes you’ll get back your weapons and ammo. I hope we need them sooner than later, I know a few people in DC I’d like to show how an AR 15 really works, we can play catch, I’ll fire a bullet, and they can catch it.”

I ask, “Do you think it’s going to come to us fighting the feds?”

Ron answers, “If things continue to go downhill as they are now, I’m afraid we might be hiding in the woods waiting for the red coats to come marching to us.”

Jake laughs, “They wear camo now, I wish they wore red coats, makes them easier to see.”

Ron looks around at the group, he looks into the eyes of each person in the small room before saying, “There’s an old Chinese saying, be careful what you ask for, you might get it. If it comes to a fight, we’ll be fighting the United States Army, the same Army that beat Iraq in a few weeks, they beat the Nazi’s in World War 2. We’ll also be fighting the local, county and state police, the Marines, Air Force, National Guard and their reserves. In the revolutionary war, 3% of the people rose up to overthrow the British. How many will do the same today? How many are going to be willing to leave their families, their jobs, their BMWs, their vacations and clean bathrooms to fight our military? How many are going to be willing to be declared an outlaw and have the government take everything they own? It’s one thing to play in the woods or play paintball and another to fight in a real war. A war with an enemy that knows us, one that has superior firepower and armor.”

Ron’s remarks break up the meeting.

Driving home Ron is silent for a long time before he asks me, “Do you trust them?”

“Yes, I’ve done a lot of business with Jake for a long time. He’s got the gun store and also a large farm outside of town. We use it as a range; he could most likely hide an aircraft carrier there, and no one could find it.”

“Thanks, are you going to give him your guns?”

“Unless I can think of a better hiding place. I’m not turning them in or selling them, whatever they call it. What about you?”

“I’m about to show you how changed I am, yes, I’m thinking of giving him my personal weapons too.”

“Don’t the other deputies know what you own?”

“Sure, same as we know what you own, you remember those little forms you filled out when you bought your guns.”

“That is if I bought them at the store and not from a friend.”

“Yeah, that’s legal here or was until the President’s new order. Maybe I sold them to a friend in another state, or on another planet. There’s no way I’m going to let them have my weapons. I know they’ll start with the homes of us who walked out of the office and resigned. They’ll want to make an example out of us.”

We ride along staying just under the speed limit; I try to keep my eyes on the road and also on the rearview mirror.

“Ron, we got problems; a sheriff’s car just pulled in behind us, I think they’re going to pull us over, yup, his bubble gum lights just turned on, I hope he’s one of your friends.”

“Brad, I don’t have any friends left in the force.”

@@@@@

The Republican Senators reach their new home two miles outside Manassas, Virginia. The bus stops in front of one story office building; the bus door opens, the driver says, “All out, we’re here, welcome to your new safe home for a while.”

The Senators stumbled out of the bus standing in front of them is a line of black-uniformed DHS agents, the agents line the Senators up. The DHS Captain steps on a small podium looking at the group in front of them, “Ladies and Gentlemen I’m Department of Homeland Security Captain Wagner. I’ll be your host while we try to arrest those who’ve threatened to kill you because you refused to support the President’s programs. We’re going to do everything we can to make you both secure and happy. If you need anything just ask.”

The senior Senator from Arizona steps forward saying, “I spent five years in a North Vietnam prison camp, there’s no way I’m staying here. You’re full of crap. You’re not offering us protection; you’re holding us against our will. I demand a telephone, my lawyer and transportation out of here.”

Captain Wagner steps down off the podium; he stands in front of the Senator, “Senator, I’m going to tell you what you can have, one, your barracks are to the left, two, no telephones are allowed in this facility, and you can meet with your lawyer as soon as they arrive. Is that agreeable with you?”

“Captain, how will my lawyer know I’m here if I can’t call them?”

“Well, that is a problem isn’t it? I’m sure that someone as bright as you, who tried to win the Presidency, instead of our current President, who is really bringing change to this country will find a way to contact your lawyer. You’re not half the man our President is. Now do as I say, or we’ll drop you off in the middle of one of our burning inner cities which you people lit. I’ve had to move here to protect people whom I despise. You all think your crap don’t stink, well your seniority means crap here. I do have some good news for you; the President is going to visit here in two days to address your concerns. Now please go to one of the barracks where you’ll find a room with your name on it. Get settled in, dinner is at 7:00PM.”

Senator Rand steps forward saying, “Captain, do you realize that holding us against our will is kidnapping, which is a federal offense? You’ll end up going to a federal penitentiary.”

“We’re operating under orders from the National Command Authority, Senator, under the President’s executive order declaring Martial Law we have the right to hold you here for your security for thirty days. This isn’t kidnapping; the rules have changed. I could shoot you right now if I wanted to, and nothing will happen to me except maybe I’ll get an award for killing an enemy of the people. Now go to your rooms.”

@@@@@

The web is alive with hundreds of stories and rumors concerning the current events in the country. Some of the rumors floating around the web are, the FBI is going house to house to arrest the mega-rich, thousands have fled the country trying to reach Canada and Mexico who have sealed their borders with America. All international flights have been stopped. Bank accounts have been seized. No one knows what’s real and what’s not. The rumors add to the sense of fear in the country.

On the first day after the President’s national curfew address, 5% of the working population stay home in fear of what they’ll find outside their homes. Many small businesses never open. At 9AM, tens of thousands of people have lined up in front of most banks waiting for them to open.  All want to withdraw all of their funds before the government can take them. At 9:01AM, the banks receive an urgent fax from the FDC ordering them to limit withdrawals to $200 per person per day. Word spreads through the line at the Bank of America branch in Ashburn, Virginia; many scream in protest, some push their way into the bank demanding their money. A couple makes the mistake of pushing and manhandling the bank’s security guard, one of the pushed guards draws his sidearm shooting one of the customers. Panic spreads through the people in the bank; those still in line outside hear the gunshots and rush the guard, beating him to death. Others jump over the bank counter and grab money from the tellers, three of them learn too late that the cash drawers have dye packs in them. The dye packs explode covering the faces of the would-be thieves in green dye. Minute’s later four police cars arrive to stop the riot, they arrest the green-faced customers for bank robbery. The police close the bank for the safety of those in line. Those still in line scream at the police, some pickup rocks throwing them at the police. A riot breaks out between the customers and the police, as one officer goes down; he pulls his sidearm and fires into the crowd wounding four.

The crowd pushes forward stomping the guard who shot into the crowd, killing him. His police car is turned onto its side and set on fire.

@@@@@

The midday news program’s sound bites are;

“Police called to stop mass bank robbery.”

“Bank guard beaten to death as the rich try to withdraw all of their funds trying to avoid paying taxes.”

“The mega rich are trying to steal funds from the needy; they are once again trying to get out of paying their fair share.”

“A Heroic police offer was killed while trying to protect the needy waiting in line to get into their bank while the rich withdrew all of the banks funds.”

@@@@@

The President and The Speaker of the House meet over lunch, “Mr. Speaker, I hope I can count on you to pass my bills.”

“Mr. President, what does it matter, the Senate is in recess, without the Senate any bills we pass can’t come to your desk for signature, any bills we pass will be sitting waiting for the Senate to return, by the way, what did you do to with the Republican Senators?”

“Mr. Speaker, you pass my bills, and leave the Senate issue to me, I’ll get it through the Senate, once the bills pass and I sign them into law, you will have access to all of the funds you’ll need for your next election. In fact, I can promise you, your opponent will be so flawed you’ll win without having to spend 10% of your funds.”

“Mr. President, I think the country is going to be upset over these bills. I’m not even sure some of these are legal, I think the Supreme Court will overturn most of them.”

“Don’t worry about the Court, I have the Chief Justice in my pocket, some pictures the FBI have, you just pass the bills. By the way, how’s your lunch?”

Chapter 5

At 8:30 AM EDT, four black government DHS Suburbans, pull up to the Pentagon’s closed front gate. This morning there are two Army corporals on guard duty; they are wearing full combat gear including body armor. One has a model 1911 45 caliber sidearm strapped to his leg; the other is holding an M16 at port arms. The one with the sidearm approaches the driver’s window of the first black Suburban, “Good morning, welcome to the Pentagon, how may we be of service?”

“Corporal, I’m TSA special agent, Captain Redstone, I’m here on orders of the President to collect the four people named in the order. Our orders are to collect these four and deliver them to the White House. Here is a copy of our orders.”

“Captain, thank you, please wait one while I call in for instructions.”

“Front guard post calling Captain Grover, over.”

“Corporal, this is Captain Grover, what’s up?”

“Sir, we have four DHS Suburbans at the front gate; they have a written order on White House stationary ordering the four service chiefs to be handed over to them so they can be taken to the White House, their leader is a TSA Captain Redstone.”

“Corporal, did you say TSA Captain?”

“Yes sir.”

“Please ask them to wait one; I’ll be right there with a security team.”

An announcement is heard from the loudspeakers that ring the Pentagon “Quick reaction group 1 to front main gate, code BUSTER, repeat code BUSTER.”

The DHS agents look at each other wondering what code BUSTER means, they figure they’re going to find out very quickly; one of the agents pulls his sidearm out sliding it under his leg, so he’s ready in case code BUSTER turns out to be trouble.

Within three minutes, four Hummers and two LAVs arrive at the main gate; all of the military personnel are wearing full battle gear, all are carrying M4 carbines. Captain Grover walks over to the DHS Suburbans, “Hello, I’m US Marine Captain Grover the Corporal told me, you’re TSA agents, is this information correct?”

“Look Captain, you can clearly see my patch, I’m TSA Captain Redstone, and we have a valid written order so stand aside, open the gate and get out of our way.”

“Captain, the TSA has no jurisdiction here, are all of your people TSA agents?”

“Yes, we are a special TSA quick reaction team, and before you ask, we are armed and we have a ruling from the AG allowing us to enter your facility armed.”

Captain Grover looks concerned; he turns his head to his team saying, “Armed!”

Hearing the word armed, the military security team charges their weapons aiming them at the black Suburbans. Two 50 cal heavy machine guns are charged and aimed at the black Suburbans. TSA Captain Redstone says, “Whoa there Captain, we didn’t do anything wrong, we’re here on written orders, you have to allow us enter. Tell your people to lower their weapons or face arrest by my team for drawing weapons on Federal agents who are here on a legal mission.”

“Captain Redstone, thank you for your interest in visiting the Pentagon, I’m sure you’re aware that the TSA’s mandate is to screen baggage and people who are flying, as neither are happening here at the Pentagon, I’m going to have to ask you to leave now.”

“Look here Captain Grover, we are federal police, we can come and go as we please, now either you open the gate, or we’re going to crash through it, is that clear?”

“Listen to me very clearly TSA Agent Redstone, you have zero jurisdiction here, if you crash through our gate, you will be considered domestic terrorists and dealt with in an appropriate manner, this isn’t an airport, this is a United States Military facility, and we have the means to protect ourselves.”

Captain Redstone, yells, “Grover, you’re full of bullshit," with that he hits the gas of the lead Suburban, crashing through the front gate, brushing Captain Grover aside, knocking him to the ground, the LAVs and Hummers open fire with their M2 heavy machine guns shredding the DHS Suburbans. One catches fire and explodes when the flames reach its leaking gas tank. The Pentagon security troops check the vehicles for survivors, finding none, Captain Grover calls in the report, and he tells his troops to bag the bodies and maintain the current alert status.

The sound of the gunfire sends all of the quick reaction teams into action, they close every barrier, they assume defensive positions to repel anyone trying to break into the Pentagon. People inside the building are sent to safe areas, the senior officers are escorted to underground bunkers. After arriving in the command center bunker and being briefed Marine General Brownstone picks up the red telephone handset which connects him directly with the President. “Mr. President, this is General Brownstone, I’d like to inform you that the Pentagon was attacked today by a group of domestic terrorists. Our security squads successfully beat off the attack; there were no survivors. I’ve sent an alert notice to every Federal Agency, military base, and the Secret Service, to be alert for attackers dressed as TSA agents.”

Before the general can complete his report to the President, the door of the Oval Office opens, four Secret Service agents, two armed with MP5 submachine guns burst into the President’s office, two agents grab the President by his armpits; they start carrying/dragging him down the hall to the bunker’s elevator, saying, “Sir the Pentagon was just attacked, we have to get you to safety, please don’t resist, you’ll be safe once you’re in the bunker.”

“Idiot, I was just talking to General Brownstone when you yanked me out of my chair and ripped the handset out of my hand. Let me go, everything is going to be OK, I think it was just a big misunderstanding.”

“Sorry sir, we have our orders, any armed attack in DC means you have to go into the bunker.”

“That’s what I’m trying to tell you; it wasn’t an attack.”

“Sir, yes it was, black Suburbans attacked the Pentagon, they drove the front barrier. The military had to kill all of the attackers; there’s no telling how many more of them there could be operating in DC, and you may be the next target.”

The President is dragged screaming to be let go, down the hall, shoved into an elevator and pushed into the bunker under the White House. When he catches his breath, he yells, “Someone get me the Secretary of Home Land Security, I mean right now or you’ll all lose your jobs.”

“The lead Secret Service agent says “Sir, per standard operating procedure he is on a helicopter to Mount Weather, the Vice President is in Colorado, he’s on his way to Cheyenne Mountain, shall I continue?”

“No, just get the Secretary of the Department of Homeland Security on the line for me.”

“Yes sir, line two.”

“Tell me what the hell happened?”

“Mr. President, I don’t know; we sent four Suburbans to the Pentagon; they even had written orders typed on White House stationary, I don’t know what went wrong.”

“Well, find out and get back to me, and get me out of this bunker.”

@@@@@

The Speaker of the House holds a meeting with a majority of the membership to discuss the upcoming new bills. “Ladies and Gentlemen, I met with the President yesterday who gave me a list of the bills he’s sponsoring and wants us to pass. I’m passing you all a list to you, let’s discuss them one at a time.

The Congressman from the sixth district of New York stands yelling, “John, what is this pile of cat crap? Citizenship for illegals currently in the country? Mandating home workers join a union and pay dues? Making Common Core the law of the land? Increasing welfare payments while cutting Social Security? Creating a national holiday for Islam? John, I can’t support any of these, I would be voted out of office so fast my head would spin, hell I would be recalled. Most of us would be.”

“Congressman, I wouldn’t worry about that, keep reading, one bill forbids recalls of elected officials.”

“John, NO, and I mean DAMN NO, there’s no way I’m even going to listen to any more of this bullshit, what did he give you to support this bag of cat crap? Did he offer you some juicy Ambassadorship?”

“Congressman, either we pass them or he’ll do it by executive order.”

“I say, let him try it, we should go ahead and just impeach him, we’ve had an agreement, that once the midterm elections were held we would impeach the SOB, why haven’t you called for a vote? Could it be because you sold out? I make a motion we vote for a new Speaker.”

“Congressman don’t get carried away; you’ll get your vote for impeachment once the full Senate is convened.”

“John, when will that be? Where are the Republican Senators?”

“They are in a safe place; I was told there were many death threats made against them, and the DHS felt they had to move them to a safe and secure location for their safety.”

“If we don’t pass this list are we next?”

“Now Congressman, why would you ask such a thing?”

“Because the SOB in the White House is more of a dictator than he is President. My people sent me here to impeach him, not support him.”

“Calm down, we will hold our impeachment vote, but who said it has to be now? Why not milk this until right before the 2016 elections?”

“By then it’ll be too late, look at the damage he’s doing to our country, another 18 months of him and we’ll be a fourth world country. The damage will be so great; we’ll never recover.”

“Let’s take a vote, all those in favor of putting the impeachment on hold? Opposed?”

The vote is close, but the older and more experienced members carry the vote, the impeachment will be announced, but slow pedaled to just before the 2016 elections.

The Speaker says, “I’m going to start bringing these new bills to the floor for very limited debate tomorrow. Each member may have five minutes to speak on each bill. However, I want nothing aired that will embarrass us.”

“Mr. Speaker, that’s not a debate.”

“Those are my rules.”

@@@@@

Pulling out of the station I notice we’re being pulled over by a Sherriff, “Ron, I’m going to pull over and see what he wants, do you want to handle the questions? You were one of them.”

“Brad, if you don’t mind, I’m going to pull my ball cap down over my face and just sit here, you handle it, if they recognize me, they may go harder on you.”

“I didn’t do anything wrong.”

“Just cool it and don’t give the officer a hard time.”

The Sheriff walks over to my window, which I roll down, “Hello Sheriff, is something wrong?”

“License, registration and insurance card.”

“Officer, why did you pull me over?”

“Just give me your ID.”

I hand over the requested ID and wait. “Ron, what’s going on?”

“Brad, not sure, let’s see what he says when he returns. Right now he’s running your data through the police network.”

“Sir, are you carrying any firearms on your person or in your car?”

“No I’m not.”

“You, in the passenger seat, show me your ID.”

Ron, whispers, “Officer unless I’ve committed a crime, I don’t have to give them to you,”

“OK, both of you out of the car.”

We notice the second officer is standing behind my car with his hand on his sidearm as we exit the car a second sheriff’s car pulls in behind the first one whose stopped us. The two new officers walk towards us, saying, “What’s going on, are they giving you a hard time?”

“Sergeant, they are asking us questions.”

“The large sergeant reaches out; he slams my head against the roof of my car, “When you’re given an order by a sheriff you follow it, do you understand me? Don’t talk unless spoken to.”

“Was he armed?”

“He said no. However, his right eye blinked when he answered, I think he’s lying.”

“Sounds like just cause to me, he must have been hiding a weapon in the car, you have cause to tear the car apart to find a weapon.”

“Yes sergeant.”

Ron and I stand there with our hands on my car’s hood watching the four sheriffs tear my car apart looking for a weapon that isn’t there. Two hours later, I have a trashed car; my seats have been ripped open, door panels cut apart; the headliner slit in four places, the carpet torn up and my console ripped out of the car, Parts of my dashboard are lying on the ground near us. The initial officer approaches me, saying, “Well guess you were correct; you didn’t have any weapons in the car. You should be careful about breaking the new national curfew; you could get hurt.”

“Officer, what about my car?”

“What about it? We had cause to perform a search. Let me remind you, there are four of us, if you file a complaint, it’ll be tossed because all four of us will swear we found your car this way we were concerned for your safety, so we pulled you over to ensure you were safe and not being held against your will.”

“That’s total bullshit! You tore my car apart; you caused thousands of dollars in damage.”

“Hope you can prove it, by the way, we did find your cell phone in the console, it’s a shame it fell on the street and broke. The two of you can move along now, by the way, we don’t consider your car safe to drive; get the interior repaired before you drive it again.”

The two sheriff’s cars leave, I’m almost crying, my car, my toy, something I washed and waxed every week, babied since new is trashed, and the outside has hundreds of scratches from the sheriff’s leaning equipment against my fenders and lying equipment on the hood, roof, and trunk.

“Ron, is there anything I can do?”

“Yes, I’ll help you repair the damage, I have a couple of contacts who used to strip cars, I’m sure I can help get you a good deal getting the car repaired. As far as going after the sheriff’s department, forget it. Even if you get a settlement, you’ll be a target; if you cross the street wrong, you’ll be arrested. You don’t want to be on their wrong side.”

“Ron, when you guys act without any oversight it sure sucks.”

“Not me, I tried to follow the rules, the problem is when the ‘Oath Keepers’ left, the thugs remained, things are going to get much worse. If I had my way, none of them would have ever been hired they are all drunk with power and what they can get away with. I’m telling you, don’t cross them, you can’t win.”

“Damn, I was saving money for a .50 caliber rifle, there goes that dream.”

“Brad, what were you going to do with it in 60 days?”

“I could have good standoff range to service my targets. Don’t go get all logical on me. Want to stop for a beer?”

“I suggest we get home since we’re still in breach of the new curfew.”

“Spoilsport, OK, let’s go, I hope one of the springs in the seats bites your butt. I’d love to burn your uniform.”

“No you don’t, the day may come when I can I put it on again, one never knows what the future holds, come on over I have a case of beer I haven’t even started yet.”

@@@@@

The morning news program’s sound bites are;

“A deal is near to end illegal immigration.”

“House, to agree to stop recalls, will save the country hundreds of millions of dollars.”

“The hot rumor says the House will propose a bill to equalize all religions and install new holidays that will honor all religions.”

“Union membership and benefits for all.”

@@@@@

The President and his Attorney General meet over breakfast in the executive dining room, “Mr. President, I have an executive order drafted as you requested outlawing additional states to be created, hence shutting down the 51st state initiative in Colorado, the Western Maryland and Northern New York breakaway actions. This executive order doesn’t solve the issue with Texas. Their Governor is correct; they had the right to leave the union at any time.”

“I didn’t appoint you to AG to pick the wrong side; I don’t care what a damn agreement made a hundred years says, find a way to break it, or find enough state people to bribe to stall their movement.”

“Mr. President, they have already left the union, they have started to call themselves the Republic of Texas. I can’t stop the horse from leaving the barn if he’s already gone.”

“Get with the program, if you cause enough trouble for their citizens, they’ll come running home for protection. You gave enough assault weapons to those Mexican drug lords; have them start attacking the towns along the border. Kill a few, rape a few, burn a small town to the ground, and then their people will beg us to protect them. I want to see reports in tomorrow’s papers about the attacks; in fact, I’ll have a couple reporters sent to South Texas to be ready to report the attack on the poor defenseless people of South Texas.”

@@@@@

“General Brownstone, do you think we can get away with the killing of the TSA agents?”

“Admiral Zander, what DHS agents? We were attacked by domestic terrorists dressed as TSA agents, who else would be dumb enough to demand to enter the Pentagon dressed as a TSA agent? Who else would try to run down a US Marine Captain on the Pentagon grounds? Didn’t you hear me tell the President it was domestic terrorists? Captain Grover allowed the vehicles to burn so that nothing remained except for melted metal and plastic. The bodies are burnt beyond recognition.”

“What about their teeth?”

“What teeth, Captain Grover reported that all of their teeth were missing, as were their fingertips, we may never know who they were.”

“General, you’re a hard man.”

“Admiral, we have to be. Do you want to be dragged in front of the Commander in Chief and given a direct order to resign or fight our fellow Americans? As long as we don’t answer his summons we can play this little game. We have to convince Bracken to agree with us. If the Air Force sides with the President, we’re going to have a difficult time forcing him to reverse his executive orders. The Air Force can force the country to accept every whim of the President; they still control the strategic weapons except for your Trident boats. Which, by the way, how are you doing flushing all of them out to sea?”

“General, we have a total of 14 Trident boats; 2 are in dry dock for repairs and upgrades; 3 are in port being worked on, the other nine will be at sea under emergency war orders by 2400 hours this evening.”

“Admiral, what about the missiles in the 5 being worked on?”

“General, when the boats enter port for repair or dry dock, the missiles are removed and put in storage.”

“Good, I’m going to send some Force Recon Marines to take control of the missiles in storage.”

“General, what’s the worst case if Bracken doesn’t go along?”

“Admiral, better if you don’t ask, there are still a few, “Don’t ask, don’t tell” rules floating around, it would be best for everyone if he decides to join us. One way or another I can’t let the President destroy what so much blood has been spilled to build. I personally won’t allow it. No Marine will allow it.”

“General, be careful with talk like that, even our walls have ears, ears that report back to the SOB in the Oval Office.”

Chapter 6

On Thursday evening, the rioting in Baltimore reached a boiling point. The mobs and gangs realize they have very little locally left to loot and burn; most of their neighborhoods are already burnt and smoking ruins. All of the local stores have been looted to their bare shelves, then set on fire until the only thing remaining are burnt shells. The local leaders decide it’s time to move into the suburbs. At 10:00 PM the Baltimore mob move into the bedroom communities surrounding the city. The rioting mob burns everything in their path. They kill anyone in front of them who doesn’t join them; every woman, they encounter, is gang raped until she passes out, every store has their front windows smashed their inventory looted, and the balance of the store trashed, usually the store is set on fire. The Baltimore African American police officers refused to use deadly force against the mob. The fire department is told to use their fire hoses on the growing crowd. The high-pressure water proves to be enough to disperse the mob for the evening. The mobs return to their homes, on their way home most make plans to return tomorrow night since the area around the city is just too rich to pass up. They know they are entitled to their share. It isn’t fair others have so much and they have so little. Friday evening the mob, now double in numbers leaves Baltimore to attack the bedroom communities again, only this time they are prepared for the fire department. Many in the mob’s front row brought homemade shields to protect them from the water. The second row brought Molotov Cocktails to throw at the fire department trucks; many of the gasoline bombs find their targets, setting the fire engines ablaze. The fire department withdraws calling for help from the suburban police departments. When the police arrive, the mob rushes them before they have a chance to get organized or in some cases even exit their cars, many of the police cars are set on fire from the gasoline bombs. The police are surprised when they learn many in the crowd are armed, the mob fires at the police cars before they even come to a stop. The mob continues to grow in numbers, getting more violent with each attempt to slow them down. The mob covers another half a mile when they run into a barricade manned by armed civilians who are hiding behind trees, cars and trucks. Most of the civilians are armed with hunting rifles, shotguns, and AR 15s, the mob is armed primarily with handguns, the mob while armed, lacks firearms training. They fire on the run, holding their guns sideways like in the movies, most of their bullets go high or wide missing their targets. The armed civilians have training and experience with their weapons. The civilians heard about the rioting on the internet, most decided they were going to stop the mob before they could reach their homes. The citizens wait for the mob to get close when one of them yells, “Wait till you see the whites of their eyes.” They wait until the mob is only 50 yards from the barricade. Someone else yells FIRE! A hundred citizens open fire, most with semi-automatic rifles. Maryland’s anti-gun laws outlawed 30 round magazines, yet almost everyone showed up with pockets full of them. The aimed fire stops the mob in mid-step; the mob ran into a wall of bullets tearing them apart. The citizens were soon joined by more people; even a few of the local police officers decided to add their firepower in support of the citizens. The mob’s momentum was broken at the barricade; they turned around and ran back towards Baltimore.

@@@@@

The 11:00 PM sound bites on the national news programs are;

“Armed mob attacks African American youth expressing their first amendment rights.”

“Hundreds killed in a premeditated attack on African American youths.”

“Baltimore police report roving bands of armed Tea Partiers’ are shooting innocent youths who were only looking to visit the suburbs.”

“The horror of tonight’s shooting proves the President is correct, all firearms must be taken off of our streets.”

“Race war erupts in Baltimore.”

@@@@@

Both sides spend Saturday tending to their wounded and reviewing what happened. The fire department ensures the fires are completely out while both sides plan their next moves. Many churches in Baltimore call for a Sunday march for peace and understanding between the races. Reverend Sackson flies into Baltimore to lead the peace and anti-race parade. At noon, Sunday, Reverend Sackson leads thousands of singing and chanting people in a parade out of Baltimore. The citizens are ready for anything that might happen. Their numbers have been reinforced by local militias who’ve come to support the locals. The armed citizens built a larger barricade blocking the three freeway exits to their town. As the parade continues their forward progress, the militias and citizens are waiting for them. A bus arrives in the middle of the two groups, exiting the bus are preachers, Rabbi’s, and the Deacon of Baltimore. The holy men hold their Bibles above their heads praying for peace and understanding. Some of the preachers also hold large crosses in the air. The oncoming mob stops when they see the preachers. Many of the women in the front line of the mob stop, falling to their knees praying with the holy men. The militia and armed civilians start to relax thinking the holy men will be able to stop the mob and turn them around. They lower their alertness and relax when from the back of the mob, and a voice is heard yelling; “Allah Akbar” wildly firing at the holy men. All fall being hit from the shooters embedded in the mob.

Both sides pause when they hear the shooting. Each side thinks the other opened fire, causing both to fire. Before the shooting ends, over 300 are killed or seriously wounded.

Sunday afternoon churches all over the country are filled with people singing John Lennon’s song, “Give Peace a Chance.” Preachers tell their flocks to pray for divine guidance. People take to the streets chanting “Give Peace a Chance.”

The President addresses the nation at 5:00 PM Sunday afternoon saying, “My fellow Americans, today hundreds of mothers cry over the loss of their children. Children who’ll never come home again. Hundreds of the very best and brightest of our youth will never come home. Today hundreds of our young were cut down without reason by racist wealthy people who took out their frustrations on our loved young men and women. Many died in cold blood cut down in the middle of the street while expressing their first amendment rights in a peaceful parade. This senseless killing has gone on long enough. When I was elected in 2008, I promised to end senseless violence and senseless racial fighting, what took place today outside of Baltimore reverses the progress we’ve jointly made in the past six years. Congress in their inaction has forced me to act via executive orders. Congress has refused to protect our youth; Congress has refused to remove deadly firearms from our streets. A week ago I offered a 60-day firearm buyback program. The dual goals of this program are to remove firearms from our streets while at the same time providing many families with much-needed additional funds in tax-free cash. We’ve all seen the videos of the many happy firearm owners who have sold their weapons back to the government. One of these people walked out of his local police station with $30,000 in crisp new hundred dollar bills. Can you imagine the look of pure joy on that man’s family’s faces when he walked in the door with $30,000 in tax-free dollars? Thousands of firearm owners have already taken advantage of the generous buyback program; I thank every one of these brave people who have helped us remove deadly weapons off of our streets. Today’s horrible event, which made the first lady cry for thirty minutes, clearly shows we can’t wait 60 days. We can’t allow another senseless killing of our children ever to happen again. As such, I’m announcing that the firearm gun buyback program is now mandatory and is being accelerated from 60 to 30 days. I know you’re thinking how can 300 million firearms be collected within 30 days; the answer is, we can do it by working together, we can clean our streets and ensure such senseless violence never happens again. We have to do everything we can do save the life of every single child. The Department of Homeland Security is going to set up collection locations with the assistance of our local police and National Guard, who are your neighbors, your friends helping us save our children. These new collection sites will take place in the short-term parking lots of every airport. Airports have firearm trained TSA agents on site, I say to every gun owner, bring your firearm to your nearest airport short term parking lot, there you’ll see TSA vans waiting to help you help all of us. While the buyback program is in effect, the short-term parking lots will be closed for regular airport parking. I’m sorry for any inconvenience this may cause. Any cars currently in the short term parking lots have to be moved within 12 hours, or the TSA will have them towed at the owner’s expense. I’m also announcing this evening that by executive order I’m making it illegal to be a member or join or form a local, state, or regional militia. It’s very clear from today’s unfortunate event that a local militia went out of control which led to the deaths of many of our children. Any militia that doesn't disband within 48 hours will be tracked down by agents of the TSA and Department of Home Land Security. You WILL be found; you WILL be taken into custody. You WILL not get away with any more senseless violence. Goodnight my fellow Americans.”

The talking heads took to the air as soon as the President ended his speech. They were, of course, all supportive of the President. Their sound bites are;

“The President calls on the entire nation to save every child by turning in firearms early.”

“The President accuses militias of killing hundreds of our best and brightest young; he outlaws the out of control, lawless militias.”

“The end of useless and racist militias.”

“Mr. President, THANK YOU, It’s about time you got rid of these evil racist militias.”

@@@@@

My phone rang as soon as the President completed his speech. “Hello, Brad here.”

“Brad, it’s Ron, can I come over?”

“Sure, but it’s after curfew, are you going to be OK?”

“Don’t worry about me, I have some information I need to tell you. Turn your outside lights off; I don’t want anyone seeing me at your house. Unlock your door in 15 minutes, I’ll let myself in.”

“OK, see you soon.”

Hanging up, I wonder what the fuck is so urgent Ron can’t wait till morning or tell me over the phone. I turn off my outside lights and unlock the door. I wonder, isn’t Ron’s car going to be seen coming here? What difference does having my outside lights on make?

Twenty minutes later, my front door opens, I didn’t even hear Ron’s car. Ron says, “Hi Brad, got a beer for a thirsty friend?”

“I didn’t hear your car, how did you get here?”

“Don’t ask, you don’t need to know some things right now. Brad, I’m being watched, I think you are too. I got a note in a blank envelope saying that the sheriffs are watching anyone who has at least five firearms and anyone who failed to support the President’s buyback program. Of all of my friends, you have the most firearms.”

“Ron, I have only a few; maybe six bought through an FFL dealer, you know what I have, why aren’t they looking for people who have ten or twenty?”

“Brad, they’re looking to bust a few people to make a big splash about people owning illegal or ghost guns. They’re using drones to find people who are trying to bury their guns; by the way, the President signed a secret executive order that if a person is caught hiding firearms or is caught in possession of illegal firearms, the government can confiscate all of their property. Brad, think about that, if we turn our weapons over to Jake, and Jake gets caught, not only will Jake lose everything, but everyone, whose guns are hidden at Jakes, will also lose everything, Brad that’s us. As an ex-Sheriff, I’ll make a perfect example for them. I can’t afford to be made an example of, nor can I afford to lose everything I own, can you?”

“Ron, you mean like they take cars from drug dealers?”

“No, like they’ll take your home, everything you own, all of your funds, everything. You’ll be tossed into jail or onto the street penniless.”

“Can they really do this to us?”

“The President signed an executive order which makes it legal; so far Congress hasn’t said a peep about stopping or even slowing him down. Can you imagine the impact when a couple of people get busted and lose everything they own on national television?”

“Crap, what are we going to do?”

“Give me another beer.”

@@@@@

Rash Linebacker and Glenn Backs have the number one and number three highest rated talk radio programs on the air, which now have to broadcast on the internet. The government has tried for a week to find where they are broadcasting from and shut them down. Neither host had previously met each other, even though both had been on the air for twenty plus years. Tonight they both came together to do a joint broadcast. They agreed to do a special combined program in the evening because they had to try and get the message out that the President is leading the country into total ruin, and he’s running the country as a dictator. Freedom is dead. They began their special program with the playing of Taps; the 24 haunting notes that once heard are never forgotten, they’re played by a US Army bugler live in their studio followed by a minute of silence. Rash and Glenn began their special joint program explaining the truth behind the day’s events. They explained the youths weren’t innocent; they caused millions of dollars of damage in downtown Baltimore. They destroyed the stadium where the Ravens played. They destroyed hotels and restaurants. They beat up, raped and killed every White or Asian in their path. Their militia didn’t shoot first. The President made up the story and changed it around to make the people trying to save their homes the villains. They explain the secret executive order whereby anyone caught not turning in their firearms could lose everything they owned. They posted cell phone video of the day’s battle outside Baltimore proving the President was lying about the entire story. The videos are date stamped as additional proof. The internet and Twitter light up with comments, many not believing the President would lie, many others demanding the President be impeached. Some say the mob was right to attack the suburbs since they had stolen everything from the inner cities. The discussions become very heated; many times Twitter posts fight with each other, pro and con, the two show hosts are pleased they can wake some people up, their lines are jammed with hundreds of thousands of people calling, emailing, instant messaging and tweeting, more than 90% supporting the program’s hosts. The two hosts keep the heat up by posting eyewitness stories pictures and hundreds of videos. They start doing Skype calls with their followers when they suddenly go offline. Federal Marshals break down their studio door, arresting them for high treason. People are shocked the next day when it’s announced that a gas line exploded under the illegal internet studio killing the two famous talk show hosts and their staffs.

Some of the morning news programs are gleeful the two right wing tea baggers are gone. Some of the morning sound bites are;

“They got what they deserved; they should have never spoken out against the President.”

“Our President is doing more than anyone else to save our children’s lives. Anyone, who speaks out against him, deserves to die.”

Martin Bradshere returns to his program on CNN saying, “Rash and Glenn were two hell spawn demons who have gone back to serve their master Satan.”

The web is alive with comments both for and against the two famous radio personalities. Many praised the two; many said the Federal Government killed them, and it’s the duty of every citizen not to support the government. One person posted Thomas Jefferson’s famous sentence on every social network, “The tree of liberty must be refreshed from time to time with the blood of patriots and tyrants. It is its natural manure.” Many people shared and reposted it, many others, even more tweeted it, some went so far as to spray paint it on government building walls while others painted it on blank billboards. The Department of Homeland Security issued a regulation stating that the message is considered ‘hate speech’ and those caught using it will be arrested and classified as domestic terrorists.

At the same time, the morning news programs report the deaths of the two radio hosts, a 59-year old man in Ashburn Virginia woke at 6:15 AM. Michael had been born in Colombia, Maryland where his parents worked at the State University. Today, like he did every morning, he had a cup of coffee while he made breakfast; he had the same breakfast every day for 40 years. He read the paper while he ate his breakfast. Sometimes he would linger over a cup of coffee remembering his days as a pilot in the Air Force. He flew an F16 in the first Gulf War. He loved flying; it was the only time he truly felt free. Normally he worked as an engineer for Harris; he arrived in his cubical every day at 8:15 and left at 5:30. He lived alone; he ate out on Friday and Saturday evenings. He had been married for twenty years; he loved his wife so deeply it hurt when he was separated from her. One Wednesday morning he woke and showered as he normally did, when he returned to their bedroom to dress for work, he bent down to kiss his wife good morning. She didn’t stir, he felt her head; it was cool, he felt her neck, there wasn’t a pulse. He picked up the phone to dial 911. The police arrived within two minutes; they found him standing next to the bed wearing a pair of black pants, no shoes and a T-shirt holding her hand. The police sergeant tried to explain to him she’d passed on sometime during the night. Her heart had stopped. Michael felt his life drain away as they took his wife’s body to the morgue. As the months and years progressed, Michael became an avid patriot. He was an early member of the Northern Virginia Tea Party. He did everything in his power to stop the federal government power grab and the destruction of personal freedoms. On Sunday afternoon, he watched the televised reports of the shootings. He became furious with the way the news reported the events. He decided he was going to do something, something that would most likely cost him his life. He went to visit a couple of like-minded friends; he explained his plans to his friends. The four of them pitched in making a large bright yellow banner. On Monday morning, he woke as he always did dressed and left the house; he left a note behind in case he didn’t return from his mission. A mission he planned in detail most of Sunday night. He drove to the Leesburg, Virginia airport, where he and his four ex-Air Force pilot friends shared ownership of a small single engine plane. He preflighted the plane, started the engine, and contacted the tower which gave him permission to take off. He was calm knowing this might his last flight. His friends were OK with the potential loss of the plane since it was going to be used for freedom. When he reached 500 feet, he turned to follow the Virginia Greenway, he then released a large yellow banner saying, “We the People have had enough. Don’t tread on us.” He flew over the Greenway, then turned to fly over the beltway, following the beltway he flew around Washington DC with the banner flying behind him. The DHS called NORAD for help claiming the small airplane was violating the restricted airspace over the Capital and could be filled with explosives. It could be a terrorist plane getting ready to fly into the White House. Two F 22 Raptors are scrambled from Andrews Air Force base. They race to the position of the small plane an AWACS command plane gave the Raptors the single-engine plane’s position. The Raptors flew at 600 knots eating up the distance between Andrews and the beltway in seconds. They easily found the plane, which they noted was staying just outside of the restricted airspace, minding its own business; just flying over the beltway towing the banner. The two Air Force pilots read the banner and laugh, they radio back to base; “Raptor flight of 2, have suspect in sight, he’s staying just outside of restricted airspace, he’s flying low and slow, he’s towing a large yellow banner behind him. In our estimate, he’s completely harmless. Over.”

“Raptor flight, this is Able six actual, code is bacon, I say again code is bacon.”

“Able six actual, say again?”

“Raptor flight, repeat code bacon, confirmation green six four.”

The two Raptor pilots switch to a private channel, “Raptor two this is lead, did you copy code bacon?”

“Yes, I don’t agree, he’s not dangerous, just exercising his first amendment rights, I’m refusing code bacon, how about you? Want blood on your hands?”

“No, I’m also refusing the order.”

Changing the channel, “Able six actual, this is Raptor one, we both say negative, repeat, negative code bacon, small airplane is in our opinion not dangerous, we refuse to execute code bacon and splash the target.”

“Raptor lead, this is a direct order from the National Command Authority, over.”

“Able six actual, negative, this is an illegal order, Raptor flight is refusing to comply, we are RTB. (Return To Base).”

“Roger, report to me when you land.”

On the private channel Raptor, two calls one, “Sir, I think our career in the Air Force is over, I wonder how hard it is to fly off of a floating runway, maybe the Navy would like a couple of pilots.”

“I enjoyed this job; I love the Raptor, it’s like flying a science fiction craft. I hope we don’t get arrested when we land; we’ll see soon enough, listen, just say I gave you the order not to follow code beacon, you’ll be OK.”

“No, sir, we both jointly agreed not to bring the poor SOB down. Something is very wrong if the National Command Authority ordered the shooting down of a small plane just carrying out his first amendment rights, something with this sucks. If we’re going to be cashiered, we might as well give them cause, how about we break Mach on the way home?”

“Roger, at least we’ll go out with a bang, advancing to military power now.”

Both Raptors accelerate to Mach 1.2 in an instant; their sonic boom followed them at ground level breaking windows and scaring people going to work. Many looked up to see two dark fighters flash across the sky followed by a boom that rocked their cars. Many called 911 calming they saw UFOs flying over the beltway or Russian fighters. Many called demanding compensation for broken windows, one woman called 911 complaining that the noise woke her baby.

The Raptors are met by armed air police when they land. Both pilots are escorted to the Colonel’s office, “Well look who decided to drop by for a visit. Asshole 1 and asshole 2. You had been two of my best pilots before you decided not to follow orders that came down directly from the Commander in Chief. What in the blue hell were you two hot shots thinking?”

“Sir, we intercepted the plane. It was a small single engine Piper. Sir it was outside of the restricted zone, sir, repeating it was outside of the restricted zone. The pilot waved and gave us a thumbs up. He was towing a banner. Sir to shoot him down would be murder. We’re fighter pilots flying the world’s hottest plane, we’re not murders.”

“You were given an order from the Commander in Chief.”

“Sir, we have the right to refuse an illegal order. To have carried out the order would have resulted in an illegal act.”

“Gentlemen, relax, I happen to agree with you. I want both of you off this base within an hour; the Feds are most likely going to be coming here to find you. Go on leave, go get lost, stay in touch via text, if something comes up, I’ll contact you.”

@@@@@

Rachel Madcow led off her program on MSNBX saying, “The time has come to take a hard look at the racial situation in our country. For far too long African Americans have been viewed as second-class citizens. They were enslaved; they were denied equal rights, and they typically grow up in single parent homes because the whites in America do everything possible to keep the black man and woman a second-class citizen. Look at yesterday’s events. A group of peaceful inner city young mostly African Americas were peacefully parading when they were attacked by a white racist Tea Party. Our President has gone out of his way to protect all Americans. All he asks of us is to treat everyone with respect. He asks us to treat everyone as equals. When we address a person of another race, we have to remember their upbringing and the conditions they grew up in. Much of the violence attributed to the inner city young isn’t their fault; they tend towards violence because they’ve never been given the respect they deserve. Our poor and oppressed are so because we as a country have let them down. It’s all of our duties to support our elected President. The internet is full of stories shouting about revolution, and the Constitution says this and the Constitution says that. Well, I’m here to tell you the Constitution is a document written over 200 years ago. Before the internet or instant communications. The Constitution was written for another time and other conditions. We shouldn’t be bound by a document written 200 years ago by a group of rich white men that kept slaves. Slave owners wrote our Constitution, as such how can we expect our young African Americans to live by it?”

@@@@@

Admiral Zander placed the red telephone down after listening to his orders from the Commander in Chief. The Admiral called General Simpson, “General; the President has just given us a direct order to appear in the Oval Office in thirty minutes.”

“Admiral, we’ve discussed this, I’ll see you at the White House, as agreed we’ll travel in four vehicles and four decoys just in case our friends over at DHS decide to try and detour us. I’ve alerted Captain Grover to prepare the security details.”

The four service chiefs arrive at the White House. Six armed secret service agents meet the four service chiefs. The lead secret service agent address’ the group, “Generals, Admiral, are any of you armed this afternoon?”

“General Simpson responds for the group, “Senior Agent Brandon, we aren’t armed. We did bring our own security details who are armed with M4s.”

“General, your security details will have to remain outside of the White House.”

“Agent Brandon, that’s fine.”

“Captain Grover, please wait here with the security details, Captain, code word is ice blue; repeat ice blue.”

“General, I understand, code ice blue, understand and will comply, sir, thirty minutes to code change.”

“Captain confirmed.”

Senior Agent Brandon looks at General Simpson, “General, what’s code ice blue mean?”

“Agent, it means to stay here and be alert, the thirty minutes means we should return in thirty minutes.”

“General, and if you’re not back in thirty?”

“Than agent, your people might get to meet the Captain in different circumstances.”

“General?”

“Lead the way Agent.”

The service chiefs are led directly into the Oval Office where the President and the Secretary of Home Land Security are waiting for them.”

The President remains sitting behind his desk with his feet propped up on the desk’s corner, “Generals, Admiral, thank you for coming. I’m glad we have this opportunity to work out our differences face to face. I would like each of you to review the senior officers under your command to ascertain where they stand on the Constitution. Are they going to defend it? Are your people prepared to fire on other Americans who may be on the domestic terrorist lists? Are your people willing to swear an oath of allegiance to me?”

“Mr. President, every member of the armed services, swears an oath to defend the United States Constitution, we swear to obey your orders and those of the officers appointed above us. We pledge to defend the country against all threats, foreign and domestic. Mr. President, I hope you understand what our oath says because our answer to you is in our oath.”

“Generals, Admiral, then we agree, which is very good. I see we’re all on the same side, I have nothing else to say to you at this time.”

The Secretary of the Department of Homeland Security stood saying, “Mr. President, ask them what happened to my men who went to the Pentagon to see these officers.”

“General, do you have any comment to the Secretary?”

“Mr. President, Mr. Secretary, I have no personal knowledge of any of your agents who came to the Pentagon, I only know about a group of domestic terrorists tried to attack our facility. These terrorists were met and defeated by our rapid mobile security forces. Our security squads saved many lives by defeating these terrorists.”

The Secretary jumped up and stood in front of General Simpson, “Sir; you lie.”

The general takes a half step forward, coming nose to nose with the Secretary, he lowers his voice so that only the two of them can hear what he says, “Talk like that to me again and sir, you will not live to wake another day. Do you understand me you little shit?”

The Secretary starts shaking, he responds, “General no one speaks to me like that.”

“Someone just did, what are you going to do about it?”

The four service chief’s turnaround walking out of the Oval Office, leaving the Secretary of Homeland Security shaking in anger and the President sitting behind his desk smiling. Two hours later the four of them meet in the Pentagon bunker. “Admiral, what are your thoughts?”

“General, my gut says, we’re on the verge of a civil war. That crazy SOB in the Oval Office is preparing to go to war against the American people in order to hold power; the question is what are we going to do about it. We swore an oath to defend the Constitution. Since he’s breaching the Constitution, does he, our, Commander in Chief, our President fall into the category of a domestic enemy? He wants us, the entire military to swear an oath to him, just like Hitler did with the German military.”

Chapter 7

The President and his Chief of Staff (CoS) discuss the President’s next move. The CoS is worried the President hasn’t taken sufficient action to respond to the slaughter outside of Baltimore. The President tells his CoS, “We lost the midterms, we lost additional seats in the House, and we lost the Senate, I’m going to shake the country up so that I can control everything through executive orders. There’s no way I can count on Congress supporting me. Even with the Republican Senators being held in Manassas, the House can block my policies. I bribed the Speaker to bring my policies to the floor; I know I can’t count on all of those Tea Baggers voting with me.”

“Sir, what do you in mind?”

“I’m going to create such an uproar in the country that the people will be behind me no matter what Congress decides. I said I was going to transform the country, what I have planned will allow me to use executive orders to complete the transformation. I plan to address the nation next week.”

“I’ll have the press secretary announce you’re going to make a new major policy statement.”

“Oh, and, by the way, with all of the domestic terrorism happening, I think it would be wise for me to address the country and Congress from here in the White House versus going to the Capital.”

“Sir, its tradition the President go to the Capital when they're addressing both houses of Congress.”

“I don’t care about tradition. Didn’t I just finish saying I’m going to transform the country, I’m not going there, and it’s not safe for me to go there.”

“Yes, sir, Press and I will work something up to explain it. Sir, do you think the country will hold still for another week?”

“You and Press make the announcements about my major policy statement; the country will be sitting in front of their TVs and computers waiting for me to make my statement, nothing is more important to the country or maybe even the entire world then my remarks. Inform the world as such. Oh and on your way out, please ask the Secretary of Homeland Security to see me.”

“Yes sir.”

The Chief of Staff leaves the President’s office thinking, there sits the smartest man in the world, he’s writing history, hell, he’s rewriting history right in front of me. I’m part of his inner circle, the group that’s changing the world. One day my great grandchildren will be so proud of me. My place in history is assured. I wonder what he has in mind.”

The Secretary of Homeland Security enters the Oval Office, “Mr. President you wanted to see me?”

“Yes, Edgar, we need to give the country another little push. I’ve tried to explain to the people that income inequality is a serious if not the most serious issue we’re facing that is after gun control, which is now solved, and climate change, which I’ll tackle shortly. I have an idea how to get the people wound up in the next week; however I need some of your help in preparing for the little shove of our people.”

The Secretary of Homeland Security leaves the Oval Office smiling, thinking the man is a genius. This is going to be fun. The Secretary returns to his office, making some calls. Tomorrow is going to be the start of a new dawn in America.

The next day dawns bright and clear. However, there are subtle differences, ones, most people starting their day miss. For example, in New York City a large number of young people start to gather on the Upper East Side, in Miami, groups gather in the wealthy areas, in fact, in every city group’s small and large start to gather. All have been given coded instructions through social networks. The various groups go to their instructed locations where they pick up banners, professionally painted signs, some of which still have wet paint on them. DHS has had people working all night printing the maps, organizing the people, getting the messages out, printing the signs and banners. Everything had to be timed perfectly so that the press recorded everything. Loyal members of the press had been contacted in the middle of the night and told to be at specific locations at specific times in almost every major city. The only cities that are going to be left alone are Hollywood and Beverly Hills. The President had reached an agreement with the Hollywood stars to ensure they were left alone in exchange for their support and making propaganda films. The President ordered a series of direct to video and direct to the internet movies using his movie star and director donors to explain in very simple terms where the Republicans and the Tea Party are wrong, why terms limits for any office is a bad idea. The movies and videos explain that if term limits were in place, every few years there would be a mass turnover in Congress. The country would lose the experience; experience that’s required to move bills through Congress. If the country lost this experience, it would be dangerous to the country. By the time, newly elected officials figure out where the restrooms are; their terms would be up, and the process will have to start all again. In the late 1930’s the Nazi’s created very successful propaganda movies to turn the population against the Jews, this time the President and his advisors have twenty-first-century computer technology on their side. The President is making movies that rewrite history making the viewers believe what they see really happened.

At 7:45AM The press arrives at the locations they were told to be at, in order to get exclusive stories, no reporter in their right mind, (assumes reporters start out in their right minds, which they don’t) would ever refuse the chance for a real exclusive. The reporters wonder what the special story is. The reporters spend a couple of minutes checking their cameras, sound levels, the lighting and making sure every hair on their heads is perfect. When out of nowhere comes screaming and chanting, “Down with the 1%, the 1% have robbed America blind.” Hundreds of people carrying banners and signs start down the major streets in the upper-income areas of each city. (No one questioned why all of the signs and banners said the same thing) A few of the reporters yawn, thinking to themselves, “Just another occupy rip off. What a waste of time.” What’s different this time is the crowd starts attacking the homes and office buildings owned by the rich? They break into the homes, they break all of the windows. The mob drags the owners out of their homes. The mob ties the owners to trees in their front yards; they are forced to watch their homes looted, torn apart and then set ablaze. They’re forced to watch their famous works of art burned in front of them, their designer clothing, their $1,000 a pair of shoes, their $5,000 suits; everything is burned to ashes in front of the crying and begging owners. A small group of people stand in front of the owners, saying, “You have been judged and found guilty by the people. Guilty of not paying your fair share, you are guilty of stealing resources from the average American, you are guilty of wasting resources, we the people have judged you guilty, and your punishment is the loss of your belongings so you can suffer like the rest of us have. You’ve raped us so you could get rich while we the people got poorer. We lost our jobs; we lost our homes; we lost our savings while you took everything from us. You are going to learn what suffering is, we the people have judged you and found you guilty. As you’ve raped us, we are going to rape your wives and daughters. You will be marked for life as a 1%.” A hot poker is taken from the fire; the poker is a brand that says 1%, when it’s white hot the brand is pushed against the owner’s foreheads. The rich scream from the burning pain, those around the owners can smell the owner's flesh burn from a hot poker. Most of the rich pass out, they are left tied to the trees in their front yards. House by house the mob goes, burning the mansions to the ground, every owner is branded. The children of the wealthy owners are taken by the mob to be given to a poor family so they can understand the suffering their parents caused the rest of the country.

Office buildings owned by the wealthy have their glass windows smashed 1% is painted on the building’s walls in human manure. Every bank along the mob’s path has their windows broken, their signs torn down, and “THIEF” spray painted on their walls. The mob moves from building to building; the street is covered in broken glass, every store owned by the wealthy is looted, their inventory is tossed into the middle of the street and set on fire. Every car parked along the streets has their windows smashed, people jump onto the roofs and hoods, jumping up and down denting the sheet metal beyond repair. Many of the cars have gasoline poured on them and set on fire causing them to explode when the flames reach the gas tanks.

The reporters can’t believe what they’re watching, wanton destruction, burning, smashing and destroying everything in the mobs path. Dragging people out of their homes, trying them in people’s courts and branding and raping them is more than some of the reporters can take. What if it the mob reaches their homes? Could they be next? Could they lose everything they own too?

One of the older reporters looks around at the scene in front of him, he tells his camera man, “This is worse than the Kristallnacht in 1938. Than 91 Jews were killed, today a lot more could die, where are the police? Where is the fire department?” The reporter’s grandfather told him the story of Kristallnacht; his grandfather still had the tattoo on his forearm when he died. The reporter knows in his gut this was set up by someone very high up in government. He thinks, who could pull together all of the resources to organize mobs around the country? Who could have signs and banners printed up in a short time? Who could have supplied the addresses of the mega-wealthy? Who’s powerful enough to make sure the police and fire departments stayed out of the area? He knows he can’t ever mention his assumptions on the air or his career will end before he completes his report. In 1938 Germany, the Nazi party setup Kristallnacht to start a war against the Jews, he knows today’s event is the government formalizing a massive propaganda war against the 1%. He knows the Federal Government must be behind this; a week before the President addresses both houses of Congress and the world; he knows who’s behind it. What he doesn’t know is how to explain it to the world so they’ll understand what’s going on. He wishes Rash and Glenn were still alive; they would see right through the smoke screen and tell the world what was going on. He sat on the curb watching the chaos going on all around him. A feeling of deep sadness washes over him. The sadness comes from watching his country burn and die in front of him. Sadness and helpfulness fill him. He was happy his grandfather hadn’t lived long enough to see this day; first his grandfather wouldn’t have believed it could happen in America and second because the sight would break his heart and kill him. The last thought the reporter had before a rock struck him on the forehead was, history does repeat itself.

@@@@@@

At 2:00 PM the four US Military service commanders gather in the War Room under the Pentagon, two are drinking coffee; one is sipping a diet coke, and the other is waiting, waiting for the others to speak. General Simpson sits down saying, “Gentlemen I’m sure we’ve all seen the news. The riots, the burning, the wanton destruction, the raping, the branding. Where were the police, where were the fire departments? We all know this was a created mob, an event that has the fingerprints of our friends over at DHS all over it. DHS wasn’t alone in pulling this off; there’s only one person who could have ordered this and gotten away with it, he’s the only person who hasn’t said a word about it. There’s total silence from the White House. We started a discussion a week ago asking if our Commander and Chief can also be a domestic enemy. As far as I’m concerned the question has been answered.”

General Bracken looked around the table; he looked down at his empty glass of water. “How can the Commander in Chief be our enemy? The oath we swore when we enlisted said we agreed to follow the orders of our Commander in Chief and the officers appointed over us. I can’t come to grips with the President being an enemy of the country. I can’t. I’ve tried; I went for a walk at lunch to see firsthand the damage and the wanton destruction. I saw it; I agree that someone in the government had to have given tassel approval for this to have happened. I saw it with my own eyes, but I can’t figure out how we got here and why the CIC would allow this to have happened let alone have a hand in it. I can’t agree right now that he’s the enemy of the country.”

Admiral Zander sadly responds, “General, what about the gun grab, isn’t he breaking the Constitution, isn’t he breaking the second amendment?”

General Bracken, looked the Admiral eye to eye saying, “Admiral, we all know something had to be done. There were more shootings in Chicago last year than in Afghanistan. More children died in drive-by shootings than we lost troops in an active war zone. Don’t you agree something had to be done?”

General Simpson replied, “General, taking guns away from the law-abiding will leave guns only in the hands of criminals, do you want the law abiding citizens to be defenseless?

“General, can’t the damn DHS get ALL of the guns off the streets?”

“General, you know damn well; not everyone will turn them in, remember your history, the British thought the same thing, if they could disarm the colonies than the colonies couldn’t revolt. Our forefathers wrote the second not for hunting, but for times like these. What are you going to say if he decides to run for a third term?”

“Admiral, he wouldn’t dare, the people wouldn’t stand for that.”

“Really? In many schools, the Constitution isn’t even taught any longer, how would most know he’s breaking the law, how many laws has he broken and gotten away with? Who’s going to stop him?”

“Listen, if we do this, America is no better than any other third rate dustbin country we’ve all fought in, the American military does NOT overthrow a sitting President. Congress has to impeach him. We can’t do it through the use of force, Admiral, Generals; we can’t do this. Hell I’m not even sure we discussing it is legal. If you don’t mind, I will take my leave from you. I can’t sit here and be a party to this discussion.”

After making his statement, the four-star General of the US Air Force stands and leaves the Pentagon bunker.

Admiral Zander turns to his two counterparts and friends are asking, “What do we do now? We need his assets. I don’t want my pilots fighting with the Air Force. I don’t want my ships being hunted by B52s. I don’t want to hunt B2s flying combat missions over America. I also don’t want him to have control of our strategic forces. If things turn to crap Russia or China may decide the time is right to take us on, we need to have total control of our strategic forces. Generals, I’m about to suggest something that tastes like my mouth is full of dog crap.”

“Admiral don’t say it, I think we all know what you’re about to say, I’m 99.99% sure these walls don’t have ears, but, don’t even breath it. I’d like to take a short break.”

The three men agree to take a short break so they can check their messages to see if anything critical is happening. General Simpson pulls a secure cell phone from his uniform pocket, he presses a speed dial stored number, “Captain Grover, I have a class A1 mission for you, do you remember our little chat a week ago?”

“General, of course, I do, is it time to execute plan, angel?”

“Captain Grover, execute op plan angel within the next 24 hours.”

“WILCO”

Both parties hang up; the General stops at the men’s room to wash his hands, he then grabs a fresh mug of coffee before returning to the War Room, the other two officers look at him. He smiles and says, “I think it’s time to execute Op Plan Brimstone.”

“All three look at each other and nod; Admiral Zander says I agree, General the Navy is ready to execute Op Plan Brimstone.”

“General, Admiral, the Marines confirm and are ready to execute Op Plan Brimstone.”

@@@@@

Ron and I are trying to figure out where to hide our weapons, “Ron, I still think Jake can hide them, I’m telling you his farm site is huge, he has over 100 acres, he has lots of old tractors and fuel tanks all over his land. A few more bits of metal aren’t going to make any difference. Plus, look at the news, there’s no way I’m going to be unarmed if those animals enter our neighborhood. I’ll take down as many of them I can before they get to my house, won’t you do the same?”

“Brad, I understand your feelings about the mobs. As to Jake, I wish, I pray you’re right. I happen to know the DHS is going to check millions of acres for buried metal just in case someone tried to bury a weapon of mass destruction, they would be able to compare any differences, in fact, they don’t even have to lift a finger, their supercomputers will scan the images to check for differences in the pixels. I worry the feds will nail Jake and hence us. They have a list of most of the militia members; Jake is on their list. I checked with a friend; your name isn’t on their list. If it were I, would have to break off contact with you.”

“What the fuck do you mean Jake’s on their list, and I’m not, I thought you resigned from the force, how do you know who’s on their lists and who isn’t? Have you been playing me?”

“I did resign. However, I still have friends. Don’t you still have friends in companies you left or got fired from? I’m NOT playing you.”

“Well, OK. You’re sure Jake’s on their list?”

“Yes.”

“Then I need to alert him.”

“How are you going to do that, I’m sure he’s being watched.”

“We have a way to send and receive information in case your old friends decided to take too much of an interest in us. I’ll go first thing tomorrow; I need to get my hair cut anyway.”

“I’m not sure I understand, and I know I don’t want to know. It doesn’t answer the question of how or where to hide our guns.”

“Ron, I have an idea, take my house, where would you look if you were still a sheriff? Tell me everywhere you would look that tells me where not to hide them.”

@@@@@

In cities across America, rallies are held to show support for the poor innocent children killed by the militia outside of Baltimore. In Oakland California, the march started very peacefully, people holding banners and singing, “Give Peace a Chance.” Preachers holding hands with children march singing together. The march is led by the Reverend Allen Sharkton, he made sure he was in the lead whenever there are cameras recording the event, he had to ensure his place in history. He knew he was destined to lead the change of society; he was put here for a reason, to rise the “Black Nation” above the slaving, thieving white race. He’s more than a race baiter; he is a full blown racist. In fact, he paid a group of bikers to dress up in various forms of camo and attack the march in ten minutes so he could use his pulpit on television to blame racist whites for keeping his black brothers and sisters down. The reality is he didn’t care one whit about bettering the lives of those who lived in the inner cities; he only cared about lining his own pockets, anything that brought him additional money, power and fame are all he cared about. Hence, the deaths of a few of his black brothers and sisters are only a means to his ends.

Eight minutes later gunshots ring out, three people in the front line of the parade fall dead. Panic erupts in the crowd; people start running in all directions, some in the crowd, who brought weapons with them, start returning fire in the direction they thought the attack was coming from. A problem for the marchers is the bikers are in a V formation. The parade walked right into the biker’s killing ground; the bikers opened fire towards the crowd; many of their shots hit people in the crowd who are running for cover, the bikers each got five shots off before they took off, one of their shots hit the Reverend in his ass as he turned to leave the killing ground. The Reverend fell screaming for someone to help him. People ran in all directions; five people ran right over the Reverend, who lay on the street bleeding from the wound in his ass. The bullet entered at an angle breaking his hip; he couldn’t move. He thought to himself; I’m going to enjoy watching the damn bikers die a slow and painful death, the assholes weren’t supposed to shot me. Damn, it hurts. Before the last biker left, he saw the Reverend go down, he smiled and looked through the scope mounted on his AR 15, he thought to himself, if I kill him we won’t get the other half of our money, screw it, I’ll never get a better chance. He waited till Reverend Sharkton lifted his head to cry for help; he heard a crack, never feeling the bullet that entered his head. The bikers laughed all the way to Mount Shasta.

When the President was informed Reverend Sharkton had been killed in the peaceful march in Oakland he said, “Enough is enough, I don’t think we can wait a few more days for my address; get the Speaker on the line, I’m moving up my speech. The nation needs to hear from me. The nation needs my leadership. Our people need guidance; they need our help. I have my place in history staring at me. Make the arrangements for me to hold the address tomorrow night.”

@@@@@

The 11:00 PM News sound bites are;

“Reverend Sharkton is killed in a peaceful march in Oakland.”

“The entire country mourns for the loss of the good Reverend Sharkton.”

“The President is so moved by the loss of the Reverend he’s moving up his address to tomorrow.”

“President announces a national week of mourning for the Reverend, all banks, and Federal Government offices will be closed for the week.”

@@@@@

Waking up early I turned on the TV to hear that Reverend Sharkton has died, I’m almost ashamed to say I’m happy, and then I heard the President had declared a week of mourning with the closing of all banks and all of the Federal Government offices. I dropped my mug of fresh coffee on the floor, breaking my best and largest mug. I was pissed. A week? Funny how he’s using this to close the banks for a week and he moves the date of his address up. Damn it, I know there’s a connection. I think we’ve just reached a tipping point, May God have mercy on our souls and may he bless America. I’ve got many errands to complete before the address tonight and his damn curfew. First stop is my bank, where I find a line, hundreds of people long. One is carried out of the bank by the bank’s guards. He’s screaming to be let loose, and he wants his money. I ask the person in front of me what’s going on, someone responds, “The bank is limiting withdrawals and forcing anyone who wants to withdraw their $200 to fill out a form stating why they are withdrawing the funds. We’re going to have to tell the bank how we’re using the money. They act like it’s their money not ours. The bank may take a week or longer to review the forms. Someone shut down all of the ATM machines. The only way, to withdraw cash, is to see a teller.”

“Since when can the bank determine how much or why we’re withdrawing? I thought it was our money?”

Someone responded, “Since yesterday when the damn Feds mandated it.”

I say out loud without meaning to, “We’re nothing but a third world country now.”

A passing bank guard heard me; he pulls me out of line telling me, and “You can’t enter the bank with an attitude like that, go home and calm down.”

“Wait a minute, it’s my money in there, and I’m a customer I can go get it whenever I want.”

“Not any longer, the Department of the Treasury nationalized all of the banks this morning. Now go home before you get your head beaten in.”

Walking back to my car, I think, thank God, I keep emergency cash at home. I’m shocked to hear that the government has nationalized all of the commercial banks, is this what they meant when they said they were too big to fail?

Chapter 8

The nation waits on the edge of a straight razor for the President’s address. The talking heads on the networks and the internet discuss the strange behavior of the President. Every other President went to the Capital to address both houses, this time the President was addressing both houses of Congress from the White House. He claimed it wasn’t safe for him to travel the few blocks between the White House and the Capital. The President blamed the Republicans and the 1% for making threats against him; he said a major reason, they are against him, is because he’s the first African-American to hold the office. At 9:00 PM EST, every television station with the exception of premium pay movie channels carries his address. “My fellow American’s I come before you tonight to address both houses of Congress and the nation. I wish there were a better topic for us to discuss. In the past year, our great nation has seen more than our share of racist murders and mass shootings of our innocent children. I’ve done everything I can to take guns off our streets; I’ve done everything I can to make our streets safe for our children. There are a very small number of those who reject the common sense approach to saving our children. I call on these people to obey my executive orders and turn in their weapons before the 30-day buyback period expires. Those, that obey, are being rewarded with tax-free cash, those who refuse will be found and arrested. You cannot hide from us; there’s no place you can hide your firearms. Wherever you hide them, I assure you we’ll find them and when we do you’ll suffer for breaking the law. By this time next year, America will be totally gun free and safe for everyone to walk the streets anytime they’d like to. America will have gone from the top four countries in gun related deaths to last in a few weeks. Think of all of the children we are going to save together.

On another topic, I would like to speak this evening about income inequality, for far too long the mega rich have economically enslaved the poor. The 1% in our society are the cause of most of our suffering, let’s look at what the rich have brought us, a ruined economy where the 1% get richer, and the rest of the country gets poorer. Millions lost their homes when the 1% owned banks foreclosed on them; many of those who lost their homes had nowhere else to go, they ended up in homeless shelters or on the streets. The 1% closed companies; they moved jobs overseas to save a couple of pennies. They put millions of loyal workers out of jobs. They have stolen from all of us. By shipping jobs overseas, they have taken food out of the mouths of millions of you. By not paying their fair share of taxes, they have limited our ability to make increased unemployment payments to those who are in the most pain. Even with the lowest unemployment in twenty years the 1% has raped this great country of ours. They have reduced worker’s hours; they have tried to force salaries down. Congress has refused to act. Congress has refused to take care of the millions of American’s who need our charity. America is the first country to respond when others are in need, when other countries experience a flood; we are there, when others suffer earthquakes we are there, where are we when our people need us? If Congress won’t act, if Congress refuses to act when our people beg them for help, I won’t let our people down. You elected me to change and transform our great country into one that is more respected around the world; we are accomplishing this. You elected me to end the wars; I did. I come before you tonight to say; America always moves forward, since Congress is standing still, I will move us forward. I’m going to move America forward through executive orders. I’m starting tonight by signing an order right here in front of everyone, to increase the minimum wage to $20 an hour. Think about this a moment, if $10 was good, if $15 an hour will bring millions out of poverty than $20 an hour will move the poor into the middle class. I promised to increase the middle class and with my signature, it’s happened right in front of the world. I’m also signing an executive order increasing the taxes on all families earning over $250,000 a year to 50%. Does anyone really need more than $100,000 a year to live on? These two executive orders will do more than any other President has ever done to equalize income. In addition, the Republicans in Congress have spent this country almost into bankruptcy, we all have to pay for the massive borrowing and spending binges the House has been drunk on for the last five years as such I signing an executive order establishing a 3% national sales tax. This tax will impact the 1% much more than anyone else. Those, who have more to spend, will pay more tax. If you earn less than $25,000 a year, you will get a tax refund for the amount of the sales tax you paid, hence this new tax won’t harm the poor while helping to raise funds to pay for the folly of the Republicans in Congress. We have to work together to pay off the credit card from China the Republicans have charged everything on. I have tried to stop their spending. However, there are hundreds of Republicans in Congress to just one of me. I need your support; I need your help to stop these Republicans. President Bush got us into two wars, two wars I had to get us out of. Since we’re out of Bush’s wars and the world is peaceful, I have decided it’s safe to cut the armed forces by 50% and use the saved money to increase welfare payments. In order as not to overstretch the new smaller military, I have signed a new treaty with China. Whereby we will leave the peacekeeping of the Pacific Ocean from Midway to China to the Chinese. Who have offered to provide peaceful naval forces to patrol this large area, freeing us to focus on what’s really important? Speaking of the military, I’ve spent the last six years trying to figure out why we have thousands of nuclear weapons, weapons everyone knows we’ll never use. These weapons cost us billions of dollars a year. Why are we spending billions of dollars on nuclear weapons and a large military when we have no enemies? In today’s world no one is going to use nuclear weapons, the fears our fathers had in the depth of the cold war, the 1950s and 60s proved that saner minds have always prevailed. I’ve appointed a panel to review the need for our expensive nuclear weapons programs. We’re going to save billions of dollars that will be used to support our domestic programs.

Another program I’m announcing tonight is a government sponsored investment program for everyone earning less than $500,000 a year. For the first time, every worker, everyone who receives any government payment will now have 5% automatically deducted from their payments; this payment will go into a new government invested retirement investment program. No one has to rely on just Social Security. The government will help you save for your later years; the government is going to invest your funds into the market for you, we’ll pool all of the funds to enable them to grow faster, when you retire you’ll have both Social Security and your new retirement payments. These payments will start at age 67. The government is here to help our citizens; we are going to provide a better life for all.

I’d like to spend a few minutes talking about our education system, our schools are the backbone of our future, and we trust our schools to teach our children what they need to know in order to be good citizens and productive taxpayers when they grow up. Many of our children are so called home schooled, there are no standards for these children, we as a society have no idea if these children are really learning anything or if they’re spending their days sitting in front of a television or tablet surfing porn on the web. We need all of our children to be well educated, if we allow a growing number, a number that has increased over 125% over the past four years to go uneducated what will our future look like? Who’s going to invent the next great products if more of our children go uneducated, as such I’m taking action to outlaw homeschooling. America was founded on the separation of church and state, meaning that we don’t allow religion to interfere in the running of our country, hence, I’m outlawing religious schools, we can’t have our children being brainwashed which will send them into adulthood ill adjusted.

I know there have been a lot of rumors about my future plans. I was a constitutional scholar before being elected. I would like to make a very clear statement; I have no plans to run for a third term. I will step down at the end of my term. I have also decided to make a major announcement, an announcement that is months early, however, I think it’s a very important announcement to keep us moving forward, I’m very happy to announce that Michelle has agreed to run for the office of President to replace me, this will enable our vision to continue another eight years.”

The Democratic members of Congress sat stunned; moments later they stood and began cheering, the cheering goes on for five minutes. Hillary Clifton, who had served as the President's Secretary of State in his first term, sat in the audience shocked by the betrayal. She was set to announce her run for President the very next day, she now found herself on the outside looking in, she swore to herself she would get revenge on the President and his family.

The media sat in shocked silence, then went crazy, their wildest dreams are coming true; American has their first true royal family. Some started to whisper that the President could become the First Ladies Vice President, resulting in them staying in power as a team for another eight years. Many in the Democratic Party are already thinking, there was no need to run a series of expensive primaries, which will save hundreds of millions of dollars that can be used to fight the Republican candidate.

The President continued on for another thirty minutes, not saying anything of value, the real damage to the nation had been already been completed by the President in the first third of the speech.

The Republican response was removed from the national media; the NSA was successful in censoring more than 75% of the internet attempts of people trying to make derogatory statements against the President’s Address. The administration was clear it wasn’t going to allow freedom of speech to get in their way of controlling the country.

@@@@@

The 11PM news sounds bites are:

“The Obama dynasty lives!”

“16 years of plenty.”

“The President takes matters into his own hands to ensure equality.”

“The 1% get what’s coming to them.”

“The President announces a double retirement program.”

“Long live our great President.”

@@@@@

Wednesday morning after the President’s address millions of Americans wakes confused by the President’s address. Some liked it; some loved the idea of his wife taking over from him at the end of his term and many hated every word he said. The media carried the President’s water on every network, nowhere would anyone see a person who didn’t like the President’s remarks, the media never showed them. For those who hated the message, there are few places one can go to express themselves. Most of the social networks censored the right wing, many of the talk radio programs have been censored off the air. Frustration was building to a dangerous level just under the visible surface of the nation when the shots heard around the world were fired.

At 845AM, the anti 1% mob attacks a White Mercedes Benz S class taking two children to school. The mob stops the car breaking the driver’s and passenger’s windows with bricks. They reach into the car trying to drag the driver and her eight-year-old daughter out of the car; the Benz’s driver is a mother taking her eight-year-old daughter and ten-year-old son to school. Her close friend was a victim of a carjacking two years ago. Worried about it happening to her. She became a concealed carry permit holder to protect her children. When the mob broke the windows in her car trying to grab her kids she got scared, she took her Walther PK 380 out of her purse which happened to be sitting next to her, she aimed through the broken window and started firing into the mob. She hits five of the mob, four of them in the face; the small caliber bullet entered their heads but didn’t exit. The bullets instantly killed them; the mob froze when they heard the first shots. The mob got angry at the driver for fighting back; they rushed her car they pulled her and her children out of the car while she continued firing into the mob. When the police finally arrived, they found, the 33-year-old driver beaten into a coma she never recovered from. Her ten old son lay dead with his head crushed. The police found eight mob members dead plus four seriously wounded. Her eight-year-old daughter was taken and not found at the site. At noon, she was still missing. The story spread like the flu. It’s carried on every network as the lead story, if it hadn’t been for the driver’s young son; none of the networks would have touched the story. The pictures of the dead mob members and the young boy were too gruesome not to show, a mother fighting to protect her children was news. People on both sides of the isle grabbed the story to use it to support their views. The story had one chilling effect the media hadn’t expected, the gun buyback program ground to a halt, more and more people in the upper-income brackets started to carry loaded firearms. On Thursday afternoon, four youths tried to carjack a new BMW, when they broke the driver’s window, the driver unloaded his Glock 17 at the thieves, killing two and injuring two of the would-be carjackers. The police arrived and arrested the BMW driver for discharging his firearm within the city limits.

Those on the right side of the isle became even more motivated, between the attack on the women and her children and the attempted carjacking saying the left had gone too far. Conservatives start to march in the streets demanding the overturn of the gun buyback program. Soon gun rights marches appear in forty cities. Hundreds of thousands take to the streets demanding the return of the Second Amendment. The number of people demanding the right to defend themselves grows every hour, the media are forced to take notice, the media report the number of mentally ill citizens is much higher than anyone thought. No matter how the media tries to cover up the marches or not report them, the voices of the people grow.

The President and the Secretary of the Department of Homeland Security review videos of the marches taken by small drones that the DHS flew over the protests. The President looked at his cabinet officer saying, “Something has to be done about these right wing illegal marches, I’m sure none of them had a permit to hold these demonstrations in which case they are all breaking the law. When the number of lawbreakers reaches these numbers, this is not a peaceful march; this is an act of domestic terrorism. I want your department to break this up right now.

“Yes sir, sir what about the media? Won’t they go nuclear is we start manhandling these people?”

“You worry about the demonstrations; I’ll hand the media.”

“Yes sir, right on it.”

“I want these marches stopped today.”

The Secretary calls the anti-terrorism command post issuing a domestic terror alert; he orders the local police to disperse the crowds before things get out of hand. The local police, who receive the order, are shocked; these aren’t terrorists, in many cases these are the officer’s neighbors and friends. Many in the local and state police forces refuse to obey the orders; they turn in their badges and walk out of their stations worried about what their country has become. Others put on their body armor, send the SWAT squads and fire departments into the crowd hoping the fire department will disperse the crowd with high-pressure fire hoses. In Bloomington, Illinois many in the crowd demonstrating for their first and second amendment rights are four US Marines who are on leave, two are wearing their uniforms; two are wearing jeans and leather jackets. The local fire department arrives, turning their fire hoses on the marchers, the Marines try to help the injured who have fallen from the high-pressure water or been trampled by the crowds trying to escape the high-pressure water. SWAT sees the marine camo-clad men bending over in the street, one getting to their knees the police officers think they’re getting ready to fire on the fire department, the SWAT squad shoots and kills both marines. The other two rush the SWAT shooters they catch one and beat him almost to death; a third Marine is shot dead. The crowd panics spreading everywhere; many are injured from being pushed against walls, or being pushed through windows. The shooting of the Marines and the mother who died trying to protect her children set in motion a series of actions and reactions which pushes the country down a path very few wanted.

@@@@@

General Bracken leaves his home to visit a friend for dinner; he turns to lock his front door when he’s struck in the heart by a 9mm jacketed hollow point bullet fired from a silenced semi-automatic. The General didn’t feel a thing, he was alive one moment and dead the next; he was dead before he hit the ground. Captain Grover pressed an auto dial number on his secure phone, saying. “Brimstone complete, repeat brimstone complete” he walked down the dark street taking apart his sidearm, he started putting the parts into different garbage cans that line the street waiting to be picked up early the next morning.

@@@@@

General Simpson walks to the office of his friend for twenty years General Brownstone, the commanding general of the US Marines, “Rod, got a minute?”

“Sure, come on it, what’s up?”

“Rod, I’ve got bad news, you’ll get it in a couple of minutes, four of your boys, who were on leave, were shot at the Bloomington Illinois freedom march.”

“General, do we know who they were? Who killed them?”

“Rod, DHS alerted the local boys that the demonstrators were classified as domestic terrorists.”

“They couldn’t have done it without the White House giving them the go ahead; the idiot, who runs DHS, doesn’t do anything without his leash holder telling him to.”

“Rod what are you thinking?”

“General, I’m going to issue orders that my people go on leave armed, I’m going to notify the DHS of these orders and tell my boys to wear their uniforms if they go armed. I won’t have that SOB shooting my boys and girls; I’ll have his head on a pike out front if he continues this. He’s declaring war on us.”

“Rod, you can’t do that; the boys over at DHS will go nuts, they’ll arrest every one of your people; your people will resist, and it’ll turn into a bloodbath.”

“Yes it will, too bad there’s not more of those bastard black Suburbans. My people could use the practice.

Chapter 9

Ron brought over the sheriff's manual on searching a home; somehow he also got his hands on the DHS firearm home search manual. A couple of beers later with the manuals in hand. We started at the front door; we both walked into my house, Ron read from his document, I read from mine; the two are similar; however, the DHS manual called for running metal detectors and powerful magnets over all of the inside walls and the ceilings. When we finished with each room, we looked at each other. I said, “Ron, this is bad, very bad, I can’t think of anywhere we can hide our firearms these manuals don’t cover, DHS must have hired a few really good preppers to show them every place they would hide weapons. Every location, I thought of, is on their one list. Any ideas?”

“Brad, I have one crazy idea. However, it’ll put you at some inconvenience, want to hear it?”

“Let me get us another beer first, OK hit me with your crazy idea.”

“We take your washing machine and dryer apart; we put the disassembled firearms inside the appliances. They’re made of metal, anyone looking inside won’t see anything out of the ordinary. The sheriffs aren’t going to ask homeowners to start their washing machines. We would look behind it and in the dryer lint vent tube. The sheriff won’t take them apart without a search warrant, and probable cause to look inside maybe if we were looking for drugs, and our K9 sniffed them by the appliances we would take them apart, but I can’t think of any other reason we would disassemble them.”

I look at Ron, he asks, “you pissed?”

“Nope, trying to figure out if I should kiss you on your cheeks or just get you another beer, that’s a great idea. We don’t use our dishwasher; I can take the back wall off and hide some parts between the metal inner and outer walls. When do you want to start?”

“We have thirty days from last night, I suggest we do not wait till the last minute, how about in 20 days, I’ll help you, and you help me.”

“Great idea, have another beer.”

“Thank God, I live pretty close by.”

“Ron, with the curfew in place, stay the night in the guest room, the only people, who use it, are my kids and they're not here.”

“Sounds, good, by the way, when’s my girlfriend Kathy returning?”

“Slow down buddy, she may be your girlfriend, but she’s my wife. She’s up in New York City with her cousin; they’re due back in another day. Oh my God, if I take her washing machine apart she’ll kill me.”

“Maybe we should take it apart now, to see if we can fit the broken down rifles inside the shell and the machines still work, I don’t know what would be worse losing all my firearms or having Kathy castrate me for ruining her washer and dryer.”

“Hell, if she cuts your nuts off, I’ll have to take care of her.”

“Some friend, you turned out to be and to think we used to think you are living in our neighborhood, meant we were safe, you’re just another wife stealing cop.”

“Brad, I told you; I was never a cop, I was a sheriff.”

As we laugh, Ron’s cell rings, “Hello, this is Ron.”

I can only hear half of the conversation, what I hear is, “Yes sir, of course sir, long silence, you can count on me, I have a close friend who would be interested in joining us. Yes sir, I can trust him, yes sir, with my life, OK, tomorrow at breakfast, thank you for sir.”

“Ron, what was that all about?”

“Brad, how would you like to have some breakfast tomorrow with a group of ex-sheriffs?”

“Ron, I can’t think of anything else I’d like to do but break bread with a bunch of ex-sheriffs. Where and when?”

“iHop at 7:00.”

“Whew, for a moment you were going to say Dunkin Donuts, count me in, if you’re staying here, we can go together, can you tell me who else is going to be there?”

Smiling, Ron said, “No, just a few friends I think you might enjoy meeting.”

As we enjoy our beers and chips, the 11PM local news begins. The lead local story is, a domestic terrorist has been taken into custody before he could harm people, the video showed Jake’s farm and Jake being led away in handcuffs and a blood-stained head bandage. Ron turns to me saying, “I told you he was on their list, did you see the farm in the background? His farm has DHS heavy equipment all over it; they're digging up his farm looking for buried firearms.”

“The thirty-day grace period isn’t over yet.”

“I told you they’re looking to nail a few locals in every town to make a point. It’s a good thing ours weren’t there; if we had given them to Jake, our doors would most likely have been kicked open before the news started. I’m sure DHS has rounded up most of his militia members. You joined too recently for your name to hit their list.”

“Think they’re going to pick up more militias?”

“Yes, every one of them they can before the 30-day grace period ends. DHS is afraid the militias will become real domestic terrorists fighting them.”

@@@@@

The Department of Homeland Security starts rounding up militia groups all over the country. Heavily armed DHS SWAT teams break into private homes in the middle of the night, they wake and arrest militia members before they can respond. A few wake in time or are still awake; they’re able to get a couple of shots off before they’re killed. Many militia members don’t go easy into the night; many have spies and informers in the local police, who’ve alerted the militia’s to the coming raids. Many of the militias have set up ambush sites waiting for the DHS black shirts to arrive. The DHS agents plan to strike the militias across the country at 3AM, they expect the militias to be taken by surprise. DHS expects to be able to kick in a few doors grabbing their suspects before the local communities wake to start their normal day. The DHS didn’t know some of the militias knew they were coming; the first black Suburbans arrived outside of Sleepy Hallow New York, the DHS vehicles arrive with their headlights turned off; DHS thinks they’ll be able to sneak in and out collecting their targets. When the DHS vehicles enter the town, they don’t realize they’re being watched. A one letter text message is sent by the sentry to his militia members. Their phones buzz with the message; they all grab their weapons, extra ammo, water and small handheld radios. As soon as the DHS troops leave their vehicles, the militia strikes, they slice all of the vehicle’s tires; they cut the vehicle’s fuel lines; they tie grenades to the drivers and passenger doors then they slip back into the night. This takes place at nine locations the DHS thought they’d surprise. The militia members regroup and launch a counter attack on eight regional DHS and police offices. They strike the offices without warning; catching the officers by surprise.  In Sleepy Hallow they capture six of the local police officers who they lock in the officer’s own jail cells; the local militias shoot to kill the DHS agents who aren’t their neighbors as the police officers are. Short, violent firefights break out at DHS offices and rallying points. Surprise catches the DHS agents; none expected anything other than a successful quick grab of their targets, none of the agents expected to be surrounded and attacked from their targets. When dawn breaks, DHS counted one hundred militia members arrested, five killed in their homes, the militia members counted 842 DHS members shot and 1,246 DHS vehicles destroyed, many in DHS parking lots.

The Secretary of Homeland Security is furious. He personally planned the early morning raids, he never expected the militias to be alerted, he never dreamed the militias would attack US government DHS agents. Since the DHS became the new national police force he never, thought anyone would dare mess with them. He didn’t think anyone would even think about directly challenging his officers. What the Secretary doesn’t know is in one hour twenty of his DHS garages are going to be blown up with homemade pipe bombs and Molotov Cocktails, the fires burn the parked vehicles, which explode when the flames reach their gas tanks. In all the DHS, loses an additional three hundred Suburbans. The Secretary thought to himself, It’s a good thing the Treasury Department owned General Motors stock because all of these destroyed vehicles are going to have to be replaced. The Secretary loses his temper, demanding that every militia member be picked up. He yelled down the hall; “I want them all behind bars, I want their families taken for questioning, I want their pets killed, burn their homes down, destroy everything they own.” When the first armored bulldozer reaches the initial militia home, the DHS agents are surprised to find three local police cars blocking the streets. The police are wearing body armor and holding M16s and shotguns, they tell the DHS agents to leave or face arrest. In a small sleepy town in Iowa, the DHS senior agent comes face to face with the local police chief. “Look chief, we have orders to destroy the house you’re protecting, by blocking the street, you’re interfering with official US government Department of Homeland Security business, you and you people can be arrested for interfering. Chief is this what you want? Your careers ruined? Your families ashamed when you have to be bailed out of jail? Each of you is facing huge fines and you, as their chief most likely will be sent to federal prison. Chief, just stand aside, and we’ll forget the entire thing.”

“Agent, Braswell, we’ve had a few beers together; our families have gone to dinner together; I’m sorry, but there’s no way my people are going to allow you carry out your mission. If you don’t turn around, my people will arrest your people.”

“Chief, we have a Mexican standoff; I don’t want to kill your people, and you don’t want to kill mine, so why not let us pass?”

“I can’t do that, what you’re about to do isn’t legal. I can’t allow you to destroy a man’s home.”

While the two commanders are standing in the middle of the street arguing five members of the local militia sneak up from behind the DHS vehicles. While others stand guard, one slides under each Suburban, cutting the fuel lines. When all of the militia members are clear, their leader tosses a small road flare into each puddle of gas, the two leaders are blown off their feet when the Suburbans start exploding. Agent Braswell looks at the Chief, “You’ll spend the rest of your life in jail for that.”

“For what? I’ve been standing here arguing with you for the past ten minutes, how could I have blown up your SUVs?”

“You had to have a hand in it; I’m placing you under arrest. Drop your sidearm on the street and put your hands up.”

The Chief pulls his sidearm, saying, “Is this what you want?” In one swift move, the chief pulls his Glock and fires two rounds into agent Braswell’s stomach. “Lay there in pain asshole.”

@@@@@

In Phoenix Arizona, two US Marines are going for a walk; they’re carrying their personal AR 15s slung over their backs, Arizona is an open carry state plus they’re in uniform, enjoying a mild evening. Three police cars surround the two Marines, their lights flashing and sirens screaming, six police officers jump out of the three cars, each is holding their sidearm pointed at the two Marines.

“Sir, Sergeant John Wilks United States Marines, is there a problem here?”

“Lay face down on the ground, NOW, hands over your heads.”

“Officer, what’s the charge? What’s wrong?”

“Shut the fuck up, get down right now or we’ll shoot.”

The second Marine refuses to get on the ground, he starts to reach behind himself for his wallet, one of the officers thinks he’s grabbing his rifle; they open fire killing both of the Marines.

The national news carries the report that the two Marines attacked local police officers.

The progressive left locked arms using the news report demanding all US Military be outlawed from owning and carrying a weapon off base. One after the other progressive Congressmen and Senator go on network television to demand action, they demand the US Military be disarmed off base. The President goes on national television to ask the people to support the disarming of the military when they are off their bases. He says he’ll start posting DHS agents at the entrances of all military bases to check everyone exiting the bases.

US Marine Commandant General Brownstone is booked on the nationally televised “Meet the Press” television program. He’s invited to discuss the President’s military reduction plan. He arrives at the studio in his dress uniform, wearing every medal he’s earned in his thirty years of service to the country. General Brownstone has two Master degrees and a Ph.D. in Political Science from Harvard. The interviewers think they have an “ape," an uneducated military man who’s spent his life killing women and children. The writers have drafted a script they are sure to trick the general, making him and all of the military look dumb and out of step with the average American.

The show goes on the air at 9:00 AM, the general shows up at 7:00 AM, he asks if there is anything in particular he’ll be asked so he can ensure he has the documentation he may require. The staff informs him; he’s been invited to give the military’s view on the President’s draw down and he should stay on track, or they will cut him off and cut to another interview. The General smiles, he knows he’s being set up as a pawn, he knows the host plans to make him look bad and through him, all of the military looks bad, he has a few surprises up his sleeve. Any good commander always understands his opposite commander; the general spent hours reviewing previous broadcasts. He understands how the host and writers operate, he understands how they maneuver anyone they don’t agree with into looking foolish; he’s prepared for battle, not one of bullets and tanks, a battle of words.

Refusing makeup, the general said he’s earned his scars in the service to his country and sees no reason to cover them up. He takes his seat across from the host of the show, a very liberal David Gregs. Gregs knows his shows ratings are slipping he needs to turn his ratings around; he intends to use his interview with the general to demonstrate why the military needs to be not only reduced but also forced to pledge allegiance to the President, not the Constitution. Everyone knows the Constitution is outdated; it was written over 200 years ago, it’s the President who has his finger on the pulse of the country, it’s the President who is the true leader and must be followed. Only the President is strong enough to pull together the entire country and sell his policies to everyone. No one could bring out the voters as the current President, and there was no smarter man in the entire country or brighter political master than the President. Like everyone else on the left, Gregs thought it’s a brilliant plan to use the President’s address to Congress to announce his wife would replace him. There isn’t a need for costly primaries. The party will remain united behind the President whom everyone knew would de facto remain in office for another eight years pulling his wife’s strings. Gregs is a strong supporter of gun control, he once held up a 30 round AR 15 magazine on his program showing the world how dreadful it was. He could ignore the local laws that said even holding the demonized magazine was illegal in DC because he is one of the progressive elites; no judge would find him guilty of anything. He’s one of the select mouthpieces for the progressive left. Walking from his dressing room to the studio, Gregs reviews the day’s talking points which the White House issues every day at 4:30 AM. Ensuring when America wakes they hear the same story which includes the key talking points and sound bites on every station. Gregs enjoys his third latte while reviewing the daily talking points, and the President’s CoS suggested updated questions for the General, Gregs agrees, handing the questions to his staff who will type them into the teleprompter. Gregs smiles, he can taste his victory over the General; it’s not every day he gets to make a four-star General look foolish.

The General and Gregs shake hands, they do a quick microphone check, satisfied that the general can’t see the teleprompter that is behind him, the sound queues, the lights go on, and the program is on the air. Gregs says Good Morning America, today on ‘Meet the Press’ we have the honor of spending the morning with the Commandant of the US Marines. “General, welcome to the program, I understand this is a first for you. I’ve been told; you tend to shy away from news programs. By the way, where did you pick up all of those fancy medals?”

“Most of them were paid for with the blood of our very brave young men and women who died defending our country.”

“General, I’m sure you agree they died for nothing, we should have spent the time in discussions vs. going to war which everyone knows is a waste of young people and resources.”

“Mr. Gregs, I hope you keep that thought in mind when they stand you in front of the wall and shoot you, which any government will do once it has total control. None will tolerate a free press, in fact; you and the other so-called reporters will be the first ones to stand in front of the wall.”

“General, you’ve got that backward. We have no need for such a large, bloated and expensive military, by the way, I’m sure you’ve seen the new oath of office the President has issued, he expects each and every member of the military swear alliance to him and the office of the Commander in Chief.”

“Yes, I’ve seen it.”

“We happen to have a copy of the new service oath right here, would you do us the honor of signing it here on air in front of millions of Americans?”

“No David I’m sorry but I won’t sign it here or ever. I and every other member of the services have already signed an oath, there’s no reason for us to sign another one. The only times in history I can remember when the military was forced to sign an oath to the country’s leader was in Roman times when the Legions swore an oath to the Emperor, in Japan where the military swore an oath to the Japanese Emperor, and of course in Germany when Adolf Hitler came to power. Hitler made the German military swear alliance to him versus swearing an oath to defend the Fatherland.”

“Honestly general, are you comparing our loved President to the Roman Emperors or Hitler? Oh my God General, that’s crazy, are you suffering from Post Traumatic Stress? Have you seen too much combat? How long have you served? I’ve been told you served 30 years is that correct? General, speaking for the peace-loving American people I think it’s time you consider stepping down and retiring. Haven’t you caused enough bloody deaths of the country’s best and brightest?”

“David, the military carries out the orders of the civilian government; we go to war when ordered to. We don’t make war on our own. If you ask any military person, you’ll learn none of us wants war, we train for it, we plan for it, but it’s the last thing we want. When we go to war, we enter a country; we win and leave. We’ve never asked for or taken land from the people we’ve fought for. In fact, the only land, we've ever asked for, is to bury our dead who died for the people we came to defend.

“General, is it because you know you’re killing innocent women and children?”

“David, too many times in our past the orders to our commanders in the field came directly from the person sitting in the big chair in the White House, usually a person with zero military training or experience.”

“General are you saying, you, a general know more than our President, who is the smartest man who’s ever held the office, the man who won the Nobel Peace Prize in his first year in office. Honestly what have you done compared to our President? You’re nothing better than a murderer.”

The general looked into the eyes of the host; he unclipped his microphone, gently placing it on the table in front of the two of them. He leaned forward to whisper into the host’s ear so no one else could hear him, “Talk to me or about me like that again, and you’ll never be found again; you’re nothing but a whore for the administration.” The general snaps to attention and executes a perfect about-face, walking off the stage. Leaving David Gregs sitting across an empty table with his mouth open.

The producer cuts away to a commercial, returning Gregs says, “Well we all saw the bloodthirsty military for what it is, if the General is an example of the rest of the military then they all should be charged with treason for not swearing an oath of allegiance to our President.”

Every member of the US Military is told to sign the new oath or resign. The result of the President’s demand to sign the new Oath; and the impact of the interview with the General on “Meet the Press” is wherever US Military troops are stationed, officer's offices are swamped with lines of soldiers, marines, airmen and sailors waiting in line to resign. All were volunteers; all could resign at will. The Joint Chiefs sat stunned in the Pentagon when their communication lines are almost melted from the calls for advice, tens of thousands of people, are in mass resigning, within a few days, more than a third of the military has submitted paperwork to resign. The President read these reports completely overjoyed. The smaller the military, the less he had to worry about them planning an action against him, plus the smaller the military, the less expensive it is. Leaving him more in the budget he can spend on his social engineering programs. He had been quietly expanding his civilian army, the agents of DHS. The President and press have slowly brought the water in the pot to boil; people were taught to accept searches and groping in order to fly on an airplane, or ride the train soon even bus lines and subways will have TSA agents. People had to submit to having their person and everything they carried searched. The DHS with the support of local police and sheriff’s set up road blocks to “ask” for a DNA sample, of course, anyone could reject, however to reject meant having your car searched and your license recorded as a person who refused a polite request, those refusing were tracked until they broke any of the thousands of simple laws and regulations. Then they were pounced on by the local police. Censorship has slowly expanded to cover any comment, not in agreement with the progressive plan. The Federal Government freely spied on everyone; nothing is private any longer, with texts, phone calls, emails, and internet searches all collected by the NSA. The NSA can monitor all vehicles through hacking into their navigation systems. Miles driven, locations visited; even the amount of carbon pollution is tracked. Taxes per mile are automatically billed every month.

While the President is overjoyed with the reduction of the military, the US economy continues to sink deeper into an unannounced recession bordering on depression. The Federal Government only counts those collecting unemployment for 26 weeks as being unemployed. This yields an unemployment rate of 5.4%; it also yields a “real” unemployment rate of 18.6%, the percent of those employed drops to only 51%. More than 53% of the population survived on a government program.

@@@@@

In Manassas, Virginia three local militias join together to plan an attack on the FEMA camp holding the Republican Senators. Their goal is to break into the camp in three different locations forcing the guards to spread out. Once the guards are spread thin, the main body of the militia force will cut the wire fence freeing the Senators. The militias have trucks idling in the surrounding woods ready to carry the Senators away from the camp. They also brought three EMS staff in case any of the militias or Senators require first aid. The militias sent a message to the Senators via a maid and a cook who works in the camp who are secret supporters of a free America.

The attack on the FEMA camp kicks off at 3:30AM with explosions at three different locations. One of which is the camp’s main gate. Explosives are planted at one of the guard towers which brings the tower and lights down. This opens a hole in the DHS defensive cover, two trucks, which have steel plates, welded on them, providing additional security to the passengers, the trucks have had their VIN plates removed, the VIN on the chassis and in the engine compartment has been milled off, the drivers have wiped the inside of the trucks with harsh cleaning chemicals to strip them of any DNA left behind. The two drivers are wearing surgical suits that cover them from the foot to their heads. Their faces are covered behind face masks, their wearing surgical gloves so no fingerprints are left behind. The trucks crash through the barbwire fence; they drive right through the hole blown in the wall. Militia members are wearing surgical suits storm out of the back of the two trucks to grab the Senators. The DHS guards are surprised and shocked by the size and violence of the attack.  More than half of the DHS guards are killed outright when they exit their barracks to see what the noise is, they run into the militia who were laying down heavy covering fire. The Senators received the message; they are laying in their bunks fully dressed, when they hear the explosions, they make their way to the location they were told to wait. In seconds, two large trucks break through the walls, militia members wearing surgical suits jump out firing at the other two guard towers and the confused guards who race out of their barracks. The rescue mission is a total success; one Senator is wounded when he falls and breaks his arm, the DHS wounds two militia members. 75% of the DHS guards are either killed or severely wounded. The militia quickly withdraws, as they leave; they set fire to the camp burning it to the ground.

Chapter 10

At 5:15AM Ron’s banging on my bedroom door, “Brad wake the fuck up we’ve got to get ready to go.”

I stagger to the door, opening it with a massive headache, way too many beers last night, I find Ron dressed in tan cargo pants and a sweater, “Man, we’re going to iHOP, it’s just down the road, maybe 3 miles. Why the big rush?”

“Brad, who said anything about which iHOP breakfast was going to be at? We’ve got about 50 miles to travel and not much time to get there since you’re not dressed.”

“50 fucking miles? Where the hell are we going?”

“You’ll see, now hurry up and get dressed.”

Twenty minutes later, Ron backs my car out of the garage saying, “I’m driving because I know where we’re going.”

Both of us sip coffee in travel mugs trying to wake up and not spill hot coffee on ourselves while Ron drives my car, we’re sitting on seats held together with duct tape, he’s driving it like it’s his ex-cruiser, “Ron you sure surprised the hell out me, 50 miles, you didn’t say a word last night about where. By the way, this isn’t a sheriff’s car; we can get stopped for speeding that might further delay our arrival.”

“You didn’t have a need to know, I want you to listen very carefully, Brad, I’m taking you to a breakfast meeting of “oath takers," we swore an oath to protect and defend, we all kept our oaths, something bad is going down in our country. You watched “Meet the Press.” I got a number of texts that the military is collapsing, most of the members are refusing to sign the new allegiance oath, the same is true with the police and sheriffs. While the military is shrinking, and many police officers are resigning the DHS and the TSA have tripled in size in thirty days, one major problem is the DHS has lowered their personal standards to zero; they’ve even recruited in Federal Penitentiaries. The Secretary of DHS has said he wants people who are willing to enforce Federal Laws over the American people without question. The disarming of the population is part of a dark master plan, a plan to control every aspect of our lives, what we read, what we watch on TV, what we search for on the internet, what we eat, what we drive, where we work, you name it, this administration has a plan to stay in power by controlling everything we do. They already own the press; they’ve had a multi-step plan, and they are almost to the end point. The administration doesn’t care what happens to the country in the transition phase; they only care about their power at the end of the tunnel. There’s a group of us who have sworn to do everything within our power to stop them. Today you’re going to meet the other members of my cell. Do you understand how insurgents work? They operate in cells, no cell knows another, no member of a cell knows more than a couple of people, any cell member busted can only turn in a couple of other people within the same cell. At breakfast, today, you’re going to meet the key people in the area 100 miles around us. If you ever say a word about whom you’re going to meet or mention a name, you’ll die very quickly. To be honest, I’ll kill you myself.”

“Ron, what are you saying? You’d kill me? We’ve been friends since we were kids, hell we’ve done everything together, now you’re threatening to kill me?”

“Brad, you misunderstood me, I’m not making a threat, I’m promising you.”

“Ron, after threatening me, I’m not sure I want to go to breakfast with you.”

“Brad, you’ll do OK, just remember, you were never here, you never saw us, even if you recognize someone, you never use their real names, they’ll tell you what to call them. Got it?”

“Yes, I got it and I’m not sure I like it. I’m not some 007 secret agent. I’m a regular guy.”

“Brad, there are no regular guys anymore. Do you know what 3% means?”

“Not really.”

“In the American Revolution 3% of the people risked everything to fight for freedom, these 3% formed the American militia and army, they stood up to the British King and beat the best army in the world. The people at breakfast are members of the new 3%. We use the symbol III%. Any time you see this or hear someone say 3%, you’ll know you’re in the company of people, everyday people who are willing and are going to risk everything to bring true freedom back to the sheep. Most of the sheep don’t remember what freedom means, they’re happy living off of Uncle Sam. Only Uncle Sam is broke. If the checks ever stop, this country is going to tear itself apart. The sheep are following a lion into the lion’s den to be consumed. You’re going to have to decide between here and the iHOP if you’ve got the balls to be one of us, one of the III%.”

“How long do I have to decide?”

“About thirty minutes.”

“Done, all, I want, is to protect Kathy, if she gets hurt I’ll never be able to forgive myself.”

“Brad, all we can do, is do what we do best. We all want our loved ones to be safe; unfortunately, no one can guarantee you anything except that one day you’ll die. It’s the how we die that’s important; it’s the why we died that’s important. When the time comes, all, I want, is to die with honor.”

I look at Ron, “I’m in, I can’t stand by and watch what’s going on without doing what I can to stop it.”

“I knew that would be your answer. Brad, words are one thing, what we’re going to be doing is not speaking words, it’s going to be pure violence against those who plan to enslave our citizens.”

Twenty minutes later we pull into an old iHOP out in the middle of nowhere. “Brad, what keeps this place going, there isn’t even a town here.”

“About ten years ago one of the staties got shot in the line of duty protecting two other men on the force, he saved their lives. His reward was to be pensioned out of the force. He opened this iHOP, what keeps it going is every first responder within forty miles eats here a couple of times a week. It’s our way to pay him back for saving the lives of two of us.”

“So I guess it’s safe to talk in there.”

Laughing, Ron replies, “Of course, that’s why we drove all the way out here to have breakfast. It’s one of the few places we can talk freely.”

We pull into the iHOP parking lot; there are five other cars in the lot, there’s a sign on the front door stating “CLOSED due to a broken water pipe.” The two of us walk into the iHOP, sitting at one large booth are six people, four men, and two women, they rise when we enter. They welcome Ron with hugs and slaps on his back. I stand a few paces behind Ron. They turn to face me; one asks, “Who’s this?”

“My best friend, Brad, I trust him with my life. I’ve known him most of my life. He’d just joined his local militia when the feds busted it; he was too new to show up on the militia member’s list. We’ve been working together to hide some weapons; Brad’s a lot smarter than he looks, you can trust him. We need people; we’re going to have to start bringing new people in, we can’t do this with the few “oath keepers” we have. We need the people behind us. When the checks stop, the government is going to blame us. We’re going to become the new bad guys the 1% aren’t going to be able to be blamed forever. Once blood is spilled the black Suburbans and men in black are going to blame us. The entire weight of the Federal Government is going to be applied against us. If we don’t have the people on our side what are we doing this for?”

The oldest man at the table stands up, he extends his right hand to me, he says, “You can call me Joshua, Brad welcome to the twilight zone. I don’t know what else to call it when we have an active socialist President who is tearing the country apart. Khrushchev said capitalism would self-destruct, he said he would bury us. Turns out we’re burying ourselves. Many of us think our President was manufactured. If anyone spent any time looking into his past, it'd be clear he isn’t real, his entire life story is fiction. He’s transforming American into a caricature of what we were. In five years, he’s taken us from being the leader of the free world to a second rate country. In eight more years, we’ll be a third world country

“Joshua, thank you, and for the record, I agree. How are a handful of us going to change or slow down his transformation?”

“It only took 3% two hundred years ago, this time; there’s a lot more of us than 3%. This time a lot of the military are going to be joining us. This time we have a leader who scares a lot of people enough to crap their pants. We’re armed with more than muskets. We need all of the people we can get to join us, we need true patriots, Ron feels you’re one of them.”

“Joshua, I am, I love America, and I’m willing to die for our country.”

“Brad, meet the rest of us, Ron you know, this is Luke, this is Moses, this is Debra, this is Abraham, and the short red headed little beauty is Mary. Brad we don’t use our real names; Ron’s name among us is Apollo, do you have a name you want to be called?”

“Yes, how about Aaron, he was …”

“Moses’ brother, welcome Aaron, have a seat, by the way, best pancakes in 50 miles.”

“Joshua, I think this is the only pancake place in 50 miles.”

Everyone at the table laughs.

“I guess asking what everyone does is out of the question isn’t it?”

“Not even in the book, so don’t bother even thinking about it.”

@@@@@

Ex Commandant of the US Marines is sitting in his home office reading coded emails, his wife knocks and opens the door, “Rod, honey is everything OK, the news is filled with horrible stories about you. The person, their talking about, isn’t you. It’s as if there are two people with the same name, you, the man I’ve been married to for thirty years and this other man who’s the devil’s son. The feds are pouring tons of money into smearing you, are they that worried about you? Why? You’ve resigned. You retired. I know the liberal press; they attack and smear the people they fear the most. Right now your public enemy number one. Honey are they going to arrest you? Should we be bugging out of here?”

“Sally, we’re safe here; we have people watching the house for us, no one can approach the house without being seen. There is a large squad guarding us. Very soon this is going to be a very busy home, I hope you don’t mind a little company.”

“Never, as long as I don’t have to guard what I think and say. Should I make up the spare bedrooms?”

“Might be a good idea. They’ll start arriving this afternoon.”

@@@@@

The DHS has been given orders to lock down every US Military base and facility. No one is to enter or leave; use of deadly force has been authorized. A tense standoff begins at each base fence line. Both sides are armed; both sides are dedicated to their missions. At Fort Benning, the US Army Rangers decide they don’t like being kept captive on their own base. Ranger Colonel Redwing orders his people to draw live ammo load their LAVs, Hummers and Bradleys’ to convince the black Suburbans to leave their position blocking the base’s gates.

The front gate opens; four LAVs move into a fighting position. They are met by five DHS and two TSA agents. The ranking DHS officer stands in front of the armored vehicles; he puts his hand up to stop the army vehicles, he puts a bullhorn to his mouth, “Attention US Army vehicles, this is DHS regional director Davis, you are ordered to remain on base until we have administrated the new oath of allegiance to every member.”

“Agent Davis, this is US Army Ranger Colonel Redwing, please move your vehicles from blocking our gates, if you don’t move them within five minutes, we’ll move them for you.”

“Colonel, you are ordered to return to your barracks and stand down.”

“Agent, you are not in my chain of command, as such you can’t issue orders to me or my people.”

“Colonel, if you’ve read your morning orders, you will have read that the US Military has been put under management of the US Department of Homeland Security.”

“Agent, I read the message and tossed it into the circular file, the US Military takes orders from our Commander in Chief and the officers appointed over us. We do NOT report to or take orders from the Department of Homeland Zombies. Now I suggest you back you nice shiny Suburbans away from our gate before they become smoking wreaks.”

“Colonel, if you fire on us or on our vehicles I will be forced to take you into custody.”

“Agent, you can try, however you a better return with more firepower than you currently have.”

“Colonel, this is your last chance before we arrest you and your people.”

“Agent don’t say I didn’t warn you, sergeant, move those vehicles away from the front of our gate; you have permission to open fire.”

Seconds later the LAVs open fire with their 25mm chain guns firing armor piercing rounds which shred the Suburbans, their gas tanks explode, two of the Suburbans leap into the sky from their exploding fuel tanks. The DHS agents open fire against the army vehicles with their 9mm side arms which bounce off the LAVs armor. The Army returns fire with 7.62 mm machine guns tearing the agents apart. Round one of the next civil war goes to the US Army.

@@@@@

DHS regional director Roger Venkin addresses the 300 people sitting in the warehouse in front of him. “Ladies and Gentlemen, today is a unique day in our history. Today we are going to begin implementing the President’s policy. Today we are going to begin ensuring guns are removed from our streets forever. We are going to save the children of America from gunfire.”

The room erupts in cheers.

“We’ve matched up the records of those in our sector who own firearms and have not turned them in, we’re going to be paying these people a visit, be polite, be courteous, and say please and thank you. It’s very important we look like we’re doing our part to save the children. The press will be watching and recording these initial gun screenings. After the initial visits and the press has juicier stories then and only then will we step up our search tactics. Once the press leaves to cover other stories we’ll return and randomly select some of these homes to recheck, upon our return we’ll tear these homes apart brick by brick. Today, we’re going to remind these people of their civic duty, yes their duty to turn in their firearms so everyone can do their part in saving our, saving their children.

All of you remember, today, the press is recording our every action, we WILL be on our best behavior. Think of today as a dress rehearsal for when we return and really tear these criminal’s a new asshole. I assume everyone has studied our manual and the sheriff’s manual on where to search for firearms. Follow the manuals, go step by step. Any weapon found is to be tagged and removed from the home. The owner is to be given a Federal DHS official warning; we’re not going to arrest anyone while the press is with us. If someone gives you a hard time, be polite, call for backup. Remember, we are the face of the Federal Government, the entire country is watching us. Don’t even pick your nose. No off-color jokes. I want everyone to stand, everyone turn to their right, Barnes your other right, inspect that person, is their uniform correct? Are all their patches correct, is the uniform dirty? Is the agent next to you clean? Are their boots polished? Everyone inspect everyone else. We leave in thirty minutes.”

@@@@@

Admiral Zander issues an emergency alert mobilization order, no drill. Every ship and submarine in the US Navy inventory that can put to sea is to do so within 24 hours. The emergency mobilization order requires the immediate recall of all ships personnel who may have been on leave; the ship’s captain is to put to sea within the time specified even if the entire crew isn’t on board. All ships are to put to sea fully armed. Every US Navy base is bursting with people rushing to ready ships for the emergency war deployment, weapons and supplies, food, and spare parts are being loaded onto the ships decks quicker than the crews can take them below and store them. One aircraft carrier that recently entered dry dock is reloading recently unloaded supplies even as the dry dock is being filled with water to float the 100,000 ton ship out of the dry dock so it can return to sea. The US Navy has two strategic submarine bases. One at Kings Bay, Georgia the other in Kitsap, Washington state. At each base nuclear-armed Trident D5 missiles are being loaded into each of the submarine’s 24 launch tubes, food, and spare parts are being ‘bucket brigade’ carried from the dock into the boats. Of the fourteen SSBNs, (Ship, Submersible, Ballistic, Nuclear) five are on patrol. These receive the same orders which inform their captain' to increase their readiness, four were in dry dock; one is being quickly readied to return to sea, the remaining three are rushing to return to sea within the 24-hour window or as soon after as possible. The US Navy has ten nuclear-powered aircraft carriers; one is usually in dry dock undergoing a midlife refit which lasts three years. One is usually getting ready to enter dry dock where all work stops, the recently removed supplies, weapons and jet fuel are being reloaded onto the huge ship. One carrier is usually being worked on at its base that is being readied for sea only partially finished. She may leave with workmen still on board. The other seven are either stopping their return to their bases or moving at breakneck speed to get to sea.

Every ship captain receives coded orders to be opened when their ship is safely at sea; all of the orders are to be opened at 2400 GMT in two days. The sailors on the ships are of a mixed mind, many watched the interview on “Meet the Press.” They are shocked at how the Commandant of the Marine Corp was treated. Others have read the new oath and decided not to sign, a small handful have decided they have no problem signing the new oath, these don’t trust the sailors who have refused to sign the oath. Mistrust is building inside many of the Navy’s ships. Admiral Zander decided it was safer to send his ships to sea where he might be able to hold some control over their actions. He worried about turning strategic weapons over to the current administration. He knew he was committing mutiny and treason by issuing his orders. He felt he was serving a higher power; he was helping to save the United States of America.

The US Navy ships begin leaving their ports fully armed, with confused crews. The crews are wondering if the alert is the start of WW 3. It’s very unusual for ships to leave port at ‘general quarters’ with the crew manning battle stations. The initial leaving ships’ passage is blocked by boats belonging to the US Coast Guard. The USCG isn’t part of the US Military, in times of war, they report to the US Navy, in peace they are part of the Department of Homeland Security. The Coast Guard ships have received orders directly from the Secretary of Homeland Security to stop any of the Navy’s ships from leaving port. The first interaction between the two forces is in Norfolk Virginia, which is the US Navy’s largest base. Leading the Navy exodus from their base are four US Navy destroyers, all are at General Quarters, (set for war) when their lookouts report the exit to the harbor is blocked by six USCG boats. The USS Buleley DDG, 84 is the lead ship, the executive officer (XO) who is the second in command, informs the captain, “Captain; the harbor is being blocked by six USCG boats.”

“Ask them what they want.”

“Attention USCG boats this is the US Navy destroyer USS Buleley operating under emergency alert mobilization orders. We are operating as the lead escort ship. You are blocking the harbor exit, please stand aside.”

“USS Buleley this is USCG (US Coast Guard Cutter) Bear (WMEC-901) we are under orders from SecDHS not allow any Navy ships from leaving port. Please turnaround and return to your pier, we will board your ships to administer the new oath of service, any ship’s crew, who refuses to sign, will be removed from your ship. Please acknowledge.”

“Bear this is Buleley actual, move your boat or suffer the consequences. We are at General Quarters; we are fully armed and will follow our emergency alert order, blocking our exit is a violation of the USCG mandate, once an emergency alert is issued, your ships shift from DHS to US Navy control. I’m a Navy Captain, which means I outrank you, follow my orders and move aside and no one will be hurt.”

The captain picks up his handset, “Weapons, main battery, track the lead USCG boat, when I give the order, fire one round across her bow, if she doesn’t turn away, sink her. I repeat if she doesn’t turn aside, sink her. This is not a drill. Captain out.”

The destroyer’s 5 inch main canon shifts position to lock onto the USCG boat. The Bear sees the canon move she calls the Buleley. “Buleley, this is the Bear actual, why is your main gun targeting us? We’re both on the same side.”

“Bear, Buleley actual, I warned you, if you don’t move aside in two minutes we will open fire, we are outside your range; we out range and outgun you, please don’t make me do this.”

“Buleley, I have my orders, we are to block the exit of all US Navy warships. Do you really want to kill fellow US sailors?”

“Bear, we too have our orders, ours order a state of emergency, if you continue to block us, I will have no choice but to open fire. You have less than one minute to move.”

“Buleley, I guess God will sort out who’s right and who’s wrong. I’m sorry, but I can’t follow your orders.”

“Weaps, open fire, one round, wait two minutes, if she doesn’t turn, sink her.”

Two seconds after giving the order the Buleley’s front cannon fires a single round which lands in the water forty yards in front of the Bear’s bow. The Bear turns towards the Buleley returning fire with her 76mm canon, which lacks the range to reach the Buleley. “Weaps, sink her, may God have mercy on all of our souls.”

The 5 inch cannon fires five quick rounds, which strike the Bear amidships, setting the smaller boat on fire. People start jumping overboard; the fire reaches the Bear’s armory causing a massive explosion which tears the Coast Guard boat apart. 23 out of a crew of 100 people are picked up from the water between the two ships. The 23 stunned Coast Guard sailors are locked in a cargo compartment until the captain can figure out what to do with them.

“Sparks, contact base and copy the Admiral, inform them our access is blocked by USCG boats, we warned the Bear, who refused to allow us exit, we fired a warning shot; they returned fire; we sank the Bear with canon fire, we rescued 23 of her crew.”

While the captain is dictating his report he hears canon fire to his port and starboard, he decides that the other destroyers met similar treatment from the Coast Guard boats. The Captain decides the second shot in a new American civil war have been fired. This civil war isn’t going to between North and South or over States rights, this war is between freedom and tyranny.

Chapter 11

Joshua is correct; these are some of the best pancakes I’ve ever had, these are not the iHOP standard, after the owner serves us he pulls out a chair joining us in the discussion. “Adam, these are the best pancakes I’ve ever had, these are not regular iHOP pancakes.”

“Aaron, nope they aren’t, they’re my special recipe; they’re one of the reasons this little iHOP in the middle of nowhere generates so much revenue. We’ve been in the top twenty iHOPs for five years, when the suits show up, I change the recipe back to theirs, when they leave I use mine. But back to business, a friend of mine just sent me a draft of the President’s address he plans to make this evening. I printed it out for everyone, at this point, it’s in outline form, his speechwriters will take his notes and build a speech around it, and then they’ll put it on his teleprompter for him to read.”

I smile a wicked grin while responding, “I think we need to find a way to hack his teleprompter, he’ll sit there reading the words we flow across his screen he won’t know a damn thing. I bet we could get him to renounce everything by just hacking the screen.”

Everyone at the table laughs, Adam, says, “Very good idea, I’ll check with a few of our tech people.”

Joshua reads the outline, “Oh my God, is he serious? He’s going to say that the bill of rights shouldn’t cover everyone; he’s saying that there are limits to the bill of rights, not across the board limits, but limits and waivers depending on what you think and say. He uses the example of freedom of speech that doesn’t cover yelling “FIRE” in a movie theater, he’s going to say, freedom of speech won’t cover hate speech, and hate speech will be defined by him! He’s going to formalize censorship. Not just in print or broadcast but in our homes, in our thoughts. He’s going to say that due process should be limited in order to save lives; he’s going to propose neighbor's spy on each other, he’s going to offer rewards for turning in people who hide firearms and use hate speech. He’s going down the same road as the Russian communists. This is much worse than I feared he’d attempt. Since he’s been able to get away with everything else, I guess he figures he can get away with everything he wants. I guess he might even try to postpone the next election, even though he announced the first lady would run, want to bet he finds a way to postpone the election, so he doesn’t have to turn over power, even if he planned to turn it over only as a trick.”

Luke asks, “Joshua, how is he going to frame the spy on your neighbor bullshit?”

“He’s going to say we need to spy on our neighbors and family members in order to save lives, anyone could be an enemy of the people undermining the government. He’s going to brand any discussion against his policies as racist and hate speech. Therefore, any debate against him has effectively ended. He ends up with total control of the media, the internet and even between people. Worse even than it was in Russia where each apartment had a political officer whose job it was to listen and spy on their neighbors, so too will we. His damned DHS and NSA will focus their spying on every man woman and child in America. He’s going to turn us into a closed society, one where it’s going to be illegal for groups of people to gather and meet. Soon it’ll be illegal for us to meet like this. It’s a brilliant plan; the low information voter doesn’t care, and they’ll never bite the hand that feeds them. They’re very willing to sell their freedoms, which they really don’t understand for a 30 pieces of silver or a free iPhone. They are selling their children’s futures down the river to hell.  If the low information voter cared as much about their freedom as they do about their sports teams, they would have revolted already. The sit in uncomfortable stadium seats in the rain or freezing cold to root for their favorite teams, however they won’t spend a few minutes voting. They got the government they deserve; unfortunately, we get the same government as they who don’t care. When this President ran for election he said he was going to transform the country, he’s most likely the only politician that is actually going to fulfill one of his campaign promises.”

The table is silent for a long four minutes; we turn our attention back to our breakfast when Ron/Apollo asks, “Do we think the average citizen is going to support us if we bring force against the current administration? And if we do bring force against the administration, how do we ensure no future administration can get close to pulling our freedoms out from under us again?”

Joshua looks at the table, “Apollo that’s just like you to cut right to the meat of the matter, these are the two key questions aren’t they? If the people don’t support us, we run the risk of fighting in an environment where everyone except for us is our enemy; we’ll have no safe havens. We’ll be taking a chance any time we walk down a street or go into a store. Our neighbors might turn us in for the reward. It’s essential that some of them support what we’re trying to accomplish. We’re going to shed blood, a lot of blood for the future generations of all Americans. The other question is a bit more complicated. How do we ensure we don’t have to fight this same war every generation? The first answer, that comes to my mind, is term limits. If we don’t have a political/ruling class, the Congress will remember they represent the people and not the other way around. We need to improve our education system, so the real history is taught to every student. We need to ensure very thorough background checks are run on anyone who runs for office and lastly we must have a free and independent press. We used to have one, somewhere along the line they decided to make or being the news was more important than reporting it. They got the idea they were the stars, and we really cared or should care what they thought. Maybe we should have a robot sit in front of the camera reading the news or just run it across the screen set to music.

I blame the media for pushing us into the mess we’re in. In reality, the media selects the candidates they want by skewing their reports to favor the candidates who mirror the media’s false and immature view of the world. These candidates aren’t necessarily the ones the people want or the ones who are best for the office. It comes back to the media trying to make the news. Not just reporting it. They think they’re stars. I’m not sure how we correct this issue. In fact, in the short term, the media is going to be our biggest enemy. They will mobilize against us quicker than the Federal Government will. Does anyone have any thoughts?”

I respond, “Joshua, I’m not sure the media goes so far as selecting the candidates. However, I’ll agree with you they skew their reporting so that it’s almost impossible for someone, they don't like to be elected.”

Debra places her coffee down; she looks around before responding, “We created the media, we the people made them stars. The networks live by advertising, maybe we need to have the people finance the media’s news departments. Currently, people can donate $1 of their taxes to fund political campaigns, why not take $1 from every tax return to fund the media’s news programs, no outside advertising is allowed. We won’t get government control because the networks can’t go crying to DC to get more money; they each will get the same amount. Without advertising, companies won’t be able to sway the news, without ratings the reporters won’t become stars.”

Mary responds, “Debra, if we follow your suggestion then won’t the networks all be reading the same scripts as handed out from the government, won’t this be nothing more than a government run media news program?”

“The networks can spend their funds anyway they want. If they run bullshit news and just read, scripts people won’t tune in and the programs that follow the news will lose their built-in audiences.”

Joshua says; we don’t have to solve this now. However Apollo is correct, it has to be part of the end product, so we ensure we don’t end up here again. I asked for this breakfast meeting because yesterday the US Navy and the USCG fired the first shots in our new civil war. The USCG being under the DHS had orders to stop any navy ships from leaving their ports. The lead Navy ships fired on and sank the lightly armed Coast Guard ships. There are tens of thousands of military people resigning, they refuse to sign the new oath of allegiance to the president. Most of the Marines have tendered their resignation, including as we know their four-star commandant. DHS and TSA agents are guarding every military base; the military and so-called men in black are staring at each other across chain link fences. One of these bases is going to explode. When it does, it’s going to turn very nasty. Before it does we need to address a major problem, one that is closely related to Apollo’s comments. We need very positive press; we need to get a jump on the media, and we need to flood every social media site with favorable posts. We need to befriend some reporters. If we can’t befriend a couple of reporters; our technical people are going to have to figure out how to hack their feeds. If we go this route, we’re going to need pre-recorded messages to broadcast over the networks.”

I raise my hand, “I have a couple of friends who are in the public relations business I’ll meet with them, how do we befriend reporters who think anyone on the right is a demon from hell?”

Mary says, “We start with Wolf News Network, they tilt to the right; we prepare and send them stories; if they have re-prepared stories they may run with them.”

Joshua says, “Great ideas, let’s meet again in one week. Adam, can you close again?”

“Easy enough.”

@@@@@

The President and his security advisors are reviewing the day’s news and potential security threats to the country. “Mr. President, the military situation is very grave, in 24 hours 77% of the US Marines have requested to be released from their service contracts versus signing the new oath, this sir, is totally unacceptable.”

“No, it isn’t, this is great news. The Marines have always been too gung-ho if 77% of them want to resign, approve their requests, and then roll the remainder of the Marines into the Army. See how easy that was? We just got rid of one of the most conservative forces. And remember, ex-military personnel are deemed to be threats, so they have to report to their case officers once a week for two years. With so many military people resigning, we can hire additional case officers helping to lower the unemployment rate. We get a double bonus. I like it, push their paperwork through as fast as possible. I’ll contact the UN to announce American is further reducing our military. We’ll never again being a threat to any other country. What else do you have for me?”

“Mr. President, the Navy has broken out of their ports, the DHS sent Coast Guard ships to block the Navy from leaving port until the sailors signed the new oath, the Navy sank the Coast Guard ships for no reason.”

“Are you telling me the navy attacked those nice young men and women in the Coast Guard for no reason? The Coast Guard was carrying out a lawful order from the Secretary of the Homeland Security and the navy sank them?”

“Mr. President, that is correct.”

“I want the captains of those navy ships brought up on charges of murder, do you hear me, murder. I want them found guilty and put in jail with no possibly of parole.”

“Mr. President, they say they were operating under legal emergency mobilization orders which were confirmed. As such, maybe you should consider arresting the CNO and not the ship captains.”

“I like that idea even better; that damn Admiral Zander has been a pain in my ass for a long time, tell the AG to prepare a warrant for his arrest.”

“Mr. President, the military will say he is entitled to a court marshal versus a criminal trial because he was following your orders.”

“What orders, I didn’t give him any orders.”

“Sir, when you declared Martial Law, you put the military on full alert.  You did give him the order to mobilize. At the same time, the Secretary of Homeland Security said you ordered him to stop the military from leaving their bases as such both groups were following your orders.”

“I know what to do, I’ll fire the Admiral, and then he can be arrested as a civilian, prepare the papers firing him as CNO. I want the papers delivered to the Pentagon today,”

“Yes Mr. President.”

“I want the IRS to crack down on these right wing-nuts, stop them from attacking my policies, I want the IRS to audit anyone who posts or makes derogatory statements about my policies or me. Everyone, who is making such posts, are racist and as racist, they are an enemy of the people.”

@@@@@

The heads of the three largest drug cartels meet in Cancun, they took over the Isla Mujeres, where they could both be secure and also enjoy their time off. Carlos stood to address his two friends and competitors, “We have a rare opportunity, the gringos are reducing their military, and their DHS is running around collecting all of their citizen’s firearms. We won’t have to worry about their crazy citizens shooting at us. Their people are occupied with the fool in the White House. I suggest we combine our armies to attack and absorb part of southern Arizona, once we control it we can’t be denied access into Norte America, we’ll have our freeway, hell we can build a six-lane bridge and freeway, we’ll charge the gringos to drive on our freeway. They’ll end up paying for our express route into their country. Their border patrol has been reduced. The fool in the White House is planning on granting amnesty to all of our people who live in the Norte. We can hire many of them to distribute for us in their towns. Think about our good luck, no US Military or border patrols to block us. We have to move quickly or others will do it.”

Juan stands, saying, “How do I know if I merge my armed men with yours, you won’t kill my men and steal their weapons? How do I know my drugs will have free access across this so called freeway you want to build? How long will it take to build this freeway?”

“Juan, all good questions, we can use the peasants who won’t have any choice in the matter. They can build the bridge and freeway in eight months. Manpower isn’t a problem, there are millions of starving peasants in Northern Mexico, we’ll draft them to work for us. We’ll work them to death. To prove my good intent, I pledge to put $100 million into an escrow account, if you don’t have free access over our bridge and freeway, you can have the $100 million.”

The three drug lords agree to move ahead with the plan to annex part of southern Arizona, Carlos suggested if the plan succeed they do the same in New Mexico and California, who’s going to stop them?

In a week, four thousand heavily armed ex Mexican Special Forces troops move into southern Arizona where they protect the twenty thousand enslaved workers who start building the drug lord’s freeway and bridge. The Governor of Arizona begs Washington DC for help. Since the National Guard has been federalized, the governor has only the state police to send south. Five hundred state police officers meet four thousand Mexican troops with heavy weapons; only forty-eight officers survive to return to Phoenix. They report that the Mexicans are building a six-lane road and bridge, complete with toll booths. The President dispatches his Secretary of State to the area. John Cerry arrives to meet with the drug cartel leaders, after two days of discussions and parties; Cerry returns to Washington DC with great news for the President. The President and the Secretary of State meet over dinner in the White House, “John how was your trip south?”

“Mr. President, I reached an agreement with the Mexicans. It turns out the Mexicans are building a new six-lane highway from south Arizona into Mexico. They are connecting the freeway with our interstate highway system; they are building a new bridge. Here’s the good news, they are absorbing the total cost of the project, and are willing to share the tolls with us, 30% for us and 70% for them. I agreed since we didn’t provide any of the working Capital to build the project.”

“Do they want anything from us?”

“Yes Mr. President, they asked for some transportation engineers. They want to ensure their design for the bridge is correct. I offered to send some workers; we can claim we’re creating jobs by sending unemployed construction crews to the site, if we send 2,000 people, they promise to have a bridge built in four months. They are planning on working 24/7.”

“John, you’re correct, you worked out a great comprise. You have my full support. I’ll issue a press release stating the plan you worked out will create many thousands of much-needed jobs in southern Arizona. Arizona shouldn’t have such high unemployment; we gave them two years notice before I stopped all of the fracking, how much more time did they require to retool their industries. Seriously, fracking? The 1% dream up new ways to get richer while they destroy the environment. John, make sure you hold your press conference and point out the new freeway and bridge will be no cost for hybrids; that was another great idea. The base is going to love it, a new zero cost infrastructure project. Why not ask your new friends if they can be convinced to build other connections between our two countries, we can provide tens of thousands of workers to help build additional bridges and freeways. Moving the workers to wherever your new friends want them will cost less than keeping them on welfare.”

@@@@@

Sally says, “Rod, there are a number of cars coming up the driveway; they said you were expecting them?”

“Honey, remember I told you we were going to be having some company? Looks like the first guests are arriving.”

“Honey, your friends are all wearing jeans and leather or ski jackets, but I can recognize Marines when I see them.”

“Yes dear.”

The General opens the front door; each guest snaps to attention and salutes the General and his wife as they enter the house.”

The General says, “You don’t salute me, I’m no longer in uniform and none of you are wearing the uniform.”

Their leader says, “General, we’re not saluting you; we’re saluting Mrs. Brownstone, she’s put up with you for thirty years, with you retired, we’re showing her our respect for having to put up with an old war horse like you all the time. Sir.”

“Colonel, please cut the bullshit and come on in, we have to be quick, the bird will overfly us in ten minutes. My staff will put your vehicles in the barn do the bird doesn’t see them.”

“Thank you for sir, we can help, by the way, our last vehicle dragged a bunch of tree limbs behind us to mask our tire prints coming up your unpaved driveway.”

“Colonel, you don’t forget much do you?”

“Sir, it’s only been 48 hours, still feels funny not putting on the uniform every day.”

“Don’t worry about it; if we’re successful, you’re be wearing the uniform again. No matter how you view it, once a Marine, always a Marine. Would your men like something to drink?”

“Yes sir, coffee would be welcome.”

With that Mrs. Brownstone pushes a cart of freshly made coffee, sugar, creamer and freshly baked cookies. I know you men, you may be all grown up, but you’re all little boys on the inside.”

The men get conformable in the General’s study, the Colonel says, “General, I’ll get right to the point, we’ve spoken to many people; many first responders, many of the surviving militias and I have personally spoken to Joshua. We’ve come to ask you for your help, we want you to be the defacto leader of the people’s party, no more Democrat, or Republican. We want to return the government to ‘We the People.' Sir, Joshua sends his best, he said to tell you, you’re too young to retire, you hate golf and the last time you went fishing the fish laughed and spit at you, by the way, we’re all interested in hearing that story. Joshua is correct; you’re the only person who is well known enough to pull all of the independent groups together. Everyone knows you’ve never been political. You’re the perfect person, you’re well respected, you’ve destroyed and built countries. Sir, you know what’s going on better than we do. Sir we the people need you.”

“Colonel, you’re asking me to put my families lives at risk.”

“Sir, less risk then when there was a Fatwa against you and your family. Sir, we protected your family before we can do it now.”

“Frankly, you do not surprise me; I expected this when you asked permission to stop by with a few friends. I assume these friends are part of my new protection detail. Let me chat with Sally.”

Before the General can stand, Sally enters the study, “Rod, you old war dog, you know damn well, you’re going to say yes, do you want our country to be more communist than Russia? If the SOB in the White House gets away with his transformation, Puten will be laughing his butt off. Do you want your grandchildren to grow up in a communist country? Do you want your name to be associated with evil? You spent thirty years defending this country, how can you say no?”

“Honey, I can say no because I’m not a politician, I say what’s on my mind, I say it straight and usually filled with four letter words.”

“So leave out most of the four letter words. I think the country needs someone to tell them the truth, if you don’t agree, who else will?”

The Colonel, says, “Sir, before you say Joshua, he said to tell you, the following, “You first, you old warhorse,” He said he’s too old, he’ll help, and he’ll do anything he can for us, with the exception of leading.”

“Colonel, it’s already started, how can I take over the operation in process.”

“Sir, you know most of the influential people. Sir, you should know that Admiral Zander gave the DHS a real black eye.”

“I heard, one of his aides happened to stop by with my morning newspaper, I have to say, I never had a full navy captain deliver my newspaper before, it was kind of nice.”

“Sir, the Admiral said, “Don’t get used to it.”

“OK, what are the next steps?”

“First we will deploy my team for your family’s protection, and then we would like to move you. Your home is too well known. The President would cry if a drone happened to fall on your house. We have the perfect place to make our new headquarters, safe, secure and almost impossible to destroy. Sir, we’re ready to leave when you are.”

Sally walks into the study wheeling two suitcases, “He’s ready to go now, do you think after thirty years I want you under foot all of the time, Rod, go save our country. I love you.”

Chapter 12

Just before one of the rare Presidential press conferences, the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) releases a report reviewing the result of the President’s policies. The Affordable Care Act, (Obamacare), Safety Act (Gun buyback), Safe Children Act, (Curfew) and higher taxes is 15 million additional people are going to lose their jobs. The President replies that this is a good thing; people shouldn’t be working in dangerous industries such as firearms and it’s not safe for people to work in the middle of the night. He says people get tired at night; they should sleep, it’s the natural order of things. He tells the press no one should worry because he’s going to use the tax increase on the 1% to provide additional benefits to the unemployed.

A reporter from the New York Slimes newspaper stands and asks, “Mr. President, isn’t adding 15 million more people to the unemployment rolls a serious issue? We’re already at the lowest percentage of working Americans in thirty-six years.”

“John, as I’ve just said, this is good news, we’re going to provide for these people and re-educate them for new careers that will provide them with higher benefits and better pay than they had before. Selling firearms or building firearms isn’t a job anyone should want. It’s a job that covers the employee’s hands in the blood from the victims the guns they built or sold killed. Is this how anyone wants to go home to their family? Covered in innocent blood? Would your children want you to come home from work covered in blood? It’s also not natural for people to work all night in bars or dark restaurants. People sleep at night and work during the day. I’m helping these people. Many of these people hated their old jobs, they’re now free to do what they’ve always wanted to.”

“Mr. President, Richard Bayson, ABD News, sir, don’t you think the problem is that the people don’t understand how large your heart is and depth of your caring?”

“Richard, you’re correct; part of the issue is too many people, like those at Wolf News and those on talk internet, aren’t pleased with anything my administration does, all they see is a black man sitting in their White House. They’re racist, married to their bibles and guns. They have not evolved into the 21st century. We as a nation have to help these people. We should come together to support these poor people who are confused. We need to help them. As Americans, it’s our task to help those who need help. When any natural disaster happens, America is the first to respond. As Americans we have huge hearts; we give billions to charity, as a people we care for the needy, the hungry, the lost and now with the Affordable Care Act, we care for the sick. As such, I’m happy to report we’ve built hundreds of new special education locations to help train those who are stuck in the past. We’re going to help cover the relocation and transportation costs so these misguided people can be educated into our modern society. We’ll teach these people the error of their ways and help them see their problems, in order to solve a problem one has to admit they have a problem. We’re going to spend whatever is required to help the misguided among us; we’re going to drag these people into the twenty-first century. We’re going to open the first of these new-re education schools next week. The friendly TSA officers, who we've all come to trust, are going to assist the agents of Homeland Security to transport families to these new schools. Plus, these families aren’t going to have to pay a single penny for their new higher education. Their children will go to school. The unemployed will learn new trades that they’ll be able to use when they're released.”

“Mr. President, Robert Van from NBX news, how long will these families stay in these schools?”

“Robert, I’m glad you asked that, they will have the opportunity to stay in these schools as long as it takes, we wouldn’t be the nation we are if we don’t care for our people. There’s no rush; we will fund this program from the increased taxes on the 1%. We’re also getting close to the launch of the new national sales tax that will fund the transformation of our economy into the twenty-second century. We’ll jump-start our green industries and finally shift our country away from petroleum; Detroit needs a gentle push to shift all of their production over to green automobiles. Look at the current price of gasoline, at $8.50 a gallon, our people are having to make a decision between fuel or food, by going green no one will ever have to make that decision again. We have more renewable energy than the entire world’s petroleum. America is going to stop importing oil. The cost of gasoline may jump until the new green systems are up and running. However, it’s a small price to pay to transform America into the twenty-second century. I’m asking every reporter in the room to report the truth, not the lies of those caught in the past, Report our bright future. A future so bright we’re all going to need sunglasses,” With that, the President puts on a pair of sunglasses, which his staff hands out to all of the reporters, who put them on smiling.

The room erupts into cheering and applause that goes on for five long minutes, every time the President tries to continue, the room is still cheering the re-education of so many Americans who just “don’t get it.” Finally, America will come together as one, no red or blue, just one united country.

The President continues, “In the past six years, we’ve accomplished so much, yet at the same time, there are people who are trying to hide their firearms. These are people who don’t understand the sacrifice everyone has to undergo so that our children don’t grow up in fear of being gunned down on their playgrounds. There are people who hate me and this administration; these people are plotting, are trying to return us to the old ways, the ways that failed so many families. I’m asking everyone to keep your eyes and ears open. Listen to your neighbors and friends, listen when you’re shopping, and listen when you’re having your morning coffee at Starbucks. I’m asking every American to listen to those around you. If you hear something, anything out of the ordinary, pick up any phone and call 1-888-DHS NOWW. If your tip leads to an arrest, you will receive a reward of $5,000 tax-free. We have to protect each other. We have to work together to protect our children. Your actions may save my daughters’ lives. Your neighbors’ call may save your son’s life. No call is wasted. If you hear anything, call.”

@@@@@

“We the people…say NO more.” Messages start appearing across the country, hand painted billboards; hand painted posters on the side of barns and buildings; large banners hung over bridges and overpasses. No one seems to know where they come from. In the mornings, they just seem to appear. Bright yellow Gadsden “Don’t Tread on Me” flags sprout up like daisies on a warm spring day. As fast as the billboards and Gadsden flags appear, Federal agents cut them down or paint over the messages. It’s become a game; the messages and flags go up at night and are taken down in the morning. No matter how many times Federal agents remove the signs, they reappear. The internet is flooded with new message boards used by patriots exchanging messages and like thoughts. The FCC tries bringing down the sites as fast as they appear.

The Republican Senators return to the Senate; they march into the chamber wearing the same dirty clothing they wore when they were taken to Manassas. Senator Cruise walks directly to the podium, pushing the Senator from Nevada out of his way, “Senator Cruise, you are out of order, you should know better then enter the chamber in your current condition. You know you never lay a hand on another Senator. I’m asking you to leave the chamber, change, apologize and you may return.”

“Go fuck yourself, you and the President kidnaped us, we were held against our will. I’m here to say; the house is going to bring articles of impeachment against the President, the Vice President and the Attorney General. We will then try them here in the Senate, if you try to interfere, I promise you, you will be very sorry. I promise you, you’ll go to jail for a very long time.”

“Senator Cruise, I think you’re mistaken; the house isn’t going to bring any charges against the President, to do so, would mean the House and anyone here who supports these articles of impeachment is a racist. To bring charges against the President is now considered hate speech, which is a federal crime, the AG has issued new regulations, as such there’ll be no impeachment.”

“Senator, yes there will be, we will impeach the President, the Vice President, the AG and everyone else in government who is a traitor, I think you should be on the list too.”

@@@@@

“Captain Grover any problems with Operation Brimstone?”

“No General, everything is nominal.”

“Very good, I have a new assignment for you and your team. We’re expecting Federal Marshals to try to serve Admiral Zander with new orders; most likely firing him as CNO and then arresting him for murder. Captain, those papers, and those marshals shall not enter this building. Is this clear?”

Smiling, Captain Grover says, “Yes Sir, with pleasure sir.”

“Captain, I don’t need to know the details, and I don’t need any trophies, please try to handle the situation in a quiet manner.”

The Captain snaps a salute; he turns and leaves the general’s private office, where his top two Lieutenants are waiting for him. “Sir, new orders?”

“Yes, follow me into the cave, we have a lot to discuss.”

The three men enter a secure conference room, called the cave because it’s small and dark. “Our new mission is to stop some Federal Marshals from serving Admiral Zander any paperwork. The CIC wants to fire him and then have the AG arrest him.”

“Sir, what are our ROE?”

“Hide the bodies where they’ll never be found.”

“I knew I was going to like this assignment.”

“I want our people to man the main entrance gates to the Pentagon. No federal agent, or marshal gets in, none, if they give you any problems, escort them to the basement interrogation cells. Tell them you’re taking them to meet the Admiral.”

@@@@@

Within an hour of the President’s speech, the DHS 800 number is overloaded, no one can get through. Once connected the phone stays connected, even hung up, the phone still holds the line, the user finds they can’t make any other calls; their phones remain locked for 24 hours.

Anonymous floods the internet and every Federal Government phone and fax line. Every federal fax spits out, “We the people say NO MORE. We are Anonymous.”

At 6:00 PM EST, every television broadcast is interrupted by a person wearing a white Guy Fawkes mask, he looks into the camera, “We are Anonymous, we are here to warn the United States Government that the internet is free for everyone. The internet is not to be censored. The internet is not to be blocked by the small minded. We are Anonymous; we have a warning for the United States Government, if you continue to censor and monitor the international web we will block all of your access to the outside world, your telephones, your faxes, your televisions, your computers will be frozen. Your satellites are useless to you if you can’t connect to them. We are Anonymous; we have a warning and a message for the people of the United States, wake up, your leaders are leading you to ruin and enslavement. Wake up before it’s too late. Rise up, we will help you, we can blind the government, we can make them deaf, we will help you if you rise up and show us you want your country back. We are Anonymous. We are now returning your television to the regularly scheduled broadcasts. We are Anonymous; we are here watching and waiting for you to show the spirit we know is inside every one of you.”

The President goes crazy watching the screen; he starts throwing things around the Oval Office. He breaks a thousand-year-old vase whose pieces tear a 250-year-old painting of George Washington. “I want them found and hanged!”

The President’s Chief of Staff says, “Sir, we don’t know who they are, or where they are, which is why they go by the name of Anonymous.”

“I don’t care, find them, use every computer in the damn NSA to track them down, I want them all hanging for crimes against humanity.”

Chapter 13

“Middle America” that area between the two coasts usually ignored when the media flies between New York City and Los Angeles erupts in disgust over the President’s remarks. Banners, billboards, signs on barns, bumper stickers all scream their distrust with the Federal Government. People, who never thought about politics now, find it their number one discussion topic. Local newspapers tried running bold headlines speaking against the President’s plans, only to be shut down by the new DHS censors. Local coffee shops and dinners in the Bible Belt find people whispering and looking over their shoulders. People who’d been friends since grade school no longer trust each other, no one is sure who might be listening and calling the DHS number. Shortly after dawn, the talk at Joan’s Dinner in central Iowa is the explosion at the local department of Agriculture building, the office and all of their vehicles exploded and burned to the ground sometime around 3AM. In a very unusual move, the local volunteer fire department was delayed in getting to the fire, not arriving at the site until 4:50AM, after all of the damage was done. The local fire chief was interviewed, he said, “It’s not our fault; we’re a volunteer department; we can’t go to the fire until our crew arrives. When the siren was sounded, and the address broadcast, most of our crew called in sick, there must be a bad flu going around.”

The reporter asks, “Chief isn’t it funny that the crew was able to report in and put out a different fire at 5:10AM?”

“Not at all, some flu’s last 24 hours, some only a few hours, I guess this flu hit my people very hard, but didn’t last long, thank God for that. I stand behind my people.”

That evening the local office of the Department of the Treasury, which also housed the central Iowa IRS offices exploded and burned to the ground,. The fire alarm didn’t sound at any of the stations. The Chief promised the local TV station he would have someone check out the alarm system. In the middle of the interview, the station alarm sounds. A local restaurant has a fire in one of the fryers, while the reporter is standing in front of the station, a truck leaves, within two minutes another leaves empty, the reporter asks the chief, “I thought you couldn’t send a truck out without the crew?”

“You’re correct; however in this case the crew is already on site, most eat there, they called in saying just send the truck with their equipment on it.”

“Why couldn’t that have happened for the fires at the two government fires?”

“My people weren’t hanging around those offices.”

“Chief will you be able to ensure the people that your crews will respond to any calls for fires?”

“Of course we can, as long as the alarms reach us. I’ve heard that there is a problem with the company the government uses for their security monitoring.”

“Can you share anything with our viewers?”

“I understand that the workers went on strike, something about not wanting to work for a communist.”

“So you’re saying if the company doesn’t report the fires you can’t put them out?”

“I’m happy you understand that very simple issue.”

“Chief, that doesn’t sound fair to me.”

“Why isn’t it fair? How can we put out a fire if we don’t know about one? I hope your station doesn’t use the same security firm as the Federal Government does.”

“I think we do.”

“Then don’t catch fire or have any other major issues.”

These scenes are repeated across the Mid-West where average Americans are fighting back any way they can.

@@@@@

The new President of the Republic of Texas opens his first press conference.

“Sir, John Straight from Wolf News, how are the people of Texas responding to the President’s new executive orders?”

President Lawson responds, “John, most Texans are laughing. And, by the way, I’m the President of Texas that the other man is a dictator most Americans are going to resent electing.”

“Mr. President, what are you doing for money?”

“Son, you already know the answer to that question don’t you? However for everyone else watching, we use gold and silver coins and plastic currency cards that are backed by our reserves of gold, silver and oil. We’ve issued very few paper bills. It’s much safer to use the plastic cards, they have a smart chip and a pin; they’re very safe, even if one is lost or stolen the thief would need the pin and match the data embedded in the small chip on the card. Our system is almost un-hackable.”

“Sir, Jose Aguilera from the Latin Slimes, how are you planning on handling undocumented workers?”

“Senior, I think you mean, how am I going to deal with illegals aliens? I’ve tasked the Rangers with picking up every illegal alien they locate; we’re providing them free transportation home. “

“Sir, if I may, a follow-up question?”

“Yes?”

“Isn’t this their home?”

“Not if they entered our country illegally.”

“Sir, many arrived here as children, they….”

“Then they’ve had enough time to get right with the law of the land, it could have been here in Texas or in America, either way, if they didn’t care enough to try and become legal then we’re going to help them relocate. They’re lucky we’re not charging them for the move.”

“Sir, if the situation in America turns violent, what are you going to do about it?”

“Same as most of you, watch it unroll on my cable Wolf News programs.”

John Straight laughs and nods towards the President, who nods back.

“Mr. President, Rob Clearstone-Audrey from ABX, could you say something about the LGBT community?”

“Rob, what would you like me to say?”

“Will you allow LGBT to become citizens in Texas?”

“Of course, we don’t discriminate, however there will be no LGBT allowed to teach our elementary school children.”

“Sir, a followup?”

“Yes.”

“Sir, isn’t that discrimination against the LGBT community?”

“Maybe, but that’s the law that has been passed by the Texan Congress and signed by me today.”

“Sir, I protest…”

“You’ve had your follow-up.”

“Sir, Alex Bright from NBX news, will you send troops to the border with America?”

“Alex, the Republic of Texas, will patrol our borders. A nation that doesn’t have borders isn’t a nation, is it? We’re also going to build a 20 foot wall along our border with Mexico.”

“Sir, why not have open borders?”

“Because then we wouldn’t be the Republic of Texas would we? If anyone could walk in and demand benefits how long would we be a nation? How long do you think the average Texan is going to sit still paying for those people’s welfare? We in Texas believe everyone is welcome, as long as they follow our laws and enter with a visa.”

“Sir, visitors need a visa card to enter Texas?”

“Are you really asking me this as a real question? Visitors can bring any form of payment, remember to keep Texas green. Thank you, the press conference is over, same time, same place next week.”

@@@@@

A DHS Suburban pulls over a pickup truck outside of Helena Montana; the officer knocks on the driver’s door, saying, “Open your window.”

“No.”

“I’m giving you an order, open your window.”

“No.”

“If you don’t open your window, I’ll open the door and drag your ass out of the truck, do what you’re ordered to do.”

“Try it. You’re not a police officer; you have no jurisdiction to pull me over.”

“You’re traveling south on Interstate 15; this is a federal highway. Hence, I have the right to pull you over and question you. Now roll down your window.”

“No.”

The DHS agent pulls his sidearm out, starting to point it at the driver’s window. Before he can move his sidearm into position, the driver shoots the agent through the door thinking, “Damn, and this is a new F 150 I’m going to have to stop by Steve’s body shop. I hope he can match the paint on the door and patch the hole I just put through the door.”

@@@@@

In Charlotte, North Carolina TSA agents have begun searching and patting down passengers waiting for the local city mass transit, many have their pocket books and briefcases opened and searched. One middle-aged African American protests saying, “This isn’t an airport, you have no right to pat me down or look inside my briefcase.”

“If we don’t check you and your belongings you don’t get on the bus. Clear?”

“Yes you’re very clear, and I don’t care what you’re saying because I’m getting on the bus, you have no right to be here.”

The TSA agent yells, TERRORIST TERRORIST, and shots the middle-aged man who is trying to board the bus to get to his job. He leaves behind a wife and three young boys aged 3, 5 and 9.

The local Charlotte TV station runs the story under the headline, TSA murders one of our own, fifty seconds into the broadcast they are taken off the air, replaced by a rerun of CSI Miami.

People around the country are getting upset and worried; marches are broken up by DHS agents, TSA agents show up where ever there is any sort of transportation. Soon they begin stopping cars on local streets to check the car’s trunks. The TSA announces the new program as one to help find illegal firearms, the TSA starts a new national advertising program saying “We’re protecting American families and children; we’re making you safer every day”. Many of their billboards are torn down by average citizens, their posters have red swastikas painted over them. Anyone, who tries speaking out against the government, is arrested by DHS agents, they are taken in for observation and questioning.

The national economy slows to deep depression levels even though the government reported unemployment rate is down to 5.2%.Every state reports negative growth. People are scared to go out, the national curfew has destroyed nightlife, with 65% of all restaurants closing. Every day the number of the unemployed grows, every day the number of unhappy people grows. More people give up looking for a job which shifts the unemployment rate downward even through the number of the unemployed is going up, When the President’s policies are directed at others, most people don’t mind. When they came for the guns, the majority kept quiet. When they came for the 1%; most kept quiet. When a national curfew was declared, it was OK, because most thought they’d be home by curfew. When the government mandated health insurance, it was OK, because most had employer-provided insurance. When the majority had to use the same insurance they became upset, when they stopped bus riders, most didn’t care because they didn’t ride buses. When they stopped families on vacation and groped their wives and children it was too late, there was no one left to help. The average citizen is being pushed over the edge into darkness with no one to call on for help.

Chapter 14

The internet explodes with the news that ex-US Marine Commandant General Brownstone will be a special guest on the Sean Hannd show that evening. “General, welcome to the Sean Hannd show, how are you doing since your rather abrupt retirement?”

“Sean, I’m doing much better than the country is.”

“General, I’m not going to ask you where you are, because I know there are some people very interested in your whereabouts. When we announced this morning you would be a special guest, we’ve had a number of very interesting people looking for you. Each of them showing different types of badges. Many of these people have been camped out at the studio for six plus hours waiting to see if you were going to show up in person. It would seem the administration is very eager to keep an eye on you; I’m sure they would love to meet with you face to face.”

Laughing, “Sean, I seem to be more popular now than I was as a four-star general.”

“General, it might have something to do with your Facebook page. I’ve read your posts, you argue for an overthrow of the current administration. General, don’t you think this is a very dangerous train of thought? I know you’ve seen the results of countries that have undergone violent uprisings. If that happened here, don’t you think it would do more damage than good?”

“Sean, violence is a horrible thing. I do advocate the overthrow of the current administration; I didn’t say how to accomplish that task. If the country slips into a violent revolt, it won’t be pretty. The population density is much different than 200 years ago; weapons are much better killing machines today. So many people will get swept up in the violence. Millions will die; the country may never recover from a violent civil war. However, if this administration doesn’t listen to the people’s voices, there might not be any other choice. We’re sliding down a dark and very dangerous slope; the bottom of the slope is a dictatorship. Our forefathers founded America to get out from under a king. Today’s technology would make a king very powerful, so powerful he might never be able to be overthrown. The people of America have to wake up and decide how they want to be governed. The American people have to decide what they want their future to be. Do the American people want to live off of the government tit forever or do the American people want to carry the ideals of their forefathers into the future? The people have to decide what they want. The problem we have today is, so many are uneducated; they make decisions based on 30 Second sound bites and how things make them feel.”

“General, there’s a rumor that you’ve been approached by groups to lead them in a violent overthrow of the existing administration.”

“Sean, there are always rumors; I’ve never paid any attention to them.”

“General, so you’re not leading a group to march on DC to demand the change of the government?”

“Sean, I don’t know what I’m going to be doing, when I figure it out, I’ll make sure I call you.”

“General, I for one would feel much better if you were to decide to carry our message to Washington.”

“Sean, I hope it doesn’t come to that, I’m hoping the American people wake up and send the message to their elected officials that enough is enough. I’m hoping the average Joe wakes up and says what the hell happened here?”

General Brownstone hangs up the telephone and smiles, thinking the die has been set. Recently promoted Major Grover knocks on his office door, “General, I think it’s time.”

“Very well Major, are the others here? Has Joshua arrived?”

“General, they are all here, even Joshua. Admiral Zander regrets his absence, something about him not being able to leave the bunker under the Pentagon.”

“Major, when we’re finished here, I think you’re going to have to return to Washington and retrieve our good Admiral. He gets lost when he’s on land too long. The President wants to arrest the Admiral for murder. I know you’ve been ordered to stop Federal Marshals from taking the Admiral into custody. I know we can count on you to keep him safe.”

“Yes sir, you can.”

“Major, do you think that SOB DHS regional director Roger Venkin will find us?”

“Sir, we’re hiding almost in plain sight. The Greenbrier nuclear bunker was built to house the Federal Government in case of a nuclear war. We’re sitting in West Virginia under a hotel, just a short hop from DC; while the DHS runs around the country looking for you. They even tried to enter Canada, who refused them entry; I understand it really upset the President.”

“I’m concerned about Venkin, once he gets the taste of a bone, he never lets it go. He wants to rise up the DHS organization to quickly, capturing me alive would ensure his promotion to the highest positions in DHS. I’m sure he’s traced my call to Sean. Major I think you should pay Venkin a visit, persuade him to look elsewhere and leave us alone. I’m sure you can find a way to convince him.”

“General, he may have tried to trace your call. However, we bounced it off so many different servers, it may take the DHS years to unravel the trail. Since you asked, I’d be happy to pay Venkin a visit.”

“Major, tell the communications team, as usual, they did very good. Now let’s go attend the meeting.”

The two enter the conference room where there are already 24 people who’ve come from across the country. All stand when the General enters saying “Please be seated, please be comfortable. I’m sorry we’re meeting in this situation. I served our country for over 30 years. I fought in four wars; I never thought we’d be sitting here in this special place which was built as a bunker in case of nuclear war. A place where our government was to continue operations, now we’re sitting here to discuss what to do about the man who sits in the Oval Office, a man who has shredded our Constitution, making himself a dictator with his own private army, his own black shirts, the DHS. Our people have had their rights stolen from them; many have been sent to prison for nothing more than speaking the truth. Our networks and the internet are censored; everything we do, say, and read is watched and recorded. This isn’t the America I enlisted to serve. However, in my opinion if we start with violence we’ll lose the support of the people. I don’t want America to look like Syria. We may have to use force, but first we have to do everything we can to limit the collateral damage. If we’re the first to use force, the press will tear us a new one. We need to attack the press; we need to find a way to make them see the truth. We can’t rely on just Wolf News, who’s been pushed off the air and onto the Internet. Do any of you have an idea how to start opening the press’ minds?”

Since he’s the senior person in the room, Joshua stands first saying, “You all know me. I too served our country for more than 30 years; the General and I have spilled blood in some of the same places. I retired after my third heart attack. My days in the field are over, I leave that to the General. He’s right we need to find a way to get some of the press on our side. The low information voters make up their minds based on sound bites and comedy shows they think are real news programs. I can’t wait to see what they say about the General’s interview; I bet they say he’s calling for the violent overthrow of the government. The press makes up the news if they can’t find a story they like. No matter how bad our people suffer from unemployment, food and fuel price inflation which in the last year has passed 15% the press says we’re improving. The media supports the President’s claim that the economy is improving when we have the largest number of unemployed in more than 40 years, with the lowest employment rate in the same 40 years. They worship this guy. I think the only thing, that's going to change their mind, is when he censors one of their stations, or a couple of them disappear.”

The leader of the Mid West militia who goes by Simon says, “Joshua, you’ve got it, we make a couple disappear and make it look like the DHS did it. We dress our people in TSA or DHS uniforms, arrive in black Suburbans at their offices and we arrest them. Everyone will think the government turned on the press. After a few disappear I bet, a few tries to reach out to the General.”

@@@@@

Fort Hood Texas is the home of over 80,000 troops, hundreds of Abrams main battle tanks; self-propelled artillery, mobile rocket launchers, thousands of Bradley fighting vehicles and LAVs. General Bradly Cruise (no relationship to the Senator), the commanding general has just hung up the phone with the President of the Republic of Texas. The General turns to his aide, “Please assemble the officers in the ready room, I think we’re going to need to have a little discussion. Say two hours, which ought to allow everyone enough time to return from the field and cleanup.”

“Yes sir.”

The aide turns around, leaving the General’s office; he picks up the alert phone saying, “III Corps actual has ordered an officer meeting in two hours. Condition Beta one.”

Two hours later, General Cruise stands in front of 5,000 officers who command over 80,000 troops. “Ladies and Gentlemen, thank you for joining me, not that anyone of you had a choice.”

The room laughs, “President Lawson, the President of Texas has called to ask where we stand on his little ego trip. I told him we didn’t want to fight our brothers and sisters; however, we are all Texans in our hearts.”

The room erupts again. “He asked if we would protect the borders. I told him yes.” The room erupts a third time. “We talked for thirty minutes; we reached an agreement, I told the President that the first order of business had to be that everyone on the base will be offered full citizenship in the Republic of Texas for themselves and their families. If any family members currently live outside of the Republic, they will be given a visa to enter and then automatically become a citizen.”

The room cheers. “Now that that’s out of the way, I told the President that we WILL protect the borders and protect the Republic. What say you?”

A hand rises from the middle of the room. The General says, “yes, stand and ask your question?’

“General, Captain Walsh, first of the third, Sir some of my people want to return to their homes, they don’t want to be part of the Republic or in any way get into a shooting war with the rest of the American Military.”

“Captain, how many of your people think this way?”

“Sir, about 15% of them.”

Others stand saying, “Sir, some of mine also agree.”

The General looks around the room, “Ladies and Gentlemen, would it interest you to know that the President called the commanders at every military base in Texas? Would it interest you to know that the commanders of Fort Sam Houston, Red River Army Depot, JRB Fort Worth, NAS Corpus Christi and NAS Kingsville all agreed to join the Republic of Texas with one condition, that condition being we join, it seems that our might scares the other commanders. Frankly, our might ought to scare another country” The room erupts laughing and cheering. The only major holdout is Dyess; I have to ask you, who’d have thunk that the zoomies would sit on the fence? I want this to be a volunteer force, as such; I want each of you to return to your companies and talk with your people, anyone, who wants to leave, is free to go, however they can’t take any weapons with them. In fact, I’ll arrange a truck convoy to take all who want to travel to the border, we’ll drive them there and drop them off. We’ll meet back here at 1800 hours. Don’t order anyone either way, let your people decide for themselves. Anyone, who asks you for your advice, should be told them the answer is inside of each of them. Ask them why they joined in the first place, why are they willing to fight? What do they hold dear? Hence, the answer is inside each trooper regardless of rank. I know I want a United States, one that’s free and run by freely elected people who have the citizen’s best interests at heart. I took an oath, the same oath you and your people took. I take my oath very seriously. I know you do too. I’m hoping we can help guide our country back together.

“Sir, anyone, who wants to leave, can just do so? Even us?”

“Captain, yes, my offer includes everyone on the base, which includes everyone, even those of you assembled here. If you’re here tonight at 1800 hours, you’re part of the new Republic of Texas military, if you’re not here, then I wish you the best of luck and safe travels. Dismissed.”

@@@@@

There are miles of tunnels under most of the office buildings in Washington DC; many are used to allow hidden passage between government buildings when officials don’t want the press to see them moving between the different government agencies. Tonight in a deep forgotten tunnel the senior agent of the Bureau of Diplomatic Security is standing against a cold, damp wall, he’s looking at his friend of ten years, a deputy director of the FBI. “This crap is getting very deep; my gut says the people aren’t going to take it much longer. It’s going to get very hard to protect the officials from the people they’re supposed to serve, have you heard anything?”

“Field offices have picked up thousands of rumors, everything from a million citizen march to people saying they’re going to attack the Capital and White House. We’re stretched too thinly, after the last drawdown; we don’t have enough special agents to follow up on all of the leads. Some of the local first responders won’t even take or return our calls. When we call, many hang up on us. I had one Sheriff in New Mexico tell me; he doesn’t talk to the FBI any longer.”

“You’re closer to the Secret Service then we are, what are they saying?”

“They’ve decided to protect the President and nothing more. A friend told me, that half of the Presidential Protective agents have asked for reassignment to field offices or to other agencies.”

“How is the President taking it?”

“He doesn’t seem to know what’s going on. He still thinks the Tea Party is behind everything, at least that’s his public face. He’s a good poker player.”

“Damn it, unless he or someone comes to their senses, we’re going to enter the twilight zone.”

“Yea, where’s Rod Sterling when we really need him?”

“Bet he’s in the outer limits, seriously what are you guys going to do?”

“I’m going on vacation, so are many of the Diplomatic Security people.”

“Let’s try to figure out what our options are and meet back here in three nights.”

“Agreed, chill my friend, things are getting real strange.”

“In my 25 years, this is the strangest shit I’ve ever seen.”

@@@@@

People sitting in the pews of thousands of churches on Sunday hear two different sides of the national crisis. Some preachers tell their parishioners that the President is trying to save lives; others tell their flock that they should be guided by their hearts and the spirit of God. In many churches, arguments break out in the pews; families are divided whether the President is for the average family or against them. Preachers try to guide their flocks to remember God is love, almost every preacher reads the sixth commandant; of “Thou shall not kill.” They preach give peace a chance.

@@@@@

In Lancaster California, a police department SWAT squad breaks down the front door of a house; they smash into a family’s house at 3AM. No one knocked; no one announced they were the police. The husband who had fallen asleep on the couch, wakes, thinking someone is breaking into his house, he reaches under the couch pulling out a 1911 45 caliber semi-auto handgun. When the first officer enters his home, he thinks they’re criminals breaking into his home, to save his family he fires on the officers, killing two of them. The third officer fires eight rounds into him, instantly killing him. The wife runs down the stairs holding a small LCP 380, the fourth officer shoots and kills her. The entire situation was a horrible mistake. The SWAT squad had the wrong house; they should have attacked the house next door. The local press screams about police brutality, trying to get the DA to charge the officers with murder. The DA replied it was just a mistake while refusing to charge the officers. The town becomes very upset over the situation. Two nights later, at 3AM, five men break into the SWAT squad leader’s home, they gag and tie his hands behind his back; they drag him to his front yard where they hang him from a large oak tree. They hang a sign around his neck saying “MURDERER."

Every three dawns finds another member of the SWAT squad hanging from a tree with a sign around their neck. The chief swears he’s going to catch those who killed his men. Three days later they find the chief tied to the flag pole in front of the station covered in tar and feathers with a sign around his neck saying, “liar."

@@@@@

In Orlando Florida, the TSA sets up screening booths in front of Disney World and Sea World. The searches turn sexual. Many young children are groped. Three child molesters had been hired by the TSA under the new non discrimination regulations. Many families refuse to allow the agents to scan and grope their families. Attendance at both attractions falls thirty percent. The CEOs of both companies fly to Washington DC to request the TSA be removed from their parks; both are arrested for interfering with law enforcement. TSA agents confiscate their homes, cars and bank accounts. They are sentenced to two years in jail without a trial under a little-known regulation recently signed into law by the President allowing police and Federal Government officers to arrest those who interfere with the new regulations.

Chapter 15

15,000 troops decide to take the General up on his offer and leave Fort Hood, many leave because they think the end is coming, they just want to be with their loved ones. The General understands and offers them a free return to the base with their loved ones. He promises to have suitable facilities ready for whoever returns. He tells everyone leaving he hopes they are safe, and he hopes they never have to meet on the field of battle. He tells everyone, those staying and those leaving, he hopes things don’t fall apart to the point they have to fight each other.

Dyess AFB decides they’re sitting this one out. Their 38 B1B bombers will stay on alert in case a foreign power decides to take advantage of the internal American situation.

Colonel Georges the commanding officer of Dyess Air Force base says, “General Cruise, we have not received any change in the alert status; we are still at DEFCON 4, unless the alert level is changed, my forces will stay where they are. We don’t want to fight our brothers and sisters. We may be needed to remind other countries not to mess with us. My bombers may be required to take part in a strategic mission.”

“Colonel, are your bombers armed with nukes?”

“General, we haven’t armed them yet. I hope they never have to fly against anyone with weapons of mass destruction. I wish you well. As long as you don’t attack my base we’ll get along.”

“Colonel, if I wanted to take your base, I would already be sitting in your chair. I’m going to allow you to stay where you are. If I sense you moving your bombers and making any move to fly against my troops, I will take your base in an hour. I’ll have M1 tanks sitting on your runways. Have any of your aircraft left the base?”

“General, a squadron of F15s decided to leave for the joint operating base in Fort Worth, there are six of them, and per their commander’s request we did arm and fuel them before they left. Please alert the base for us, the Fort Worth base is not currently responding to our radio calls.”

“Colonel, what are the F15s intentions?”

“Sir, I don’t know, their leader LT Colonel Franklin, call sign “Wing Nut,” said he’s not sitting on the sidelines, he asked permission to arm and fuel his planes, I gave him permission and wished him luck. They should arrive at the base in ten minutes.”

“Thank you, Colonel. Please use this frequency to communicate with us; I hope you decide to take sides, and that side is with us. Colonel, just to let you know the Texas Air National Guard is flying combat air patrol over our military bases and the major Texan cities. I’d hate to have to shoot down one of your “Bones.”

“General, they are very expensive, if you shoot at one, you may have just bought it, I hope you have a “Black series” American Express Card to pay for one or to repair any you might damage, even their parts are expensive.”

“Colonel, I’m sure the Republic of Texas has a card to cover any costs, we’ll welcome Wing Nut and his Eagles to the Republic of Texas. Colonel, good luck to you.”

“General, you too.”

5,000 feet above Joint Operating Base Fort Worth, two F16s flying CAP (combat air patrol) get a surprise when six F15s arrive at tree top height. “F16s, this is Wing Nut, commanding flight of six Eagles, we are fully armed and requesting landing permission at Fort Worth.”

“Wing Nut, welcome, we’ve been alerted to your visit; runway 01 is open, land straight in, winds light at 8 knots. Welcome aboard.”

“Wing Nut and flight of six we’re hoping, you guys got six sets of boots waiting on us.”

“Just say your sizes and they’ll be on the flight line.”

“One 10 1/2, two 9 ½, one size 13, and don’t ask if shoe size equals anything else, one size 11 and mine is a 9 1/2 extra wide. Don’t ask how I get my duck feet into the cockpit of an Eagle. We’re happy to be here.”

“Roger, when you land tune to 102.55, the tower will direct you. The base fire department is coming out to salute you.”

“Roger and out.”

Wing Nut lines up to land first, he sees five bright red fire engines on each side of the runway spraying water into the air saluting his squadron.

Six very happy pilots land at the Fort Worth base. When they deplane; there’s a row of cowboy boots with little size tags hanging on them waiting for them. Smiling the six pilots dash to their boots, one of the linemen hands each pilot a shoulder patch for from the Republic of Texas while another starts applying the flag of Texas on their airplanes.

@@@@@

Four US Marshals arrive at the Pentagon’s main entrance with an order from the President for Admiral Zander, ordering his termination as CNO there’s also an arrest warrant. Sergeant Jose Herndiaz looks at the documents; he steps into the guard booth to contact the recently returned Major Grover.

“Major, the people, you told us to keep an eye out for, are here, Sir, what are your orders?”

“Sergeant, tell them the Admiral isn’t located on site, which isn’t a lie, he’s located under it.”

“Yes sir.”

The sergeant returns to the US Marshals, “Sirs, I’ve just learned that Admiral Zander is not located in the facility.”

“Sergeant, where did he go?”

“Sir, Admirals don’t inform Marine Sergeants of their plans. I can give you his aide’s number, but there’s nothing else I can do for you at this time.”

“Sergeant, why not let us in and we’ll search the facility ourselves?”

“Sirs, there are 6,500,000 square feet in the Pentagon; the two of you will spend years searching the facility.”

“Sergeant, thank you, we’ll return with more people and a search warrant.”

“Sirs, I suggest you get a warrant from a military judge. Otherwise, it might not be honored, US Military facilities operate under the US Military justice code.”

“Sergeant, when we return with a search warrant, and more manpower, you will allow us entry, is that clear?”

“Sir, your statement is clear. However, you cannot give me orders because you’re not in my chain of command. Now I must ask you turn around and leave this facility.”

“Sergeant, we will return with enough force to search the Pentagon, the days of you people thinking your shit don’t stink are over. You’re all going to tow the new line.”

The marshals leave calling the President’s Chief of Staff on their way back to DC. “Sir, we were refused entry, we were told the Admiral wasn’t at the facility.  Sir, the guard, informed us they won’t honor a court issued search warrant.”

“RTB, (return to base) I’ll talk to the President, he’ll issue the Admiral a direct order. The President will order the Admiral to report to the White House in person, we can hand him a letter of termination and the warrant at the same time.”

“On the way.”

@@@@@

155 of the Navy’s 230 war and amphibious ships made it to sea. There are debates taking place on every ship; fights break out between those who are for and against the President. The one ship, that suffered the most damage is one of the ten nuclear-powered aircraft carriers. A running battle among the crew on the USS Nimitz causes heavy damage to the ship’s equipment. The battle rages inside the giant ship which has 3,360 compartments for three hours. The revolting crew members want the ship turned around. They oppose the fact the Captain and most of the crew refuse to sign the new loyalty oath. The battle rages compartment to compartment, with over 100 compartments damaged and set on fire. The revolting crew breaks into the small arms lockers, arming themselves with M16 automatic assault rifles. The Nimitz loses power when the revolting crew breaks into the engineering spaces, killing 50 of the engineers. They’re able to SCRAM the nuclear reactors. The Captain of the Nimitz places a call for help, the USS Wasp, which is carrying 1800 US Marines responds. Helicopters bring Marines from the Wasp to the Nimitz. The Marines board the disabled carrier, after a three-hour bloody battle the carrier is back under command of her captain. There are 473 damaged compartments on the 1,000 foot long ship; it takes three days for her to regain full military power. Admiral Zander reads the report of the battle on the ship he once commanded the fifth fleet from. He’s sick thinking about the damage to the proud ship, he decides there’s no reason for the fighting. The last thing his beloved Navy needs is a civil war inside his ships. He sends a message to every ship’s Captain; they are to allow any crew who want to leave to do so. A one-time offer, to go home, is made to the crews on every ship. Many of the captains disagree with the offer; however, they’re trained to follow orders, which they carry out. Of the 155 ships which surged, 3,400 people want to go home. The East Coast ships have 1900 of those who want to go home. Admiral Zander decides to put them on the flight deck of the USS Nimitz, who’ll take them to Miami where a stream of small boats will bring them ashore. Many are even unhappier with the news they are going to Miami and not back to Norfolk. On the west coast, three ships carry the people to the port of Long Beach, those, who were based at Pearl Harbor, are further upset to be dropped off so far from home. The two cities were chosen due to the limited military bases in each city. Admiral Zander ordered the ships returning the crew to stay at General Quarters; they are free to fire on any ship that looks like it’s going to intercept or attack the fleet bringing the crew back to the states. The ships announce to all that they will fire on any ship or boat that approaches the Navy vessels with a hostile intent.

The President hears about the returning ships; he orders the US Coast Guard to intercept the Navy ships and return them to be under the President’s control. The USCG knows none of their ships are a match for the Navy’s battle force ships. When the USS Nimitz sails to Miami, the USCG ships sail to Jacksonville, Florida. They tell the President it was just a small navigation error. They inform the President the Coast Guard had hoped to meet the Nimitz at sea; however they missed it; these things happen in naval encounters. The President having no military background doesn’t know he’s being had. He accepts the missed opportunity, telling the four star Coast Guard Admiral to do better next time. The Admiral rushes out of the White House thanking his lucky stars the man didn’t have any idea what he’d just explained was total bullshit.

@@@@@

People are fed up with the government trying to micromanage their lives. The latest new regulation, which has Middle America angry, is one issued by the Department of Education mandating that all schools close to honor Muslim holidays. Barry’s Bar and Grill in Norcross Atlanta is a favorite local bar and restaurant many locals hang out at. On Friday evening, the locals are downing beers while watching the “talking heads” on television talking about the newest regulation. Saying how good it is to honor one of the world’s oldest and most peaceful religions. Many in the bar say they are pulling their children out of the public schools. A man in a dark gray suit says looks up from his beer, saying, “You do remember that the President has signed an executive order mandating the end of home schooling don’t you? You have to either enroll your children into public or an approved private school. There are no other choices.”

“Mister, I don’t know who you are, but my kids are not going to celebrate a Muslim holiday. We’re good Catholics and believe in Jesus. My friends and I are going to protest this.”

“Madam, you might as well take your march to the White House, no one except for the President can change the regulation.”

“We’ll call our Congressman and Senators. They can vote to overturn this stupid law.”

“It wasn’t a law; it was a regulation, drafted by the Department of Education. Most of our rules are not laws, they’re regulations. Congress would have to pass a law to overturn a regulation and have it signed by the President which is never going to happen.”

A third person, a young man in his early twenties joins the discussion, “I don’t know what you’ve got against the holiday, it’s just another day off of work and school, just like Good Friday, you should just chill out. I bet you’re all closet racists, which is why you’re against the President.”

“Young man, I can tell you, I don’t have a racist bone in my body.”

“If you’re against our President and his policies you’re a racist, and I refuse to sit with racists like you people. You’re disgusting, in fact, I’m going to call and report you for hate speech. I’m going to laugh my ass off when they come and empty this entire hick town.”

As the young man gets up and reaches for his cell phone, two men jump him; they take his cell away from him while dragging him outside of the bar; they drag him screaming and yelling to the back parking lot. One says, “Wait; I’m going to see if we can find a dark corner where one of the DHS camera won’t see us.”

Two other men join the two holding the young man. The one who went to check for a dark corner returns in a couple of minutes saying, “The lights are out on the right-hand side of the building.”

The other men laugh saying, “Let’s drag this asshole over there.”

The four men drag the young man who threatened to turn them into the DHS to the right-side of the building. They beat the young man senseless, they punch him; they kick him; one pulls a knife out of his pocket; he looks the man in the eyes saying, “I’m going to cut your eyes and tongue out, you’re going to go through the rest of your life, blind, and unable to talk.”

“Wait, please, I was kidding, I won’t turn you guys in, I swear it, please don’t do this to me.”

The men laugh saying, you’re right you’re not going to tell anyone.”

One of the men says, go inside and get a hot utensil, make sure it’s red hot, we’re going to burn his fingerprints off of him. Also get an ice pick, we’ll puncture his ears so not only will he be blind, he’ll be deaf.”

The young man is begging and crying; he throws up on two of the men, which pisses them off even more. They hold him while the man with the knife inserts it in the corner of his eyes popping them out. The young man screams until he passes out. One of the men holding him opens his mouth, they grab his tongue while another cuts it off. The one who ran to the kitchen returns holding a pad of heavy oven mitts, he’s carrying a glowing metal rod. “Barry laid this in the grill he uses to cook the steaks; he said it’s hot enough. They put the iron against his fingertips burning his fingers. The last thing, they do, is push the ice pick into his ears until they bleed. They drop him to the ground. All kick him in the ribs and the balls before someone carries him to the river bank three blocks behind the bar. He’s found the next morning by three kids playing by the river.

The young man is taken to the hospital where he’s named John Doe, his gruesome image is displayed across the country. Someone calls the local paper saying, “Don’t cross ‘We the people’ or you’ll end up the same way.” The message is picked up and shown by the media as an example of the brutality of the right. Across the country people who support the President get beaten up when they threaten to turn in those who consider themselves patriots.

Chapter 16

The Speaker of the House and the Senate Whip meet for a secret breakfast four blocks from the Capital building. The Speaker lays out the case for impeachment, he tells the Senator his members are being bombarded by their people screaming for impeachment, the Senator confirms many of the Senators are also being overwhelmed with calls and emails. He tells the speaker; the Senate switchboard is overwhelmed to such an extent that no calls can come in nor can any outgoing calls be made. Both confirm the Capital internet provider has been hacked. Anonymous has completely taken over their access in and out of the Capital. The Speaker laughs saying many of the house member’s computers are locked on child porn sites; even their screen savers have been compromised. Most of their screen savers are streaming messages to the members to impeach now, or a message, “We, the People say enough, is enough.” None of the Congressional tech support can break the hold Anonymous has over their systems. They’ve bought new computers to no avail; members discovered that when they go home; their home computers and even their cable and satellite TV systems have been compromised; every channel displays the same message, “We the People say enough is enough.” The two Congressional leaders agree to make a joint announcement they will file articles of impeachment against the President the next day.

The President’s Chief of Staff knocks and enters the Oval Office, “Mr. President, bad news, the Speaker and Senate Whip have agreed to file articles of impeachment against you tomorrow. Based on a test vote, you’re going to lose.”

“Well, then we need to change the public opinion of me and put pressure on Congress to slow the process down or have them drop it completely.”

“Sir, how are you going to do this?”

“Please inform the media that at noon today I’m going to make a major announcement that concerns a new jobs program that will eliminate unemployment.”

“Sir? Sir, there’s no way you can just say a few words and have the people believe you.”

“Just inform the media, then stand back and get ready for a tidal wave of support.”

“Yes sir.”

The media and the internet are ablaze with the report of a special announcement from the President. The country comes to a complete stop during the “talking heads” debate what he might say; the media is consumed with their love for the President, they build up the announcement without knowing anything about what he’s going to say.

At noon, every station switches to the Oval Office, sitting behind the President’s desk, dressed in a dark gray suit, the President stares into the camera. “My fellow Americans, I’m sorry to interrupt your noonday breaks, or for our families on the west coast, the start of your business or school day. For far too long I’ve heard the cries of the unemployed, the poor, the hungry. I’ve heard the begging from the hungry who can’t afford to buy food; I’ve heard your prayers. I come before you today to announce this administration feels your pain; we feel your hunger. We feel your needs. Unlike the Republicans who only care about their donors or big business, I care about you; I always have. Most of my policies have been issued to save our children, the most precious resource we have. I’ve felt the pain in your broken hearts for the loss of your children. My Affordable Care Act was designed to ensure no child would go without medical treatment; my Safe Act was designed to remove guns that kill our children from the streets, my curfew was designed to make the streets safe and ensure everyone got a good night’s sleep. Today I come before you to announce a new program; today I’m announcing the “Full Employment Act.” As of Monday, five days from today, every unemployed person over the age of 18 in America will have a job. Let me repeat that, in five days, every unemployed American over the age of 18 will have a job. These new jobs will start out paying $20.00 an hour. We’re going to open DHS and HHS offices in every town, go there, register, and you will be hired as a government employee on the spot. As a government employee, you will be enrolled in the government service employee workers union plus you will be enrolled in the government benefits programs. I’m sure many of you wonder what you’ll be doing. Everything and anything that needs doing. Some will repair roads; some will paint bridges; some will repair run down cities; some will perform a new census; anyone with medical training will be put to work in the healthcare field, veterans and ex-first responders will be enrolled in the TSA or other law enforcement departments within the DHS. We’re also going to build a new non-military armed force to keep the peace. In short, everyone, who wants to work, will have a job, on the other hand since we’re going to hire everyone, welfare for those without a job will come to an end.  Disability will remain, Social Security for seniors will remain, most-other aid programs are going to end so we can afford to put everyone to work. Many of you may not like the type of work you are being assigned to, I ask you just have a little patience, everyone has to start somewhere, I think it’s more important to get everyone working and get everyone a paycheck then worry about why an ex-manager is now a painter. I promise you, over time we’ll sort these things out. So let me repeat, in five days, everyone goes to work, By this time next month, we’ll have less than 2% unemployment. America, the Democrat party feels and understands your pain and suffering. The Republicans have held control of both houses of Congress for two months, what bills have they passed? What have they done to help you? What have they done to get you back to work, or put food in your hungry stomachs? They have done nothing, only I, your President has provided for you. Remember this when Congress brings me up on impeachment charges. That’s right; Congress is going to file articles of impeachment against me tomorrow, they are going to impeach me because their big business, big corporate racist donors don’t want full employment, and they want you to suffer. In two weeks, when there’s a paycheck in your bank, when you go to bed with a full stomach, remember who did this for you. I want each of you to get ready for Monday, rest, and be ready to go to work. To assist the restaurant industry, I’m ending the national curfew effective tonight, go out, enjoy yourselves, remember to stay safe, be happy, in five days you have a job, we’ll have full employment for the first time since the second world war. I will leave you now to get back to your work or school. Good day and May God bless America.”

As the cameras turn off the President, turns to face his CoS, “Well that ought to put an end to the impeachment process. Make sure the press reminds the people who put the country back to work. Remind the country that I’m the first President to get the entire country back to work without using war as an excuse. In five days, my approval rating will be in the high 90s; Congress is now impotent. I’ll rule without them. Now go spread the message and ensure Congress gets the blame.”

The “Talking heads” are stunned into silence for a moment when the President stops speaking, no one had foreseen what he was going to say, none had the slightest idea what the President was going to say. When the words sank in, the “talking heads” went crazy, none could stop expressing their love for the President on the air.

@@@@@

The evening news program’s sound bites are;

“The President ends unemployment with the stroke of his pen.”

“FULL EMPLOYMENT!”

“The President heard our prayers and has delivered.”

“Manna from the White House.”

“In five days the President creates full employment.”

@@@@@

The country’s mood swings 180 degrees, all anyone, can talk about is the President’s message. Full employment. $20 an hour, the end of poverty. With a single speech, the President has turned the tables on the Republican Party. Store owners foresee people with money in their pockets buying their goods, they start ordering new inventory, restaurants which had been closed due to the curfew make plans to reopen, they start calling back their staff, cleaning their buildings, kitchens, and ordering food. Overnight the economy picks up. Business picks up within an hour of the President’s speech; people buy new clothes, many spend their reserve funds to celebrate going back to work. Even drug dealers see their business increase. The country’s mood is bright; it’s as if after years of cloudy weather the sky’s parted with the light and warmth of the sun shining on everyone. Cities look cleaner; people walk with their heads held a little bit higher. Everywhere anyone looked; the news is good. The revolution plans are put on hold; the country is filled with joy, who wanted to dwell on pain and bloodshed when in five days everyone will be working, for many it will be their first job in years. For some it will be their first job ever.

@@@@@

The Speaker and Senate whip meets at 3:00PM. The Speaker says, “The SOB’s pulled a large elephant out of his ass. I never thought I’d see the mood of the country shift in a couple of hours; our members now don’t want to bring the articles to the floor, they’re afraid the people back home will recall them. My members don’t know what to do now. The sly SOB has outfoxed us. He has the public support right now; he can rule without us; he has effectively made himself king. Who’s going to vote against him now?”

“All spending bills have to begin in the House; you could hold up spending for his master plan.”

“And be run out of town on a pole to be tar and feathered? I stand a better chance of starring on Broadway than I do not fund this program. He just told the nation they’re going to have a job. I can’t pass a bill to defund any of his programs now. Even his massive expansion of DHS is going fly through Congress. He’s managed in one speech to kill our party’s chances of ever winning the Oval Office.”

“Not so fast, give his new full employment program a little time, let’s see how the people like to work with their hands versus sitting in front of the TV all day not having to do anything to get their check. He ended welfare, and most other aid programs to pay for his mass employment program; Millions of people have never had a job before, many won’t like having to get their hands dirty or following orders. Plus now that he thinks he can do anything, I bet you he will show more socialistic moves very soon. He surprised us and the nation. He’s not changed; he did this to avoid impeachment, nothing more, he doesn’t care about the people’s pain and suffering; he never did. The media are already saying he’s a God, he heard the people’s prayers, and he answered them. The real God always seems to have a way of getting even with people who claim to be God. Don’t panic, give him a little rope, he’ll end up building his own gallows and hang himself. A tiger doesn’t change his stripes; he’s always been about power and control.”

“I’ll wait; we don’t seem to have anything else we can do. I’ll see you in Church Sunday morning, maybe God will hear our prayers.”

“The media says he already has.”

“It never ends well for countries and people who worship a false God, that’s what worries me.”

Chapter 17

Immediately people rush to buy everything they've wanted, large screen TVs, tablet computers and jewelry. Store’s shelves are emptied quicker than they can be restocked. Most people started spending their new income before they even reported for work. The five days leading up to full employment Monday saw shelves cleaned off, restaurants reopened and were immediately booked solid. Thousands of arrests for DUI are made; people haven’t gone out since the curfew. The local DHS and HHS offices are swamped with people standing line for hours waiting for their chance to sign up for their dream job. Most learned their dream jobs were pure manual labor.

On full employment Monday, millions of people report for work, some for the first time in their lives. Many can’t take directions; many realize they don’t like working. Projects slowed down to a slow crawl. Fights break out at hundreds of job sites, different gangs claimed projects close to their area fighting the workers who were assigned to the project. Even the best program managers can't control the chaos that spread across every government program. The government human resource software wasn’t designed to enroll millions of people at the same time, the system crashed hundreds of times, while people sat around doing nothing. Costs quickly increased off the scale. Every timeline moved far to the right.

Three months into full employment, the results aren’t what the President had expected. Many companies can’t afford to pay their workers $20 an hour. Labor unions loved the President’s plan. Their ranks swelled; many of their labor contracts are pegged to the minimum wage which had increased to $20 an hour, as did most of their member’s pay. Union dues are pegged as a percentage of gross pay; union coffers are filling with cash quicker than they thought possible. Congress used this opportunity to pass a revised farm bill that ended most farm subsidies and killed most of the SNAP program. Overnight the price of a gallon of milk increased in price from $3.55 to $7.59. The price of fresh food doubles and triples within a couple of weeks. Increased labor costs spreads through the entire economy causing rapid high inflation which increased prices in every sector. In some sectors, inflation reaches 30% in three months. Costs are increasing faster than people can recover. As costs increase companies look for new ways to cut costs, the only way left for many of them is to reduce their overhead, they start firing workers trying to hold their costs down. The fired workers demand to be rehired; however the companies can’t afford to pay the higher costs so they refuse. With the previous unemployed hired by the government, the newly unemployed can’t find a job; food stamps assistance has been terminated, welfare cut, most other aid programs designed to help the unemployed and poor were cut to pay for the President’s full employment program. The newly unemployed march in the streets demanding they be either rehired or to be given a government job. The President is caught completely by surprise with these new rounds of layoffs. He issues new executive orders that companies can’t terminate workers. Companies are faced with very few options; the President signs an executive order mandating prices be frozen, even as costs rise. Hundreds of companies are forced out of business. They just close their doors or leave them open while their owners walked away. With no management, the workers, that are in these companies, sat down on the job or went home. Those recently unemployed applied to work for the government, who had no choice but to hire them further increasing government costs. With prices held down and costs increasing, sold products aren’t replaced, shelves remain empty; even items such as toilet paper and toothpaste are hard to find. Shopping malls start to fall apart as stores close due to higher costs and the lack of inventory. Working for the government isn’t the perfect job most thought it would be. Manual labor is much harder than most expected. Taking orders isn't something most are used to. Hundreds of fights break out between workers and management.

Unions received approval to apply a special one-year dues increase so they can collect funds as quickly as possible. Dues are assessed at 20% of the new worker’s gross paycheck; medical insurance took another 30%, since everyone is working, earning at least $15/hour they earned enough so that none could receive a subsidy or tax break on their health insurance premiums. Even with their increase in pay, their buying power is now less than it had been when they didn’t work and were on welfare. If they quit, they couldn’t go back on welfare because the programs had been cut. People are depressed; they sit around not doing anything at their new jobs. Timetables stretch out, costs further increase costing the government more than four times their worst case projections. People drive by government construction projects seeing hundreds of people sitting around doing nothing earning $20 an hour.

@@@@@

The President and his CoS meet in the Oval Office, “Mr. President, we have a 100-day summary of the jobs situation; the good news is in 100 days we’ve reached the highest ratio of working people in history outside of the Second World War. The bad news is due to the price controls; many companies have empty shelves, with taxes, union dues and medical insurance premiums, plus the inflated higher prices many of our people now have a lower disposable income than before they went to work. This isn’t turning out the way we thought it would. More people are unhappy than are happy. People are saying they have almost nothing to take home after paying for food, insurances, taxes and fuel; they have nothing left over to pay the minimum charges on their government bank issued credit cards. Mr. President, the newly unemployed are stuck in the middle; many are demanding government jobs. Sir, the new workers, aren’t working. Most sit around all day doing nothing; many have complained they can’t watch TV while working. Many have never done any work before; they are weak, easily tired and complain all the time about everything. Sir, the program managers, are saying if costs don’t start to decline very quickly then every program is going to come in way over the worst case estimates. All of the agencies say, given their budgets weren’t funded for minimum labor costs of $20/hour labor, they either have to cut labor or programs, there’s not enough money left for both.

“Just give them more money. Why do I have to do all of the thinking around here?”

“Sir, funding happens at the House, sir, you can’t just print money or issue new budgets.”

“I can’t print money, but the Fed can. Get me the Fed Chairman.”

“The Federal Reserve Chairman is on line one sir.”

“Lisa, I’ve got this little problem; my agencies are running out of money, I know the House isn’t going to increase the spending levels, can you arrange to print more funds and deposit them into the agencies accounts?”

“Mr. President, I can’t and won’t, your new minimum wage and Full Employment Act have driven inflation out of control. Sir we’re on the verge of a tipping point into hyperinflation, once that happens it’s going to be very difficult to stop it. We’ll default on our interest payments; the dollar will cease being the world’s currency, sir we’re in boiling water. We have to take steps to reduce spending so we can make the required interest payments.”

“Lisa, you’re such a worry-wort, just add $35 billion to each agency account.”

“Mr. President, I can’t and won’t do it.”

“Lisa, I’m sorry but you leave me no choice. I hereby terminate your contract with the Federal Reserve. You have an hour to clean out your office and leave the building.”

“Mr. President, I have a four-year term with three years left; I’m not leaving, and you can’t fire me.”

“Lisa, we’ll see about that, I’ll have DHS agents there shortly to remove you.”

@@@@@

Violent crime numbers increase 200% in the first month after the gun buy back program ends. Criminals didn’t turn in their guns; they knew most people had turned in their firearms, so the criminals have nothing to fear from store owners and homeowners. That is until two teenagers try to rob a liquor store in Naperville Illinois.  The teenagers get the shock of their short lives when the store owner reaches under the counter and shoots one of them through his right eye with a small crossbow. The store owner reloads the crossbow, hitting the other teenager in the back as he runs down the street trying to get away from the store owner.

The Chicago media travels to Naperville to interview the store owner, “Mr. Lewis, can you tell our audience what happened here?”

“These two punks entered wanting money; they’ve robbed me twice before, this time I decided I’d be ready for them. I bought this small crossbow at Cabelas; it doesn’t shoot very far, but close in, it sure does its job. I’m telling you, I’m going to buy some more of them, if I can’t have a gun to defend myself, I’ll keep loaded crossbows at the ready.”

“Mr. Lewis don’t you think these two young boys …”

“Listen, Ms. reporter, they weren’t no young boys; they were young men, in their twenties, they’ve robbed me twice before. Both times the police said there’s nothing they can do.”

“Mr. Lewis, maybe these poor boys came from a broken home, maybe all they were looking for was a shoulder to lean on and you killed them in cold blood.”

“They came into my store with handguns; I had to turn mine in, what’s the police doing about taking their guns off the streets?”

“Mr. Lewis as I’m sure you know, their guns weren’t registered, so there’s no way to track them.”

“That’s why you should have let us keep our guns.”

“Mr. Lewis, if you’d had a gun, you may have killed someone on the street if you missed the would-be robbers.”

“I don’t miss what I aim at. They came here to do me harm and rob me, and all you can say, is they’re “would be” robbers?”

“Well, there hasn't been a trial yet, so how do we know they were guilty? Has the court spoken? Without the court, saying one way or the other, you’re a murderer and I for one am going to be happy seeing you go to jail.”

“I think it’s time for you to leave my store.”

“Mr. Lewis, no problem, we have all we need, come on crew, we’re leaving.”

Within 36 hours, there’s a run on crossbows and hunting knives. The Governor of Illinois goes on national TV to say he’s going to ask the state AG to press charges against Mr. Lewis for murder two; he killed those two poor misguided children in cold blood.

At breakfast, the next morning, twenty members of the Chicago and Naperville SWAT squads break into Mr. Lewis’ home, arresting him for murder while tearing apart his home looking for any outlawed weapons. Much of his furniture is destroyed. Lacking the funds to pay his lawyer, the state appoints one, who starts the discussion with his client by saying he’s disgusted with the actions of his client. Mr. Lewis decides he’s going to represent himself. He files papers to have his case dropped since he fired a legal weapon in self-defense.

@@@@@

General Brownstone is in the bunker under the Greenbrier Hotel when his aide Colonel Redhorse knocks, “General, have you watched the latest news? It appears the economic inflation is verged on the tipping point of falling over the cliff becoming hyperinflation. The Federal Agencies are running out of money; the President tried to get the Federal Reserve to put billions of money in the agencies accounts. The Fed Chairperson refused; she turned him down. He tried to fire her; she told him she had three more years to go on her contract.”

“That’s a good one, the Fed refusing to print money,”

“Sir, people are very unhappy; Congress is still stalled, and many want to know if you’ll lead a protest march on DC in three weeks?”

“What are we protesting this time?”

“The President’s policies of course. Many are unhappier today than they were three months ago. Inflation is tearing every family budget apart; even with the price controls, prices are rising every day because people have to shop for household items on the black market or on ebay where there aren’t any price controls. A four-roll package of toilet paper is going for $25.00 on ebay. Even with wages starting at $20/hour inflation, union dues and insurance costs, most people have less disposable income than they did when they lived on welfare.”

“What’s the update from Admiral Zander?”

“He’s still hiding under the Pentagon; US Marshals have made fourteen attempts to search the Pentagon, so far they haven’t found anything, plus they’ve upset everyone working at the Puzzle Palace. He’s still commanding the Navy. They’ve stopped eight foreign submarines trying to reach our ports. They’ve also intercepted an Iranian fleet of five ships; the Iranians were foolish enough to go against the USS Bush battle group, it was a very short battle. Nothing the Iranians launched got within four miles of the Bush’s group. The Iranians then stumbled into a live fire exercise of precision weapons that mysteriously hit them. It must have been a horrible accident. I’m sure it was a tragic mistake, not one Iranian ship survived. I’m sure the Iranian government will understand their ships just wandered into the middle of one of our live fires. We understand the President is livid with the sinking of the Iranian ships.”

“Good, I like it when he’s livid; it usually pushes him over the edge. He doesn’t control his temper very well.”

“General, what’s next?”

“We need the people to get upset and worked up, so they support our efforts. Research says they're almost at that point, just a little more pushing from the Feds, and many are going to blow. They’ll support anyone who’ll push back against the President. Many want their old lives back.”

“Colonel, we’re not going to push back against the President, we’re going to crush him and his socialist administration. We’re going to give the people back their freedoms. Freedoms they’ve so easily sold for thirty pieces of silver.”

“General, how do we know they’ll support us when it turns bloody?”

“Look at how quickly they gave up their freedoms in exchange for a pocket of coins that ended up putting them a worse situation than they were before. I’m hoping a few have learned a lesson. We’ll never win everyone over; all we need, is a few. Even a few will give us the support we’re going to need. The administration always jumps to give the people “bread and circuses” vs. what they really need. In the 1960s, the government launched the war on poverty; they should have provided jobs, and instead they provided a safety net which evolved into a blanket which wrapped itself around the poor, providing them with some degree of security in exchange for their pride and self-worth. The government’s programs provided incentives that destroyed the core of our society. The anti-poverty program encouraged people to have kids outside of marriage; the programs provided incentives not to marry, not to complete school and not to work. After fifty years, we learned that the key to getting out of poverty is to get married before having kids, finish high school and get a job, everything we discouraged for fifty years. During the same fifty years, we dumbed down our education system; people became dependent on sound-bites for their news. People lost their patience to learn the details; they based everything on 10-30 second sound bites. The media edited the sound bites to push their agenda. In order to break the existing model, we’re going to have to undo fifty years of policies and brainwashing. Even if we win and can either force the administration to change their direction or we replace the administration, there’s going to be a lot of pain for years to come. We can’t fool ourselves into thinking we’ve won if we get the administration to change their programs. Most of the people have no idea how to make a real educated decision. They’re too used to having most of their decisions made for them. Don’t kid yourself; the war to save America is going to be more painful for the average American after the government change then the war to change the government is going to be,”

“Intermission—A short overview on what's going on in the rest of the world”

Countries around the world watched the events taking place in the United States with horror. If these things could happen in America, what’s going to happen in their country? Another fear most countries shared is what impact the American internal crisis will have on the American dollar which is the world’s currency. Many countries may dislike or even hate America; many see Americans as “the ugly American” however the ugly American becomes very pretty when they have a handful of dollars. Many countries use the American dollar as their currency.

China holds more than $5 trillion of America’s $18 trillion debt is very nervous; America is also China’s largest trading partner. With the USA internally focused, the Premier and Defense Minister think this is the perfect time to bring Taiwan back into the family. The American Navy has withdrawn the seventh fleet from the western Pacific to the mid-Pacific. The seventh fleet has 60 ships, 300 aircraft, and 40,000 personnel. The Defense Minister and the Premier meet over a fresh pot of tea,

“Premier Tao, this is our time, the Americans are totally focused inside their borders, they have recalled their seventh fleet. Japan and South Korea are focused on the financial markets. If we strike quickly, Taiwan will be ours before anyone will be able to respond. By the time the Americans can turn their carrier battle group around, we’ll be drinking tea in the Taiwan Parliament building. Once we’re in control of Taiwan, Japan and America will have no choice but to acknowledge Taiwan was always ours. Japan won’t fight us without America, and America can’t get here in time. Sir, we may not get such a gift handed to us again. I can have our forces ready in five days.”

“Minister, how will the attack go?”

“Premier, we will launch thousands of short and medium range missiles to take out Taiwan’s air defense sites, communications hubs, defense locations, army and navy bases. We’ll use air bursts over their runways so we can use them to land troops and supplies. We’ll be able to overwhelm their defenses easily. As soon as the ballistic missiles land our air force will fire air-launched missiles. We’ll fire standoff missiles from 1,000 airplanes just out of their radar’s range. In total, we’ll hit the Taiwan military, communications, and infrastructure locations with over 5,000 missiles. Within ten minutes of the last warhead, exploding our paratroopers will be landing on their three major airports, once we control the airports, we’ll open an air bridge to fly in troops and heavy equipment. From the start to finish, operations should be over within 72 hours; we will crush them.”

“Minister, you have my permission for the attack.”

“Premier Tao, in five days, at 0200 hours.”

“Go prepare, don’t allow the plans to slip into the American’s hands.”

@@@@@

Iran watches the events taking place in America with joy; the ruling council agrees the time is right to attack the little Satan. The Great Satan, America has recalled their ships from the Persian Gulf; Iran will be able to block all of the oil transported through the Gulf and attack Israel without the Americans being close enough to provide Israel any help. The ruling council agrees to the date of their victory; the date they will launch an attack and wipe Israel off the map. When the attack is finished there won’t be any Jews left in the Middle East. The Iran military commander is told the following; “Commander Hassin, five days from today, you have our permission to launch your attack against Israel. We expect you to launch an overwhelming initial attack using over 1,500 long-range missiles. Strike them hard. You have Allah’s blessing to use six of our special weapons. Use them well. We only have ten of the weapons available. We want to hold a few back in case a follow-up attack is required. If the Great Satan sends any of their cursed aircraft carriers towards the Gulf, you have permission to use one, and only one of the special weapons to totally destroy one of their cursed ships. We’ll teach them to bend to Allah’s will. Go and prepare your troops, in five days Allah will smile on us for doing his will.”

@@@@@

The black run South African government is intent on taking their revenge on the remaining white population. The government decides with America occupied over internal issues; they have no one to fear, they plan to attack the remaining white population in five days. They plan to absorb all of the white-owned property and assets after wiping out the remaining whites still in South Africa.

@@@@@

The Pakistani Prime Minister calls his cabinet together to vote on the date they will strike India, their long time enemy. The Prime Minister tells his cabinet that China is supporting them; the Prime Minister has been assured of support from the Commander of the Eastern China military zone, a promise that wasn’t shared with Beijing. The commanding general told the Pakistani Prime Minister he’ll support the Pakistani attack on India, however he plans to sit back and watch both countries pound each other so that he can move his one million troops and armor in, thus taking control of both countries without major causalities. The general thinks if he can deliver both India and Pakistan to Beijing he’ll be promoted to Defense Minister. He tells the Pakistanis to attack in five days. Which is the same day China plans on attacking Taiwan. Even if America wanted to respond, they lack the resources to have forces in both locations at the same time. In one bold sweep, China will increase in size, and resources. The Pakistani military quietly prepares for a nuclear first strike on India.

@@@@@

Watching the Americans getting ready to consume themselves; the Quebec Premier decides the time is right to secede from Canada. The Premier tells his staff to prepare for a national announcement in five days at 8AM. He plans to catch everyone by surprise just before the market opens. He orders his staff to start shorting the Canadian stock market. He assumes the market will crash when he makes his announcement, if he’s correct; Quebec will have earned sufficient currency to enable them to reduce taxes and pay for any of the conversion costs when they split off from Canada.

@@@@@

The Swiss Parliament meets to discuss stopping all immigration, with the exception of those with special skills. Switzerland has escaped most of the worldwide recession; to ensure their economy grows they need to lower the amount of benefits the government pays out. One way to ensure the amounts decrease is to close the country’s borders and remove as many illegal’s as possible. The Parliament agrees to close the borders and start deportations in five days.

@@@@@

Monday June 9 dawns as a day none will forget. In America, people remember where they were when JFK was shot, or where they were when the towers in NYC were struck. Today millions will remember where they were when they heard that the world went crazy, thousands of missiles fall on Taiwan, Israel, and India. Those falling on Taiwan are all conventional, Israel and India are not so fortunate. Tel Aviv is hit with four nuclear warheads, each in the 20KT range. The Israeli anti-missile systems brought down hundreds of missiles; however, Israel is almost out of interceptor missiles. When the four nuclear missiles explode over Tel Aviv, Israel counterattacks, not just at Iran, but also Egypt, Syria, Iraq, and Iran. Israeli long-range missiles and aircraft attack their enemies in the Middle East with 100 nuclear weapons. When the dust settles hundreds of millions are dead or wishing, they were. Israel lost one city the remainder of the Middle East will never recover.

Arabs all over Europe riot in protest of the Israeli attack. Paris and London are burning out of control. The riots are put down in Germany by use of force; tens of thousands are killed as they attempt to force their way into Berlin. England and France watch their major cities torn apart and set on fire.

Taiwan wakes to thousands of missiles falling all over the island. Telephone and power are cut over the island. The airports are captured by paratroopers. The small but capable Taiwanese Navy and Air Force are destroyed before they can take revenge. When most citizens would normally be getting up for work, Taiwan is all but under China’s control. The attack went off better than any of the senior Chinese officers expected. The Chinese Eastern defense zone moves tens of thousands of troops to China’s border with India; the general does this to keep India focused on the border and not focus on the upcoming Pakistani attack.

India wakes to the flash of lights brighter than the sun and blast waves signaling the end of Delhi and Mumbai. Millions flash out of existence. The Indian military responds by sending 200 nuclear warheads into Pakistan, destroying every city in the country. The two conventional forces clash at their long border. The two armies fight hand to hand when they use up their stored ammo and fuel.

China being focused on her east and western borders misses the clues that her people want more freedom. The message spreads over social media networks and text messages that this is a good time for the Chinese people to push for more freedom. Over a hundred thousand jam Tiananmen Square demanding more freedom. This time there won’t be one man standing in front of a tank, there’s a hundred thousand standing in the square. The people of Beijing are fed up with air they can’t breathe, forced to work as slaves in factories without hope, building products most could never afford to buy. Many are still fighting the one child rule. When the government announced, a loosening of the one child rule, the only ones who could apply for a second child are the elite. China is facing a war to dominate Taiwan and also an internal freedom revolution.

On Monday morning, the international stock markets open to a major crash; each falls more than 10% before built in triggers slow trading so that there isn’t a 1929 type crash. At 8AM, the Quebec Prime Minister announces Quebec is leaving Canada. This sends the market to new lows. Quebec having shorted hundreds of millions of shares is now earning billions. By 9AM, the markets are down 20% and still falling. Most markets close early to limit the panic selling. The New York Stock Exchange closes at 1:30PM after the Dow Jones has fallen 935 points, making Monday the new Black Friday.

North Korea sees the rest of the world going insane thinking this is the perfect time for them to complete their goal of a single Korea; they launch a massive surprise attack on the South. Ten Armor battalions, which had been stored in tunnels under the DMZ, arrive behind the Korean and American armies. The North attacks the South’s troops at the DMZ from their unprotected rear areas wiping out most of the troops. Over two hundred thousand North Korean troops flood over the border. A small 10KT nuclear weapon explodes over Seoul killing tens of millions.

The world, without the American military “police force” wakes to the death of hundreds of millions. Upon hearing the reports of the various wars from his military advisor, the President says, “I said I would side with the Muslims if it comes to having to take sides, as such, don’t do anything to assist Israel or India, they got what they asked for. Tell the North Koreans we expect them to return to their border, or we’ll have to take action.”

“Sir, what are your orders, re South Africa?”

“Nothing, it doesn’t concern us. If they want to kill each other, that’s their decision.”

“Sir, what about Quebec?”

“Nothing, it’s a Canadian internal issue, there’s nothing and no reason for us to say or do anything. If Quebec seems to be gaining the upper hand, then I’ll make an announcement supporting them.”

The President tells his military aide, “I’m finished with the daily brief, I can’t be bothered with other countries internal affairs that don’t pose any threat to America.”

“Sir, this is very serious, nuclear weapons are being used.”

“Major, none is being used here; all I see are people working out their differences. I’m sure in a couple of days the world will settle down. Vickie Jarrets told me there’s nothing to worry about.”

“Sir we have treaties with many of these countries.”

“Major, we can’t get to them in time to make a difference. Plus I’m going to need all of the military power I have available in case these crazy bible thumping, gun loving nuts in the middle southern sections of our country decide to do something stupid. All I’m trying to do, is bring some degree of equality to the country; you’d think the people would love me and worship me for it.”

“Sir, if I may, people don’t want to be equal, they want to be able to have an equal opportunity, which is different from all being equal.”

“Major, how long have you been my military aide?”

“Sir, four months.”

“Long enough, you’re fired.”

Chapter 18

The Secretary of Homeland Security stands to address the President’s monthly cabinet meeting, “Ladies and Gentlemen, we’ve had numerous reports of people shooting at DHS staff with muzzle loading rifles and shotguns. We’ve had over 50 vehicles shot by people hiding in the woods trying to hit my people. This is clearly an unacceptable practice. They hide until our agents are on a mission. Then they attack our offices and vehicles with Molotov Cocktails. In the previous three days, we’ve lost over 50 vehicles. We’ve had more than a dozen agents hit; the damn balls the black powder guns fire tear a man’s arm off. They’re using civil war rifles to shoot our people. Some of these crazies are even riding horses. They shoot at us and take off into the woods. We’re getting hit pretty hard. The attacks are growing every day. We are doing everything within our power to catch these people and bring them to justice.”

The AG asks, “Mr. Secretary, who do you think, is behind these unprovoked attacks on our loyal federal staff?”

“AG, we believe the Tea Party and their partners in crime, the various militias are behind the attacks.”

“Mr. President, as the Attorney General, I propose that we, you classify the Tea Party and the militias as domestic terrorists. This will enable us to use armed drones over American soil and remotely take out these racist treasonous bastards. We can’t allow a small group of extreme right-wing people take pot shots at our people. Sir, I also suggest we expand the gun exclusion to ALL guns, muzzleloaders, shotguns, anything that uses any form of gunpowder to shoot projectiles.”

The President thinks over what he’s just heard, he looks up at his AG replying, “Yes prepare the document, I’ll sign an executive finding, stating that the Tea Party and militias pose a clear and present danger to the American people. I’ll approve the use of armed drones. I want each target identified by at least one senior member of the government. That is unless anyone has any other comments?”

The Secretary of the Treasury stands, “Mr. President, frankly I don’t know why we’ve waited so long. These groups have been causing this administration problems since 2009. I don’t understand why some people consider the Tea Party a regular political party. Everyone knows they’re nothing but a gang of radicals who need to be stopped ASAP. As such, I applaud the use of armed drones. None of our brave first responders or DHS agents will be harmed trying to arrest these racist murders. Many of them hide in the woods to trap our agents. What concerns me the most is they could hit an innocent child walking home from school if they miss their target. Mr. President I plead with you to take the case to the people. The people of America are solidly behind you. Everyone knows that if Wolf News were off the internet no one would oppose you.”

The Secretary of the Interior stands, “Mr. Director of Federal Communications, the Secretary of the Treasury has posed a very interesting question, why can’t you kick Wolf off of the internet?”

The Secretary of the Federal Communications Commission stands, “Ladies and Gentlemen, it’s not easy to remove a company off of the internet. We didn’t renew their broadcast license; we arrested their Chairman for promoting hate speech. However, they are using an offshore server. We need international cooperation in pulling them off the web.”

The President says, “I don’t understand, just send the FBI to wherever the servers are and cut their cables. I want these people silenced. AG, can I name Wolf as a domestic terrorist?”

“Mr. President, they’re no longer domestic, they are operating out of countries that lack treaties with us. There’s nothing we can do,”

“Yes, there is, maybe their server farm could have an accident, something like a 2,000 pound bomb falling off of one of our bombers, accidents do happen.”

The cabinet laughs and nods their heads. The Secretary of Defense replies, “I’ll handle a tasking order for one of our B1 bombers.”

The President says, “Good, I want Wolf, and the Tea Party gone ASAP. How can we launch our new agenda if they are protesting everything we do? They’re harming the country.”

@@@@@

“Hi Ron, Brian and I are enjoying the end of the curfew by seeing if we can empty our local bar of beers. None of us has to drive; the bar is walking distance from our homes. Frankly it feels good to legally be out in the evening having a good time with good friends. My cell rings with the ring tone, “This girl’s on fire," Ron laughs saying, “Boss is on the line, better get it.”

“Hi honey, how was work today?”

“Where are you? Your car is here.”

“Owen’s bar and grill, why?”

“You better get here ASAP; our house is being torn apart. They won’t let me enter our house.”

Hanging up, I look at my friends, “Trouble, someone, must be the damn DHS is tearing my home apart, they won’t even let Kathy into the house, want to come with?”

The four of us pay our tab and start jogging to my house. We see the flashing red and blue lights lighting up the sky. We’re stopped two houses before we reach mine. A DHS agent stops us, “Stop; you can’t go any closer to that house.”

“Why not? I live there, where’s my wife?”

“Do you have a photo ID?”

“Here it is, look, what’s going on?”

“We have information that you are hiding firearms, we have a valid search warrant to search your home, in fact until our search is completed, I’m taking you into custody to ensure you don’t go anywhere. You can wait in the van with your wife.”

I’m handcuffed and shoved into the back of a black van where my wife is sitting also handcuffed. “Honey are you OK?”

Kathy has tears in her eyes, “Yes, what’s going on, these people just grabbed me and threw me in here.”

“The agent said someone said we had firearms in the house,”

“Do we?”

“Of course not, I sold them back to the government and put the money in the bank.”

Kathy looks at me with a knowing grin; I’m sure you did. So why are we sitting in this van?”

“I don’t know.”

We hear voices outside the van, “Let them go, their clean, we didn’t find anything.”

Our cuffs are removed; we’re told we can enter our house, entering the front door, Kathy screams and starts crying, our house is torn apart. Even the walls have been ripped open, our furniture cushions have been cut open, everything in our kitchen is on the floor, our bedroom is trashed; every room looks like a tornado went through it. Ron knocks and enters; he’s shaking his head, “Man they trashed this place, I’m so sorry. Before you pick anything up, take pictures with one of your phones that date and time stamps the picture. Go room to room, take pictures from different points of view, I’ll help you. Then call your insurance agent.”

I look at Ron, “Buddy, I’m going to sue those assholes that just destroyed thousands of dollars of our stuff.”

I jog outside to catch one of the agents, “Hey, you guys trashed our house!”

“Ah, there you are, here’s a card which says, we carried out a legal search, we did so based on the President’s SAFE Act, we’re not responsible for any damage, you can’t sue us, you can’t hold us liable for anything. In fact, there’s nothing you can do; your insurance won’t pay a penny of damages because the SAFE Act ensures insurance companies don’t reimburse the guilty.”

“Man, I’m innocent, you didn’t find anything.”

“Yup, but read the President’s executive order, there’s nothing you can do, frankly, you’re up a crap stream without a paddle. If I were you, I’d hang out with a better class of people. Ex-cops aren’t good people to pal around with. If you continue to pal around with an ex-cop, we may have to pay you another visit, next time, maybe in the middle of the night if so, we might have to give your wife a very special search and pat down. Now go home and behave yourself. Learn to follow the rules, and you’ll live a long life, remember you’re nothing but a very small cog in a very big wheel.”

“What about all of the damage you caused?”

“Prove it asshole.”

Kathy is sitting on the floor of our bedroom crying, even our wedding pictures have been ripped apart, the frames broken, nothing, except for the washing machine was left untouched, the lids of the washer and dryer are open, but the metal cases weren’t touched. I’m not going to tell Kathy yet what’s hidden inside of them. I’ve decided when she’s at work I’m going to open the washer and reassemble the AR and shotgun, I’m going to get my revenge for my house being trashed one way or another. I might have been a lot of talk before, but tonight they made me a soldier, a soldier in the army for freedom. Ron looks at me shaking his head up and down; he points outside. I bend down to tell Kath, “Honey I’ll be right back, Ron wants to tell me something.”

“Buddy, I know what you’re thinking; before you make your mind up 100% think of what’s at risk. If you go through with what I know you’re thinking, think about Kathy.”

“Ron, I did. If we don’t come together and find a way to stop this, we’re no better then slaves. I’m not a slave. Here me? I’m NOT A SLAVE!”

Before Ron can answer, we see a bright flash in the sky, a loud explosion that knocks us off our feet. Looking up, we see a drone flying away. Flames are licking at the sky. Ron looks through the trees, “MY HOUSE!”

I follow Ron to his house that has collapsed upon itself, it’s burning out of control. Ron looks angrier than I am. We look at each other and nod yes. “Ron, stay in our spare room, come home with me.”

“Thank you, I think tomorrow is going to be a new day; we’re going to fight the tyranny of our own government.”

Chapter 19

Sitting in the woods, just outside of Virginia Beach, Virginia, two ex-Marines, dressed in reproduction American Revolutionary War army uniforms are waiting. They’re waiting for an armed Predator drone to arrive, they know its course, and they know it’s going to be flying slowly over a small cul-de-sac. One man taps the other on his left shoulder, pointing up. The second man scans the sky with the thermal scope built into the STINGER shoulder-fired anti-air missile. He hears a tone in his ear telling him the missile seeker has locked onto the drone. He glances at his partner who nods yes. The man steadies himself, holds the launch tube at a 45-degree angle, he holds his breath as he pulls the trigger; the STINGER missile is pushed out of the launcher tube, 50 feet in front of the Marines the missile engine ignites sending the missile towards the drone.

In a shielded room inside the NSA building at Fort Mead Maryland, two pilots, jump in their seats when their missile launch detection alert sounds. They never expected to see this alarm when flying missions in America. They steer the Predator drone around; they see the two men hiding in the woods, when they zoom in on their uniforms the Predator operators sit up in surprise they pause giving the Stinger enough time to blow the Predator out of the sky.

The two men who launched the STINGER nod, the take apart the STINGER and disappear into the night.

Another Predator is blown out of the sky when it tries to cross the border with Texas, F15s flying combat air patrol pick up the drone on their radar. After confirming there’s no friendly aircraft in their area, an F15 pilot fires an AIM 9X infrared advanced anti-air missile. The drone is blown out of the sky. Three more Predators are destroyed in Southern California by men firing shoulder held anti-air missiles.

In North Carolina an armed drone is searching for its target, a townhouse two blocks from a local shopping mall, their target lives in the townhouse, the pilots sitting in the NSA are waiting for him to arrive home. The target usually arrives home between 6 and 6:25PM on Thursdays, his every move has been tracked; his every call has been recorded. Every web search, their target has performed, has been recorded, tonight the drone flies lazy figure eights over the townhouse’s neighborhood. The pilot and weapons officer sit at their terminals sipping hot coffee, “its 6:45, where is he tonight? I thought he was a creature of habit?”

“His records don’t show any deviation from his normal schedule.”

“So where is he?”

“Damn if I know, expand the search, send the bird into a larger circle, maybe he’d got a new girlfriend.”

“It’s a shame he lost the last one. I hear someone hacked his phone and sent his girlfriend some really nasty pictures that showed they came from his phone. Same thing happened at his job that he lost within minutes of a certain text message arriving at his manager’s phone. Someone has it in for this asshole.”

Both laugh at the poor man’s problems that were caused by the NSA in order to force him out into the open more often. They didn’t want to risk hitting the building with a Hellfire since there are children living in the two units next to their target.

The pilot says, “Hey, look there, thermals picked up something, three guys in the woods, wonder if one is our target, I’m going to move the bird a little closer so I can get a good look. If it’s him can you take him out while he’s under those trees?”

“If you move the bird so I can get a clear shot from the left, I can take out all three of them.”

“Whoa, what’s that? Flashes of light from the target, damn it they're shooting at us, bird has been hit. Bird has been hit. Losing pressure, they must have hit a line, losing rudder control, losing power, we’re going to crash, damn it that’s the fifth one this week, pretty soon they’re going to dock my pay for the lost birds.”

@@@@@

The Director of the NSA reviews the recent reports; he calls his senior staff together. “People, we’ve had five Predators shot down this week. Three with MANPADs and one by three people firing muzzle loading rifles at the bird, they must have gotten a lucky shot. We are not using the data available to us. I want each group to search the records of the Tea Party and militia leaders. We have their metadata; we know where they’ve been and who they are. People, these are enemies of the state; they are using violence against us. Once you have them tracked, send the special teams to collect them. I want this part of the plan over within the next two weeks. The President is planning a major announcement in three weeks; I want a week buffer so we have time to deal with any opposition leaders we missed.”

Unknown to the senior management of the NSA, one of the staff doesn’t agree with the President’s plans. He leaks the NSA’s plans to a friend of his. The informer goes to lunch; he stops to get his hair cut, while paying, he’s marked a message on the bills he hands the barber. The barber takes the bills and buys a cup of coffee at a local Starbucks. The cashier puts the bill under the cash drawer. When the shifts change the manager lifts the cash drawer out, he picks up the coded bills. Taking them to his office, he decodes the message. That evening he places a collect call to a friend for himself, since he’s not there; the other party doesn’t accept the charges. This signals the other party to attend a face to face meeting in a local bar. The two men share a pitcher of beer. The Starbucks manager hands the other party a business card with a code written on it; it’s a verse from the Bible. The man takes the card home where he decodes it. He smiles thinking he has the perfect plan for the NSA.

The next day dawns bright and warm; the NSA is alive early because eight of the people on their top ten Tea Party leader hit list have broken cover; they are all making a run for it, and they’re trying to hide in local woodlands. Eight armed drones are sent to take out these enemies of the state. The drones fire Hellfire missiles into the woods targeted on the cell phones that are moving in the woods. All eight missiles hit their targets. One day someone will wander into the woods and wonder why rabbits had cell phones taped to them and were blown up. Until that day comes, the NSA leadership celebrates being able to remove eight of their top ten targets in one op. Over the next three days, five additional targets appear on their tracking screens. Within two hours, all are destroyed When PETA finds out what’s happened, they’re going to file a major lawsuit against the NSA for killing rabbits and cats with Hellfire missiles.

@@@@@

Under the Greenbrier Inn in West Virginia, the top fifty Tea Party leaders and 120 militia leaders assemble for a meeting that’s going to change the future of the United States of America.

General Brownstone stands welcoming everyone, “Good morning, thank you all for making your way here. I know that many of you have taken a very curious path to get here. I would also like to welcome the ten people sitting in the front row, Ladies and Gentlemen, may I present the first Zombies, real walking dead of the second American Revolution. A friend got us word the NSA was going to target these people, once we learned of their plan; we developed a counterplan that led the NSA to believe they got our friends. I propose we start our discussions with a moment of silence for the rabbits that gave up their lives so that we may meet here. When someone said the rabbit died, today they really meant it, the rabbits died so that a new nation can be born. The room exploded in laughter, which broke the tension.

@@@@@

The Director of the NSA asks his staff, “Where are they getting these weapons? STINGERs? Clearly a military weapon system. Who’s helping them?”

“Mr. Director, we’ve been monitoring calls that seem to say that the militias are being armed by the National Guard.”

“Why would the Guard do that?”

“Sir, because the guard’s local, they’re most likely friends and neighbors with the militias.”

“We should have suggested to the President that he send each state’s National Guard to another state to avoid this issue. We’re seeing history repeat itself. We have neighbors standing across the lines in the same areas staring at each other eyeball to eyeball. We have to defuse this situation quickly. I’m betting the local guardsmen are selling or just handing modern weapons to the militias. They’re both from the same area; most likely they know each other. Most likely they have beers together.”

“Sir, isn’t there a law that the Guard can’t do this?”

“Get out, you’re an idiot. Of course, there’s a law, but where else are these Tea Baggers getting the weapons.”

“Sir, I think a more important question is, how do they know where our drones are? Someone inside must be tipping them off.”

“You’re correct. Pause the program. Search every analysis’s locker, phone, and computer; someone’s getting the information out. I want to know who it is. I want to watch their face when they’re burned alive.”

@@@@@

The Canadian Parliament has decided to allow Quebec to leave; the only way, to stop it, would be by using the army. The Canadian Parliament informs the Quebec Prime Minister that any Quebecois will require a visa to enter or leave Canada. All trade with Quebec will be stopped pending government review. All government benefits to people living in Quebec will cease. The Prime Minster laughs, accepting the Parliament’s conditions. Very few people know that Quebec shorted the stock markets; the new country has a national treasury exceeding five hundred billion dollars. The Quebec Prime Minister laughs at the Canadian Parliament telling them, “We are OK with this; we expected this to be your reaction. We have started to print our own currency; we’ve heard that soon the western provinces will leave and join the US. Canada will be left with only one or two of the Northeast provinces. We have all of the money we’re going to need.”

“Have you been printing money for long?”

“Let’s just say, we’ve been waiting for this day for a very long time. We’ve prepared in secret. We’re ready.”

“The Leader of Parliament tells the Prime Minster, “Sir, we wish you well, we wish you a good day. To be very frank and honest with you, Canada won’t miss you. “

“Please tell your citizens we welcome them to come visit, spend their vacations and dollars with us, however our official language as of tomorrow is French. All English signs are being removed as we speak.”

@@@@@

“Brad listen to me, please calm down and listen. Kath, make him listen.”

“Ron, what are you trying to tell us?”

“Brad, you’re not a warrior, if you take your AR and try to battle the DHS agents, you’ll come home in a box. Please don’t do it this way.”

“If not this way, then how?”

“Join a group, one that can train you to be a warrior, not Sunday warriors, but real warriors. There’s a lot of Marines around. They can train us. I’ll join you. You may know how to shoot, but shooting is a very small part of being a warrior. Brad, you don’t even take orders well, you’ll end up getting yourself and others killed if you’re not careful. Come with me. I know where we can find a group that will train us and equip us so we’ll know how to fight for freedom and be around afterward to enjoy it. Do you want Kathy to have to bury you?”

”Ron, I’m not going to be a water boy. I want to fight. I want to see them bleed for what they’ve done to us.”

“Brad, you can’t go to war filled with rage. You’ll get yourself killed in the first day, Remember what Patton said," “The object of war is not to die for your country but to make the other guy die for his.”

“Ron, that takes time. They tore our home apart; they destroyed yours, and they’re enslaving us. It’s not right. We have to fight back.”

“Brad, yes we will fight back, but we can’t rush into it. If you go against them tonight, you’ll be home before dawn in a body bag,

Chapter 20

Ten DHS vehicles are traveling south on Interstate five between Orange County and San Diego at 0300, they pass a disabled car parked on the shoulder of the road, nothing unusual given the economy and number of undocumented workers. The lead hummer, which contains the DHS security team, didn’t even think about calling it in, just another abandoned car someone will soon come by and strip down to its frame. When the fourth vehicle pulls even with the abandoned car, it explodes. The junked car has been filled with homemade explosives. Nails and BBs have been glued on the cars fenders, hood and trunk. When the explosion goes off, the nails and BBs fly out cutting down any of the DHS agents who survived the initial blast. Surviving agents stumble out of their vehicles, all of which had been flipped onto their sides, gunshots ring out from the sides of the road. Every agent is cut down. After ensuring all of the DHS agents are dead, the militia members run to the DHS vehicles scooping up their weapons, ammo, and supplies. After cleaning out the DHS vehicles, the militia sets them on fire before they disappear into the dark.

Fifteen miles outside Denver Colorado a convoy of DEA and DHS agents crested a hill on Interstate 70 where they see a roadblock. The convoy slows to a stop to determine who set up the roadblock. Fifteen agents approached the barricade when barrels filled with homemade explosives lined up behind the barricade detonate. The junk cars and trucks are turned into fragments that cut the agents apart. The explosion creates a huge hole in the freeway. People dressed in combinations of different camo run to the DEA and DHS vehicles turning them around and driving off in them.

Outside of Bend Oregon a group of eighteen town’s people who’d had enough, some who’ve hidden their weapons attack a state police office. The town’s people have the advantage of surprise; the police’s advantage is training and better weapons. Fifteen minutes after the attack started, sixteen of the town’s people lay dead or seriously wounded. Two run into the woods to escape being killed by the police.

In Chicago Illinois, thirty gang members decide if they don’t fight back they’ll lose their territory and end up in jail or dead. They planned a trap for the Chicago police. They got some cinder blocks, paint, and cement. The built a wall at the end of the street; they painted the wall to match the street, including the center divider line which they painted up the wall. Next they shot all of the street lights with pellet guns. When the wall is finished, they call 911 reporting a shooting at the end of the street. Two of Chicago’s finest race down the street, they don’t notice the street in front of them isn’t a street, but a solid wall which they run into at 45 MPH. Destroying both of their cars. As soon as the cars hit the wall, the gang members run to the cars stripping the officers of their weapons, radios, and their uniforms.

In New York’s JFK airport, TSA reports that someone broke into their storeroom stealing forty sets of uniforms. The New York Transit Police record the details, they file a report, which given the number of recent crimes and a limited number of detectives, will sit in someone’s in the basket until it becomes a cold case and is filed and forgotten about.

Boston’s Logan airport is very quiet at 5:20 AM on a warm Saturday morning. TSA agents clock in for their shift that officially starts at 5:30AM. They check the day’s updates for any special news items, grab a cup of coffee before reporting to their screening positions. One of the Boston airport police looks at the agents saying, “You guys change shifts or people again? You’re not the normal Saturday morning crew.”

“Hey, Officer Wilson, yes, we used to be up in New Hampshire, you know how bureaucrats are once you make friends and get to know the people in an airport, they decide it’s a good time to shift everyone around.”

“Yea, damn Army did the same thing to me when I served. One of the main reasons I got out. Every couple of years sent me to a new base. You guys going to be here every Saturday?”

“Saturday, Sunday, holidays and sometimes the midnight shift. They’d never allow us to work 40 hours; they keep us part-timers, that way they can avoid giving us benefits.”

“Good to meet you, have a nice shift, see you next week.”

The TSA agents look down and smile thinking, no we won’t. The agents use their stolen ID cards to gain access to the locker room where they find additional uniforms and blank ID cards. They report to the screening stations where they break the scanners, stopping all of the travelers in their tracks. Logan airport is closed for hours. Two TSA agents place small smoke bombs in the restrooms. These explode filling the restrooms with smoke, setting off the airport's fire alarms. Logan is evacuated while the fire department goes area to area checking for fires. No one flies out of Logan for the entire day. When the smoke clears the fire department finds a painted message on the main terminal wall, “We, the people say, enough.”

A woman arrives for work at the New York City DHS cafeteria; she looks around making sure no one is looking in her direction. She removes a small vial of clear liquid from her pocket. She pours it into the soup. She leaves at the end of her shift smiling all the way home. Hours later everyone who ate the soup comes down with diarrhea. Over 70% of the DHS staff call in sick the next day. The cafeteria worker brings in a different container the next day. She holds her breath something she’d practiced many times. She uncaps the vial pouring its contents on the floor on her way to the kitchen. The next day 50% of those who make it into work came down with a high fever, chills, and vomiting. The same thing happens in ten other government buildings in the Northeast.

@@@@@

The Secretary of Homeland Security reviews the reports, “These actions have to stop. Someone is using our policies against us. Someone knows how we operate. The President is taking a lot of heat for Logan being closed for an entire day. Even the press is starting to ask questions. This attack inside our buildings is most troubling; someone used a weapon of mass destruction against us inside one of our office building.”

“Mr. Secretary we’re fighting insurgents.”

“Insurgents? We’re not fighting in Iraq.”

“Mr. Secretary, we’ll never get away with proving we were attacked with a WMD.”

“Look, someone used a biological weapon on us; biological weapons are weapons of mass destruction. I want every employee rechecked. Run additional background checks on everyone.”

“Sir, that’ll take a long time, we have over 200,000 employees!”

“I don’t care, run background checks on every one of them. If any have a family member who’ve ever made any negative statements on any social media site about the administration gets pulled in for questioning. These attacks have to stop.”

“Yes sir, I’ll get right on it. Should we allow people to report to work before their backgrounds are run?”

“We have to, or we won’t have anyone to do any tasks.”

@@@@@

Newark and Dulles airports are closed due to smoke and stink bombs exploding in the terminal.

Traffic is gridlocked in New York City when all of the traffic lights turn red. They stay red for hours. The city’s traffic department can’t figure out how to get the traffic lights back to normal. New York City is shut down for 12 hours before the city and transit police are able to manually direct traffic.

Ten TSA agents enter the small police department in Melbourne Florida; their captain tells the desk officer, “We’re here for a firearm inspection. Please take us to your weapons lockers.”

“Sir, may I please see some paperwork?”

“No, you may not, I’m TSA Captain John Bradford, these people with me are my staff, and are employees of the US Department of Homeland Security, Department of the Transportation Security Administration. We don’t need any paperwork; you will now direct us to your weapons locker or we’ll arrest you and everyone else in this station.”

The desk officer leads the agents to the weapons locker which is filled with 24 M16s, 12 shotguns, 12 tear gas guns and twenty thousand rounds of ammunition. “Officer we have to confiscate these weapons, they are a violation of the President’s SAFE Act.”

“Wait a minute, we’re the police.”

“So what, the SAFE Act doesn’t discriminate between police and citizens, these weapons have been deemed dangerous by the President. Staff, collect these weapons and ammo. Give the officer a receipt. Officer if your department files the receipt with the DHS field office you’ll be compensated for the weapons value.”

“Yes sir, thank you sir.”

The agents carry the weapons out to TSA marked black Suburbans.

Twenty minutes later the local police Captain arrives, “Officer, how’s your day?”

“Fine Captain, fine, the TSA was just here, they confiscated our weapons because we were in violation of the SAFE Act. We were lucky the agents came before we were fined for the weapons.”

“Officer, what are talking about? Police departments are excluded from the SAFE Act; did they show you any paperwork to take our weapons?”

“Captain, they gave us a receipt.”

“Let me see it.”

“Asshole, did you read this? Officer Daffy Duck signed it. You gave all of our weapons to some impersonators.”

“Captain, they were wearing TSA uniforms, they had DHS ID cards.”

“Something’s wrong here; I’m going to check with DC.”

@@@@@

Brownsville, Indiana is a small town that refused to be pushed around by the DHS, fourteen people meet in a little league baseball field where they dug up their buried weapons, they checked and loaded them. They made their way to the Federal building in Indianapolis. They were everyday average people who’d just had enough bullshit from the government. They’re mad as hell and aren’t going to take it anymore. They approached the front door of the building, when an Indianapolis police officer stopped their van. “What are you people doing out here?”

“Just going for a ride, can’t we do that anymore? Did someone pass a new law forbidding us from going for a ride?”

“Your passenger has face paint on, you’re both wearing urban camo, why don’t you tell me the real story. That way no one gets hurt. If your story sounds reasonable I, won’t even look in the back of the van, where I’d guess I’m going to find a few more of your friends and some outlawed weapons.”

“Officer, we don’t want any problems.”

“Then turn around and go home, whatever you were planning should stop right now. Just exit at the next street, turn around and go home, go back to bed, hug your wives and forget this playing soldier crap. If you continue to go forward, none of you is going to live to see tomorrow. By the way, next time you want to play games, try Xbox. No one in their right mind drives into a major city wearing urban camo and face paint. I don’t like all of these new laws and regulations either; however, I’m sworn to protect the population of this city. If you try to harm them, I’m going to have to stop you, many of you will be hurt. Now please go home.”

The vans turn around and go home. “I guess we blew that one. It sounded so simple over a couple of beers.”

“Yea, we’ve got to get some better advice on the forum, this plan sucked.”

@@@@@

“Good morning Ron, nice to have you join us for breakfast. Coffee?”

“Yes please.”

“Last night you said you knew where we could get some training, did you mean it?”

“Yes, I want to fight back too, but I want to live. As such we need to get trained. Untrained people fighting the National Guard or the Army, or for that matter, even if you attacked the Sheriffs, you would have your butt kicked and when it comes to bullets that's not what you want to happen. I know a group of people who have a camp in West Virginia; they train police officers and private security companies. They’re all ex-Marine Force Recon. They make the snake eaters look like boy scouts.”

“Snake Eaters?”

“Army special forces.”

“By the way have you seen the news?”

“No, what’s new?”

“A bunch of stories about various small battles between the people and the feds.”

“Brad, untrained people facing the DHS or others who are trained is going to end badly.”

“Well, it kind of turned out OK in the revolution.”

“Different times, different people, different weapons. Most people then knew how to hunt and live off the land. The British wore bright red uniforms; they marched in straight lines, right into the muzzles of the Minutemen. Don’t expect the DHS to do the same thing. Don’t expect the guard to do the same thing the guard’s practiced fighting urban guerillas. We need to become the most deadly insurgent army history has ever seen. We can’t take them on the head to head; we should take a page out of the insurgent's book, attack the feds along their supply lines, cut their communications, leave behind homemade IEDs. Make them pay in blood for what they’ve done to our country. If, on the other hand, the military comes out on the fed’s side, it’s all over.”

“Why do you say that?”

“Because it’s true. The Army learned how to deal with insurgents; they have the firepower that will cut us down in seconds. We’re not talking about a Hollywood movie war. We’re talking about real blood and sweat. Once we’re trained, and team up with an experienced group, we can make our actions count.

“How do we contact them?”

“That’s the easy part. The hard part if proving we’re real and not government spies.”

“What do they do to spies? Just asking?”

“A spy won’t ever be found. Experienced operators have no sense of humor when it comes to spies. Brad anything you want to tell me?”

“Ron, chill, just asking. Man, you know me, always curious.”

Brad, not a good thing to joke about when we meet them. We’ll leave after breakfast.”

Kathy, who’s been listening to the conversation, says, “Boys, women can fight too, you’re not leaving me here while you go learn how to make a difference.”

@@@@@

“General, the initial blows have been exchanged.”

“Damn, I was hoping it could be avoided. Set up a secure conference call with all of the base commanders, it’s time to put the master plan in effect; maybe just the threat will make the White House pause.”

“General, do you believe the threat of action will give the White House pause?”

“No, but it sounds good. If the current resident of the White House had any brains, he wouldn’t have pushed us this far. By the way, has anyone heard from Major Grover?”

“Yes sir, he was able to smuggle Admiral Zander out of the Pentagon. The Admiral is on his way to sea. He took the Major with him; they should be landing on the Lincoln in 45 minutes.”

“Excellent. People, I’m worried that the ordinary citizens are going to end up getting hurt. I want our people to support the citizens who stand up for freedom. I don’t want our people to turn away their help. I don’t want to hear stories that we turned the people away. We exist to protect our people. If we want to have a true representative government, we need the people to get involved. It’s a good thing the people want to get involved. Encourage them, train them but also keep eyes open for informers. Even Washington had to deal with informers. People, this is a very good sign that the people kicked off the party. Now we can move with their support. Next step is the press,”

The staff nods, smiling at the plan the general has in mind for the press.

Chapter 21

Mysteriously social networks are flooded with the same post at the same time, “Freedom March” in Washington DC, July 4, 2015. No one knows who or even where the post started. It’s routed through different servers all over the world; the poster uses the name, ‘We the people’ the story spreads like a wildfire in Southern California; Wolf News makes it their web headline, they tweet it out to tens of millions of followers. The mainstream media picks up the story asking, “Who is we the people?”

The Department of Parks issues a press release stating that the Washington DC Mall is closed on July 4 to ‘We the People’ without realizing how the release reads, they proudly display it on all of the government websites, including the White House site; which is picked up and mocked around the world. Almost every country leads off their evening news broadcast with the story, “America closes Washington DC on July 4th to ‘We the People’.” Even the left says the Department of Parks made a huge mistake. The country was founded by ‘We the people’, the countries parks should be open to the people of the country.

Within four hours of the story breaking, 1,747,000 people have signed up on various Facebook pages to attend the now outlawed march of ‘We the People’. The President’s press secretary informs the President, “Sir; this is a social disaster. Who the hell put out a release closing the Washington DC Mall for ‘We the People’ on July 4th? It reads as if we, the Federal Government don’t care about our citizens; we look crass and uncaring to the world’s press. We’ve upset many voters.”

“Screw them. There’s no way I want a million gun toting, bible quoting hicks crowding DC on the 4th. Find a way to shut this march down. Shut it down, without causing a bigger scene, just shutting it down and make them go away.”

“Mr. President, guns are against the law, no one would carry a gun in Washington, and how can we refuse a permit to the people who elected us on the anniversary of the country’s independence?”

“Why are you bothering me with the details? Can’t you find a way to refuse their permit? Say another group had requested a permit first.”

The White House issues a press release saying, ‘Diversity for all’ has previously booked the Mall for a July 4th parade, the White House is sorry and hopes ‘We the People’ will select a different date to visit Washington DC.”

Social Media ignites in an uproar, within an hour of the White House release an additional 300,000 people sign up to attend the now illegal march.

The President calls the Secretary of Defense, Bruce if these people show up on July 4th to march without a permit; can the federalized Guard control them? Will we need the Army to patrol the streets of Washington on July 4th?’

“Mr. President, the Army can’t patrol the streets of Washington, we are directly forbidden from doing so.”

“I see. Then you leave me no choice.”

“Mr. President, no choice in what?”

“Since I can’t trust you to provide security for the people that live and work in our capital, I’m going to turn to a group I can count on.”

“Sir, a group you can count on? Mr. President, please don’t send the DHS bullies into the streets against the people.”

“Bruce, I have no intention of sending in the DHS agents, I don’t want them to be harmed. I have a much better idea. Thank you for your input.”

The Secretary of Defense hangs up the phone thinking, who’s he going to use? What’s he up to?

The President calls his senior secret service agent into the Oval Office, “Please arrange a trip to New York City as soon as possible; I want to attend a meeting at the United Nations building.”

“Yes, sir, how soon do you wish to leave?”

“This afternoon, it will be a very quick meeting, in and out within a couple of hours.”

“Sir, we leave in three hours if that works with your agenda.”

“Thank you that will work.”

Picking up the phone, the President places a call to the Secretary-General of the United Nations, “Hello Ki-Sun, are you available in four hours for a quick face to face meeting with me?”

“Mr. President, always, sir, I’ll arrange flights to DC right away.”

“No, I’ll come to New York; it’ll be a very quick trip, I want to meet with just you. I’ll be at the UN building at 4PM?”

“Yes, of course, Mr. President.”

The President takes Marine One to Andrews Joint Operating Base where Air Force One takes him to JFK. He boards another helicopter that takes the call sign Marine One for the short flight directly to the UN building. Bun Ki-Sun is waiting on the roof of the UN building to meet the President. The secret service agents exit first to check the roof for any threats. Satisfied there are none, the agents nod towards the door of the helicopter. The President walks down the stairs coming face to face with the Secretary-General. The President bows to the UN Secretary-General, the two leaders shake hands, while the Sec-Gen leads the President to his private elevator. The two ride to the Secretary-General’s private conference room.

“Mr. Secretary General, thank you for agreeing to meet with me with on such short notice.”

“Mr. President, it must be something very important for you to come to see me on such short notice, how can I and the United Nations be of service?”

“Mr. Secretary-General, I find myself in a very unusual position. Have you heard the rumors about a people’s march to Washington DC on July 4th?”

“Mr. President, I would not call it a rumor. There are people within this building who are planning on attending. We think it’s wonderful how the American people are responding to a call to support their government on your country’s birthday.”

“Mr. Secretary-General, this is not a march of support, it’s a protest march. I find that I require additional security for our capital on the 4th. I am hoping that the United Nations will provide 10,000 international peacekeepers to keep the peace.”

“Mr. President, you want me to authorize a UN deployment to Washington DC?”

“Yes, that’s what I’m asking.”

“Mr. President, many in America will see this as a conspiracy plot for what they call a new world order of a global government.”

“You supply the manpower, leave the handling of the press and rumors to me. This is what I do best. I’ll have the people of DC waving small UN flags of support for your troops. Of course, we’ll cover all of the costs associated with the deployment and a service fee to you for arranging the deployment on such short notice.”

“Very well, Mr. President, I’ll arrange a deployment of 10,000 United Nations Peace Keepers to be in Washington DC from July 1 to July 10th, the cost will be invoiced to America. I also assume you’ll cover all of their living expenses and support costs?”

“Of course.”

“Then sir, it’s agreed. It’s a pleasure being able to support the people of America from these racist anarchists.”

“Mr. Secretary-General, I’ll have my Chief of Staff work out the agreements with your chief, I’m going to return to DC, thank you for your support of all freedom-loving Americans.”

The President returns to the White House making plans to blunt the people's parade on July 4th, he thought, I hope my dumb as a box of nails press secretary remembered to get some diversity group lined up to march, so the Tea Bag nuts see I didn’t lie.

@@@@@

General Brownstone tells his aide, “It’s time to scare the crap out of the press, are we ready?”

“Yes sir, our people have selected three members of the press. Our people will be dressed in the TSA uniforms we stole, tonight at 0330 we’ll kick in their home front door, grab them, handcuff them while others in the teams will tear their homes apart looking for their notes. The press always has notes at home; we’ll take their notes, trash their homes and scare the hell out of their families. One agent in each team will accidently drop the names of the other reporters the teams are visiting tonight. This way the three will be able to chat about it. We’re going to bug their phones and homes, audio and video. We should then own these three if it doesn’t provide the desired effect; we’ll repeat it with another three. Sooner or later, and we think sooner, since the press thinks they’re in a special class above the rest of us, one or more will go on air and question the tactics the administration is using. We’re sure at least one if not all of them will scream about their first amendment rights.”

“Very good, I can’t wait to see the video of the poor little reporters. How did you select the teams?”

“Ex Marines who performed interrogation in the sandbox, I might add, none too gently either.”

“Thank you, I can’t wait.”

@@@@@

“Abram, I agree with you, we should cast our support with their people.”

“David, are you sure? Most of the people don’t like us; most of them would like to do away with us.”

“Abram, we have no choice, if the tyrant wins, we’ll be next to be picked on. We promised, “Never Again.” We promised we would do everything possible to stop anything like the Holocaust from ever repeating itself.”

“How do we make contact? Who do we contact?”

“I’ll handle it.”

“General Brownstone, you have an outside call on the secure phone.”

“From the outside? Who knows that number?”

“Sir, less than a dozen and sir, it’s not one of ours.”

“Who is it?”

“Sir, we suggest you take the call.”

“Hello, this is General Brownstone, US Marines retired. Who am I speaking with?”

“General, this is Abraham Silverstone representing the Jewish Defense League. We met once, five years ago when you visited Israel.”

“Mr. Silverstone,”

“General, Abram will do.”

“Abram, how did you get this number?”

“From a mutual friend of ours, Joshua said to tell you, you should call him this evening.”

“I see, what can I do for you?”

“It’s not what can you do for us, but what we can do for you. We have people in most cities; we have hidden arms, and we’re trained and have been trained to train others who’ve never fired a firearm before. We are offering our support to you in helping train American Citizens.”

“Who said anything about us training American citizens with outlawed firearms?”

“General, don’t fool with me, we both know you’re planning to provoke a change of the current administration, hopefully peacefully and if not through leading the largest uprising the world has seen since 1917.”

“Can you tell me how many of you there are?”

“More than enough, we have been supported by our friends in the Mossad and the IDF.”

“Why would you support our efforts?”

“General, because we’re Americans too. And if the American government shifts much more to the left, then Israel will be in danger. We won’t allow another Holocaust, we mean Never Again. General, it’s in our benefit to support you so the right side comes out victorious in the upcoming battle.”

“Abram, may I ask where you’re calling from?”

“Not at all, I’m upstairs in room 236.”

Laughing, the General replies, “Stay there, a young man wearing black jeans, desert boots and a black T-shirt will knock on your door in 15 minutes.”

“General, until later.”

“General, do you believe him?”

“Captain, one way to find out, is to text my old friend in Israel, he’ll tell me the truth.”

The text comes back almost instantly, “He is real and trustworthy.”

The General shows the text to his aide saying, “Go get him, room 236, blindfold him when you get around the corner from our elevator.”

“Yes sir.”

@@@@@

“Admiral welcome to the Lincoln battle group.” Says, Rear Admiral Robert Sanders, commander of the fifth fleet.

“Thank you, Admiral Sanders, I promise not to get in your way.”

“Admiral, you’re the CNO, I’m going to move to the visiting officer quarters and give you my cabin.”

“No, please stay in your cabin, the Major, and I will use the quest quarters, I’d like to meet with you and the Captain in an hour.”

“Yes, sir, I’ll have a Marine escort you to your quarters and then to the flag bridge.”

“Robert, it may have been a few years since I commanded a battle group, but I assure you I can find the flag bridge. Any seaman on board will tell me, just to get me away from them.”

The two old friends laugh, two Marines pick up the Admiral’s and Major’s overnight bag escorting them to their cabins.

“Robert, may I ask for one small favor?”

“Admiral Zander, Sir, what can I do for you?”

“The Major broke me out of the basement of the Pentagon rather quickly; he didn’t get a chance to pack much of anything, I assume there’s a couple of spare uniforms aboard that’ll fit him?”

“Sir, your Marine escort will take care of the Major.”

“Robert, thanks, it feels good to smell the sea again. I’ve been cooped up in the Pentagon to long. I’d forgotten how good being at sea feels.”

@@@@@

“Brad, Kathy, I’ve made contact, we move in an hour, please pack an overnight bag for three days, a reservation has been made for you in a Hampton Motel, you’ll never stay there, however, the bag will look good if we’re stopped and your story is checked.”

“How do we explain you? A threesome?”

Laughing, Ron says, “You’re giving me a ride to see my brother-in-law.”

“Smooth.”

“Yes, and Brad, keep your weapons here. Everything, you need, will be supplied.”

“Can I ask where we’re going?”

“I’d thought you already knew that, we’re going to Quantico.”

“You said West Virginia, I didn’t think there were any more Marines?”

“There are bases, and there are bases, we have many friends in Quantico. Don’t believe everything you read on the internet. I’m a Marine.”

“I thought you were a sheriff.”

“Once a Marine, always a Marine, there are no ex-Marines, even dead Marines are only gone from this plane, they’re in hell battling the forces of evil. They’re the best in the world to train you what you need to know before July 4th.”

“Why July 4th?”

“Because that’s when the war to retake America begins in earnest.”

Chapter 22

“Mr. President, the Canadian Prime Minister has sent an official note that they are closing their border with us. They have started building a wall across the entire 5,500 miles that separate our two countries.”

“They’re what? Why would they do this? The world should have open borders; people should be free to transit wherever and whenever they want.”

“Mr. President with our current economy and civil unrest, many of our citizens are looking for work in the Canadian oil fields. The Canadian’s have stated they are going to start requiring visas for US citizens entering Canada.”

“This is totally unacceptable; I won’t accept this. I want to punish the Canadians. Can we launch some cruise missiles at them?”

“Mr. President, no we can’t launch some cruise missiles at Canada. They are our largest trading partner.”

“I don’t care. They can’t do this. I want the army to tear down their wall as soon as they build it.”

“Mr. President, that means war, you’ll be declaring war on Canada, we’ll be invading them.”

“So what? It’s Canada! They can’t stop us. They don’t have any military.”

“Mr. President, you can’t, attacking Canada will piss off our base. Hell even the press might be upset.”

“They’ll get over it just come up with a story, say they’re blocking the natural expression and freedom of our people.”

“Sir, they’re another country!”

“Just come up with a story and make it a good one, and then tell General Brindly to attack Canada within 72 hours.”

“General Brindly, I want you to invade Canada, start off with hitting them with cruise missiles.”

“Mr. President, we can shoot a few cruise missiles in 72 hours, maybe make some bombing passes, but a full-scale invasion takes time to plan, we need logistical support, training, time to move the equipment and troops. I think we can be ready in maybe three months.”

“Three months? I’m the President; I’m ordering an attack now, not in three months. In three months, people will have forgotten about their damn wall. Bomb their wall to dust.”

“Sir, you can only wage this war for 30 days before you have to go to Congress for approval, the war powers act states…”

“Don’t tell me about the war powers act, I ignored it when I approved the attack on Libya, Congress is impotent. I’m the President; I can do anything I want, and I plan to do what I want. There’s no one who can or will stop me from transforming America.”

@@@@@

At 6PM EDT every broadcast is interrupted, every email account, every Twitter account, every social media network posting receives the same message, “We are Anonymous, heed our message, on July 4th 2015 ‘We the people’ will take back our country. American citizens come to Washington DC on July 4th, 2015 to take back our country. We are Anonymous. We are going to support the take back of our country. We stand with you, stand with us, together we can’t be defeated. July 4th, 2015 in Washington DC. We are Anonymous.” Television and internet displays return to normal. Twitter lit up like Christmas lights on Christmas Eve; everyone twittered about the upcoming march in Washington DC.

The President called the Secretary-General of the United Nations, “Listen Ki-Sun, this is getting very serious over here, I want the initial troops in DC by June 20th. Can you assure me this won’t be a problem?”

“Mr. President, assuming the initial payment of $500 million is received within 48 hours I’m sure the initial troops will arrive without any problems. Do you have a location set aside for our base of operations?”

“Yes, I’ve decided to use the parking lot of the Pentagon, they have a huge amount of space, since we’ve shrunk the military’s size, there’s much less demand for people to be working there. I’m going to force the military to reduce their civilian workforce by another 25% on June 30th; this will open up entire lots for the UN troops.”

“Mr. President, will our peacekeepers run into any issues with your military?”

“No, none at all. I’ll issue them a direct order as their Commander and Chief to stand down. Let me tell you, it’s good to have a Congress that fights among themselves, it leaves me alone to do anything I want. Even though the Republicans won control of both houses of Congress, their right wing and moderates fight among themselves more then they fight with me.”

“Mr. President, the initial flights will land at your Andrews joint operating base on the 20th.”

@@@@@

“Major, before we enter the ship’s captains meeting, I have an assignment for you, I want you to take over security for the battle force, any boat's officer or seaman, who tries to go against us, is to be stopped by you and your on board Marines and NCIS staff. I’ve already issued orders that you’re taking control of the fleet’s security. I don’t want to be surprised. We can’t afford one of the destroyers to attack the carrier or any other ship. Am I clear?”

“Yes sir. Sir, how far can I go to achieve my orders?”

“Major, I understand you’re an officer who understands how to carry out his orders, I was told I didn’t have to explain every little detail to you.”

Smiling, Major Grover says, “Yes Sir.”

“Good, let’s enter the meeting.”

“Admiral, Captain, Ladies, and Gentlemen, it’s my pleasure to turn the podium over to Admiral Zander our CNO, Admiral.”

“Thank you, ladies and Gentlemen, I’m sure that you’re all very concerned with the current situation of our nation. The Joint Chiefs debated and thought long and hard about our role in the upcoming events. We have decided that the existing situation is not acceptable. The current administration, while duly elected, there is evidence there was massive voter fraud in the election. The President’s used his executive powers which are not in the Constitution to rule as a dictator. American’s fought for independence from the United Kingdom because the King of the England didn’t listen to us; we didn’t have any rights, and we lacked a voice in our government. Our forefathers risked everything they had, including their lives. Our forefathers were charged with treason; there was a reward on their heads. Many died penniless. They tried to protect us against presidents who would try to be a king. Congress hasn’t listened, nor have they done anything to reign in the President. The American people don’t want a king, no matter the political party; no one wants an American Monocracy. The President has done away with the US Marines. The Marines have been faithful for over 235 years; the nation has depended on the Marines in every battle, with a stroke of his famous pen he closed them down. Well, I and others say, NO.”

The room explodes in NOs and cheers.

“We the people have had enough, we don’t want a king, we don’t want to be a communist country, we want to be the country our forefathers died for.”

Again the room explodes in cheers.

“The United States Navy has always stood for freedom, freedom of the seas and freedom for all. We’re not going to take orders to fire upon American citizens. We'll never accept such orders nor will we ever abandon the citizens of America."

The officers in the room stand cheering and pumping their right fists in the air.

“Don’t misunderstand me, we are going to see battle, the President has invited the United Nations to send peacekeepers to Washington DC.”

The reaction in the room was similar to having been told their homes had been bombed.

An LT Commander yelled out, “Sink them before they arrive, shoot down their planes before they land, no blue helmets in America.”

The room rocked to the chants of USA USA USA.

“Please, please let me continue. Not only has our Commander in Chief invited 10,000 UN troops here, he’s about to declare war on Canada. He plans to use some mash-up with our best friend to the north to keep the focus off of what he’s doing. He’s issued orders to the Air Force to begin bombing and to the Navy to prepare to fire Tomahawk missiles. One last thing, the President has issued an order for me to resign and for me to be arrested on a charge of murder for the brief battle between our ships and those of the Coast Guard, who were blocking our breakout to sea.”

The Captain of the Lincoln stands, “Admiral, if I may?”

“Of course Captain.”

“Admiral, you’re standing on 100,000 tons of muscle, surrounded by fourteen warships and four SSNs, if the President wants you, he’d better bring a bigger knife because we’re the baddest boys in the hood.”

The room cheers in support.

“Admiral, this ship and I dare say; this Navy will follow your orders.”

“Captain, thank you, as you may know, we’ve had some ships decide they couldn’t disobey a direct order from the CIC. They have returned to port; we may end up having to face our own brothers and sisters in a battle on the open seas, this is the nightmare that keeps me up at night.”

The Captain asks, “Sir, how many ships turned back to port?”

“Twenty-two, all surface ships, none of the carriers, none of the submarines. We did lose five supply ships and two oilers; these were manned mostly by civilians who didn’t want any part of what’s coming.”

“Sir, we need those supplies and fuel.”

“I know, as soon as they dock, Seal Teams and Marines are going to board the ships, telling their crew, they’re relieved. The Seals and the Marines are going to try to break the ships out of port and join up with us. The only weapons, they'll have, are those on board and those carried on by the Seals and Marines. Once we know they’re going to break out, I want five destroyers to take up position at the breakout point protecting them; the destroyers ROE are to protect the support ships. I will be asking you ship captains for volunteers for this mission.”

Every Destroyer’s Captain’s hand jumped into the air

@@@@@

“Ron, it’s good to see you again, my brother from another mother, I assume this is your friend Brad and his wife, Kathy?”

“Yes, are we ready?”

“Don’t tell me you don’t see your welcoming committee?”

“I know you have at least twelve people hidden watching us.”

“Very good, only there are fourteen.”

Brad, Kathy, and of course, you too Ron, we the US Marines welcome you. 239 years ago it was the average people who stood up and told the King of England to go to hell. It was people like the three of you who made America possible. Today many of our citizens wants to fight for freedom. Fighting is more than knowing how to shoot a firearm; we’ve come a long way from when a few people dressed in buckskin can hide behind some trees and take down the redcoats. Today’s military has become experts in battling insurgents. The Army has spent ten years fighting in the sandbox; they know what you’re going to do before you do it. Our mission is to instill enough knowledge in you to, hopefully, stay alive and enjoy the fruits of your labor and sacrifice. We have a group of your brothers and sisters here. We’re expecting twenty more people who are due tomorrow. We’re then going to train you how to fight, how to survive on the battlefield. Your training is going to be;

•              Very realistic, so realistic, you may think the battle has already started

•              How to operate at night, the Army and police think they own the night, we’re going to prove them wrong.

•              How to use your built in “Spidey sense” Many times your gut will tell you something is wrong, you need to learn how to listen to your gut, your sixth sense.

•              How to approach any mission from the eyes of the other side

•              How to function beyond your normal level, if you fight at your lowest common denominator you’ll lose and you’ll die

•              We’re going to develop your mental and physical abilities to go further than you ever thought possible

•              I promise you, you’re going to hate us before the end of the first day, it’s not personal, it's to ensure that as many of you stay alive as possible.

The President is bringing in the UN to fight against American citizens. The UN peacekeepers have never fought against a force as determined as the American Citizens and military. We will use their pretty blue helmets as targets. You will learn how they fight, their strengths and weakness. Remember, war is more than two armies standing across a field and shooting at each other, if it comes to that, run, run like hell, because you’re losing. Winning wars begins here, (pointing to his head) I suggest you all read the Art of War, in fact, there’s a copy on every bunk, read it, learn it, live it and it’ll save your lives. This is our country; we are going to fight side by side to take it back and keep it safe from tyrants. Now follow the corporeal who walked up behind you without you even noticing him, in two days he won’t be able to do that to you.”

Turning around, we’re shocked to see a smiling young man standing behind us holding an M16 rifle.

“Kathy, Brad, Ron, I’m Corporal, Jason Wilson, please follow me to your barracks.”

I ask, “Corp are we going through basic training? I’m a little old and overweight for basic.”

“We don’t have time for regular basic, you’ll be getting an advanced course. Time is very short before the blue helmets arrive. The march on July 4th is going to be the turning point.”

@@@@@

Sound bites on the 11:00 PM News;

“The internet is alive with stories of the march on July 4th; the Department of Homeland Security reminds anyone thinking of attending, the Mall is already booked, and you won’t be allowed to enter.”

“The President claims the economy is poised to grow next quarter.”

“Four drones fail from sun storm actively, crash in the Republic of Texas.”

“The Department of Labor says the number of undocumented workers is declining, many are leaving the country due to the poor economy.”

“Thousands of people are missing. Reports have been coming in from all parts of the country that tens of thousands of people are missing. There are reports that these people just up and disappeared. A mystery we’ll be watching for you.”

“Where is the US Navy? Reports are filtering in that over a hundred US Navy ships left port and haven’t been heard from since, where’s our Navy?’

@@@@@

The President tells his Chief of Staff, “It’s time for the next phase. I’m going to announce tonight that Health and Human Services has issued a new regulation outlawing cigarettes, we lose too many people to a variety of illness’ cigarettes cause.”

“Sir, the tobacco industry is going to fight this tooth and nail. The American people are going to be very upset.”

“You don’t understand; we’re outlawing cigarettes and legalizing marijuana, the tobacco companies will be making marijuana from now on. The public will be a little easier to deal with since many will be high all of the time, plus we now own the youth vote.”

Chapter 23

A man walks into the barracks, “Rise and shine, dawns due in two hours, rise and shine.”

“Good morning everyone. We hope you had a restful two hours of sleep, first rule of combat is sleep when you can, eat when you can, pee when you can. You never know when you’ll have the opportunity again. We’re not going to bother with the marching or saluting, we don’t have a lot of time. The UN Peacekeepers are due to start arriving in ten days. That’s nowhere enough time to teach what you need to know, so we’re going to concentrate on tactics and surprise and evasion. How to set traps and how to melt away when the odds have turned against you. Always remember, hit the enemy hard, hit them quick then fade away. Never go toe to toe with them. Our forefathers were the first insurgents; it’s time to relearn what was forgotten. We have weapons and ammo for those who need them. None of these weapons are automatic, none. You will get semi-auto or burst fire only. We don’t have enough time to teach you how to control full automatic weapons. No matter what you think you know, semi-auto is more accurate. You people are today’s Minutemen; we’re proud of you; you are today’s 3%. Never forget what freedom means.

The good news for you is we’ve developed an app for your smart phones which will help you remember some of what we’re trying to teach you.

Everyone laughs at the joke. The ice is broken; we know we’re in for a long few days.

@@@@@

The world thinks Rash Linebacker and Glenn Backs were killed in an explosion at the studio; the reality is they were arrested by the Department of Homeland Security and the Justice Department for Sedition and treason. Both are sharing a two bedroom suite in a hotel. The problem is neither has any idea where they are. The windows are blacked out; they have no outside communications or a television. “Rash, why are they keeping us in this semi-luxury?”

“Glenn, honestly no idea. They think they may need us for something. My gut’s telling me; they’re going to hide us away and try to make us their mouthpieces after the country is completely changed.”

“You’re most likely correct. I’m worried about my family. They think I’m dead. They must be worried sick. This is cruel and inhuman punishment. We can’t leave; they bring us our food. We don’t have any idea where they’re even keeping us.”

Rash looks thoughtful saying, “I have a couple of ideas.”

“I’m all ears.”

“When they picked us up, we traveled for four hours. While we can’t see outside, the window is warm. There’s no city noise. There're no other sounds at all. My guess is we’re at some resort that’s been closed and taken over by the DHS or we’re in a separate wing they rented out to keep us away from everyone else.”

“So what’s your guess?”

“Greenbrier.”

Glenn looks at the rooms ceiling saying, “You mean the hotel in West Virginia that had the nuclear bunker hidden under it?”

“Yup, it’s a very large hotel; they closed up the bunker a couple of years ago; the hotel has a couple of wings, it would make it easy for the government to hide us away most likely with some low-level staff assigned to babysit us.”

“I think you may be correct if so there’s bound to be other people around the hotel.”

“Yes, if we could get out of the room and into one of the other wings.”

“Worth a try to put a plan together.”

“We’re going to have some interesting shows when we get out of here.”

“We need to ensure as much as we can this never happens again.”

“Glenn, there’s always a weakness, they have one we haven’t seen yet. We just have to find it. My biggest fear is the low information voters have bought everything the administration has said in the past couple of months. If they bought the complete bullshit story, we’ve lost the country.”

“Rash, I think the President will go to the UN to help hold the country together.”

“I hope he does, that would be the biggest mistake he ever makes.”

@@@@@

Admiral Zander meets with the staff of the fifth fleet, “Captain, we have thousands of loyal Marines stuck in the sandbox, I’d like you to dispatch a couple of amphibious ships with an escort of destroyers. Collect our people and as much of their supplies and equipment as possible, bring them home. We’re going to need them. Use your Harriers for local air control. Your LCACs can carry their heavy equipment. The Gulf can be very dangerous; do you want a couple of the subs to clear a path in front of you?”

“Admiral, yes, I think, I’ll take three amphibious ships, six DDG 51s, and two subs.”

“Just what I thought you’d ask for, here’s your orders. You can refuel when you arrive in the Gulf.”

“Admiral, what are my ROE for this mission?”

“Use your best judgment.”

“Admiral, those are the best ROEs I’ve ever had.”

“Captain make sure you bring everyone home. And return with all of your ships”

“Sir, what if we run into other American ships?”

“Warn them away, if that fails, revert to your ROE.”

“Aye Sir.”

@@@@@

The press questions the President’s ruling on cigarettes and marijuana, without age limits; something the President forgot about in his regulations, the press and many schools are concerned with the massive increase in students experimenting with other drugs from their use of marijuana. Many editors decide to not discuss their concerns on the air; many decide just to ignore the story completely. Many educators worry test scores fall very quickly, which will impact their income which has been tied to class test scores.  First responders are concerned that highway accidents will increase 200% or more. The fast food industry is happy thinking they will see an increase to their sales making them one of the few industries that support the President’s ruling. The FAA has come out against allowing smoking marijuana on airplanes; many ignore the FAA and smoke it on airplanes, making all of the passengers high, causing the pilots to wear an oxygen mask for the entire flight.

Hundreds get sick eating marijuana-laced food. Hospitals are overrun with people who get into accidents or get ill. The drug dealers are very angry with the President for cutting into their profits. They decide to fund the fight against the President’s policy, hoping to get his regulations overturned.

It's strange bedfellows when drug dealers decide to join with patriots fighting for their country.

@@@@@

The President is meeting with his cabinet to discuss the upcoming events planned for July 4th. “Ladies and Gentlemen, the UN’s initial troops will arrive in a few days. I’ve decided to close most of the monuments starting in three days. This should hold down the number of visitors to the Capital. I’m also going to announce the cessation of White House and Congressional tours. I’d like each of you to also cease all tours, and close all government properties. There might be a few people upset. Since we “own” the press those stories, won’t make it to the air. I’m also announcing this evening the reduction of our military by 25% this year, and another 15% next year, in addition I see no reason for stockpiling weapons systems we’ll never use.”

The room explodes in cheers.

The President continues, “The money, we save, can be used to jump start new education programs. Even with our very low unemployment rate, I think we should offer education programs so our workers can stay current in their given fields. I’m also going to use the savings to fund universal preschool, and provide free community college for all who want to attend college. It’s about time every person in American had an equal chance of higher education and gets the best education we can provide.”

The room again explodes in clapping.

The Secretary of Education says, “Mr. President, this is wonderful news, we have draft regulations ready to release. We’re also going to make Common Core mandatory. It’ll no longer to be an option for local school districts.”

The President nods in approval. He turns to the Secretary of the Treasury saying, “I have a new idea which I think will also help us; we have to refund too much money to the taxpayers. The average taxpayer wastes their tax refund; I’m going to mandate that all tax refunds go directly into a new government retirement program this way we’ll have the use of the funds. “

“A wonderful idea Mr. President, I’ll get right on drafting the new regulations.”

The Director of the EPA says, “Mr. President, here are the new regulations you suggested outlawing all coal mining and coal burning in the country within 12 months. This should make a major improvement in the countries air quality.”

“Excellent, people we’re making real progress here, keep up the good work. If we work together, we can have a great July 4th and also ensure the country is moving forward for the next 50 years. I expect that every one of your departments will do everything possible to support our guests, the UN troops. To show respect for the UN, I suggest we start flying their flag above ours. I want to have the flags flying on June 20th when the initial troops arrive.”

The AG says, “Mr. President; it’s against the law to fly the UN flag above ours.”

“Honestly Herder, just change the damn law, we don’t have time for these stupid laws.”

“Very good Mr. President. I’ll have the new regulations issued tomorrow.”

@@@@@

“People, you’re dirty, you’re sore, you’re tired, and you’re almost ready. However, our time is up. You’re all going to start going home this evening. You can’t all leave at the same time. We’ve arranged for all of you to be home within the next three days. When you leave, do NOT take your weapons with you. We’ve arranged for them to be stripped, broken down and will have them shipped in triple boxes to your homes. They will come from various sources, when you get them, close the blinds and make sure no one is on your street when you reassemble them.” Your initial ammo will be delivered in small packages; most of it will be buried where we showed you. You all memorized the locations, don’t forget them and don’t tell anyone where the packages are buried. The same locations will hold other material you’ll need. Now go with God and be safe. The entire country is counting on you. The UN troops arrive in four days, the battle to reclaim America begins on the fourth.”

Chapter 24

“General Dempsey, we have received an official notice from the White House ordering us to begin a draw down to accomplish a 25% reduction of our manpower by September 30.”

“By September 30? I thought we were going to have until next September 30. He’s giving us 90 days to reduce our forces by 25%? What are our people going to do? The real unemployment rate is over 10%. His total employment program was a total bust; millions were hired, and they’re just sitting around getting paid to do nothing. Congress cut the welfare and unemployment benefits, we’re screwed. We’ll be dumping our people onto the streets to become homeless and dependent on government welfare, which as veterans they get a reduced amount. What a bad deal. I want a meeting soonest in the War Room with the other service chiefs. Send back an official notice to the White House from me, comment, and Order received, nothing more. If someone over there asks for details or anything else, just say I’m in a secure meeting and can’t be disturbed.”

“General, Admiral Zander is on secure line one from the Lincoln.”

“Admiral, how’s it feel to be out to sea again?”

“General, it makes me feel 30 years younger. I just saw the official order for a reduction of people. The Navy has been ordered to retire 6 of our 11 carriers and 100 of our warships.”

“Yes, the order has been issued to every service officer above 06 (Colonel) what are you going to do?”

“I’m in a unique position I’m no longer the CNO; he fired me and forgot to appoint a new one. I’m still the senior ranking officer; the Navy is behind me. I decided to keep the Navy’s ships at sea doing what we do best. I have no intention of retiring any of our ships. I am working on something that may stall him; if it works I’ll give you a heads up.”

“Waiting to hear. Having to start issuing orders RIFing people right now will be a disaster. One we can’t afford. By the way, I seem to be missing one of my officers; do you happen to know where I can find one Major Grover?”

“General, I thought you loaned him to me for the duration.”

“Admiral don’t get greedy; loan yes, for the duration? No.”

“Well, you know what they say about possession being 110% of something or other.”

“Just make sure I get him back safe and sound. I think we may have some tasks that are made for his unique abilities.”

“I’m using those unique abilities to so a security search of my fleet, when he’s finished, I’ll fly him back to you.”

“Thanks, be safe out there old friend.”

“You too.”

@@@@@

“General, the President has ordered a 25% reduction in the military, he wants it done by the end of the fiscal year, September 30.”

“Please get me General Dempsey on the secure line.”

“Rod how are you doing hiding under one of the best golf courses around?”

“Doing well, except we can’t venture outside to use it. No one knows we’re even here. One of my people told me that the DHS has secured a wing of the hotel, it’s blocked off from the normal hotel staff and the guests. Very strange. I’d like to know what they’re doing over there, but we don’t want to risk giving our position away. I had an interesting visitor a couple of days ago. One of the leaders of the JDL, he knew where I was, before you worry, he’s also friends with Joshua, he’s offered us manpower and supplies. The JDL has people spread all over the country. He has a direct line to Mossad and the IDF, which has warehouses full of weapons. Many are a generation old. However, all are in excellent shape.”

“That’s very good news. We’ve received an offer from Israel to refuel and provide shore leave for our people. I’m looking into taking them up on the offer. By the way, how are you resupplying your people?”

“We’re using the backup entrance which is a couple of miles behind the hotel. It exits in the woods that are behind a small hill. We can come and go without anyone seeing us. If they find us, it’s going to cost them dearly to dig us out.”

“I’m sure an old Marine like you has a few tricks up your sleeve.”

“Which is why I’m calling. I saw the orders from his royal majesty. I have an idea.”

“I’m all ears.”

“Generate a list of thousands of people’s names and ranks and offices; list most of them as homosexual or transgender send it to the White House marked as the list of people you will be retiring as of September 30. Ask them to confirm the list name by name. If they send back a blanket OK, send it back pointing out a couple of these positions and the impact the loss of these people will cause. Also, point out to the White House the protests the gay community will make against the Administration this will cause them to research each position and program. Use our abbreviations. They don’t understand them; this should burn up months while they try to figure out the impact. You’ll drive them crazy going in circles.”

“I always knew you Marines were sneaky bastards, thanks, great idea, while we’re at it, we’ll make up some abbreviations just to add to their fun.”

“See you understand and to think my old DI (drill instructor) used to say you can’t teach the Army anything new.”

Laughing, “They told us the same about you guys.”

“General, we’ve intercepted communications that the UN is due very soon, are you going to allow them to land?”

“Oh yes, we’re going to allow them to land at Andrews, then our people who stole various DHS uniforms are going to stand in for the customs and immigration. We’re planning on having the UN troops submit to full body cavity searches and a through weapons security check. Maybe we’ll remove their firing pins. Or jam their triggers.”

“And you call us sneaky? I love it. If there’s anything we can do to support you, let me know.”

“How is the training of the Minute Men coming?”

“Completed or as far as we can take them in the time we had, we’ll be ready for the fourth. Will you?”

“We’re ready.”

“God bless”

@@@@@

“Brad, Kathy how do you feel?”

Kathy looks at Ron saying, “I’m sore and bruised in places I didn’t know I had. I could sleep for a year.”

“Kathy, there’s an old saying, you can get all of the sleep you want when they lower you into the ground. For now, we have tasks to complete.”

“Ron, we have two days until the UN troops arrive is there anything we’re going to do to properly welcome our saviors?”

“I’ll check with Joshua; he’ll know.”

“We are a very charitable society; we need to provide a special welcome to the UN, it wouldn’t be right for them to visit us without us offering them a welcome gift.”

“Brad don’t worry about it; I’m sure someone has arranged a warm welcome for our new blue-helmeted friends.”

@@@@@

June 20th dawns misty, hot and humid. The airplane approach to Andrews is well known to the United Nations pilots, the most vulnerable time for any commercial airplane is take off and landing. This morning there are four teams hiding in the woodlands just outside of the airport. One member of each team has a small high-definition video camera, the team members are dressed in jeans and long sleeve T-shirts, each is wearing a full facial mask of the President. One team member in each of the four teams holds a shoulder-fired Stinger anti-air missile. The team looks into the camera saying, “We the people hereby announce to the world that we’ve had enough. We announce to the world that we’re mad as hell, and we’re not going to take it anymore. We say to the world the words Tomas Jefferson once said, “The tree of liberty must be refreshed from time to time with the blood of patriots and tyrants. It is its natural manure.” As such, let the first blood now flow.” With that two stinger missiles, leap from their launch tubes towards the initial approaching United Nations flights from Poland and Germany. The Stinger missiles are heat seekers; they lock onto the hot exhaust of the plane’s engines. Both missiles fly into the large engines mounted under the airliner’s wings. Both engines explode when the small Stinger warheads destroy the jet engines turbines. The airplane noses down and crashes short of the runway; it flips over four times exploding in flames, none aboard survive.

The welcoming committee chairman picks up a secure handheld radio, transmitting the words, “warm welcome." The men move to their second hide position; they enjoy a break while they wait for the second flight.

The President is having breakfast when an aide rushes in to tell him the first UN plane crashed on landing.

“What do you mean it crashed?”

“Sir, it was flying one minute, the next it hit the ground, rolling over in flames, no one survived.”

“Why did it crash?”

“So far no one knows. There are rumors it was shot down, and another rumor that the pilots didn’t speak English very well, some say they confused the landing instructions, some say they came in too low and crashed.”

“It couldn’t have been a missile, no one on would dare harm the UN; they are our friends. The people of America are waiting to welcome our friends in the UN. It had to be pilot error. Tell that idiot in New York to use better pilots. When is the next plane due?”

“Sir, it’s been diverted to Reagan Airport.”

“Call it NATIONAL airport, I hate when people call it Reagan.”

“Yes sir, it’s due to land to land at National in twenty minutes.”

“Keep me informed.”

@@@@@

UN Flight 002 is 75 miles from Reagan Airport, the flight has been a total bore. The Copilot yells, “Captain, 2 o’clock, a small single engine plane, heading right toward us!”

“Where?”

“Sir, there.” Pointing out of the window, the pilot sees the small plane heading towards them. Warn them off, call the control tower and warn them off, change course.”

Two men sitting in a small van ten miles away are smiling as they remotely control the piper cub which is loaded with explosives. It’s been coated in RAM (Radar Absorbing Material) paint to lower its signature from the airport’s radar. “We’re almost there, think he’ll turn right or left?”

“My bet is left.”

“You’re on, normal bet?”

“Yes.”

“Let’s target the center of the plane.”

The explosive loaded piper cub hits the airliner in the middle just behind the wings blowing up both; bodies and supplies rain down on Virginia farm land.

The leader picks up a secure handheld radio saying, “mail delivered.”

@@@@@

“General the initial two UN flights ran into some very serious mechanical issues, both crashed. We understand the UN has stopped all flights until every plane can be checked.”

“Excellent, allow the next one to land, that ought to make them relax, we’ll treat the troops to a fine TSA style welcome. Are you sure our people have control of customs and immigration at Andrews?”

“Yes General, since Andrews isn’t a commercial airport, we’re using a hanger to check the people. We grabbed the entire TSA shift that was assigned. We have them under guard. Our people control the area.”

“Let’s see how the UN likes to be groped and stripped searched. You’re going to have to work quickly. You’re not going to have much time inspecting their weapons.”

“Yes sir.”

@@@@@

The President can’t believe two airliners crashed, he demands the UN continue the flights, he orders the Secretary of Homeland Security to lease planes and pilots from United to fly the UN troops to Andrews Air Force base. The third flight a fully loaded Boeing 777 is on final approach to Andrews, the two pilots are very nervous, one looks at the other saying, “I hope we don’t have any issues on our final.”

“Me, too, the last two crashes seem too suspicious, someone brought them down. The administration is just holding the news away from the press. I don’t think they’ll fire on a US flag plane.”

“I hope you’re correct. Because here we go.”

The plane lands without any issues, it follows a US Air Force jeep with a large “Follow me” sign into a hanger where the doors are open, the deplaning UN troops are met by six TSA agents wearing blue rubber gloves who show the troops where to go for immigration. There are signs printed in five languages telling the troops they will be strip searched. Since the TSA only sent a single team, the inspection takes six hours. Each trooper, male or female is made to strip; they are given a body cavity search. The troops are embarrassed and ashamed. When each troop is finished, they are led to a table where they find their clothing, they dress, male and female next to each other. They are then sent to collect their luggage where every bag is opened; the contents are dumped on the dirty hanger floor and searched by the TSA agents. When the search is completed, the troopers are told to pick up their belongings and board the buses out front. Of course, the buses have been sitting in the late June sun and humidly without the A/C turned on. In fact, none of the buses have working air conditioning, nor do their windows open. Walking onto the buses is like entering an oven. This after each UN trooper has flown nine hours and spent six hours in line to be welcomed to America. The UN troops don’t know that the inspectors have removed or damaged the firing pin in their weapons while they were getting welcomed to the country.

When the last UN trooper boards a bus, the phony TSA agents leave the airport laughing for hours. They change out of the TSA uniforms; they stop at the hanger where the real TSA agents are tied up. They release the naked agents into the woods twenty miles away from the airport. The Marines who pulled off the mission head to a local bar to enjoy a few cold ones. Many can’t stop laughing until they enter the bar.

@@@@@

The evening news sound bites are;

“The two planes, that crashed in the DC area, have been blamed on poor maintenance performed on the planes by non-union shops.”

“Two planes crash, Global Warming blamed for freak wind storm. Al Pore comments at 11.”

“Global warming or nonunion, you decide at 11.”

“The President sends condolences to the families of those lost in the crashes today, he also pushes for his carbon tax to reduce Global Warming freak accidents.”

@@@@@

The Secretary-General of the United Nations takes the podium in front of the Security Council. “Ladies and Gentlemen, I stand in front of you today with a heavy heart. We’ve lost two airplanes and 389 brave peacekeepers due to freak crosswinds caused by Global Warming. We must pass the international carbon reduction bill that’s been pending for two years. If we fail to reduce Global Warming, many more airplanes may run into these freak cross winds and crash. We might be on one of these planes, our families; our children might be on one of these airplanes. We can’t allow innocent lives to be lost because some refuse to accept the scientific facts of Global Warming. How many of the world’s children need die because we don’t believe what’s staring us in the face? I plead with you reconsider this bill and pass it within a fortnight.”

Chapter 25

“Sergeant, are you sure this is the right warehouse?”

“Private, just get the door open and remember don’t take your gloves off, no fingerprints. I’m sure this is the right warehouse. I checked the address twice.”

“Shouldn’t there be more guards here if this building is filled with firearms and ammo?”

“Nobody said the DHS were the sharpest tools in the shed; we knocked them out with the darts, which should keep them asleep for at least four more hours we have to be in and out within three.”

“I’m in.”

“Shine your light around the building.”

“Oh my God, Sarge, this place is filled with crates of weapons, if it ever caught fire it would blow a hole hundreds of yards deep.”

“People, just swap out the boxes with those in the trucks. We’re going to leave crates filled with bricks behind for the ones filled with weapons. Hurry people, hurry, we have a timetable to meet.”

Across the country, similar raids are taking place at different unmarked warehouses. Millions of weapons, the DHS purchased from private citizens, are being stolen with the intent of being returned to the citizens when they’ll need them the most.

A week later the DHS arrives at one of the warehouses to move the crates filled with weapons to be destroyed, a crate is accidently dropped, instead of firearms they see the crate is filled with bricks. The DHS agents decide to keep their mouths shut out of fear they’ll be accused of stealing the weapons. They do recommend increasing the security at the other warehouses containing firearms.

@@@@@

Only 2,000 of the originally committed 10,000 UN troops make it to Washington DC by July 3rd most of these had to fly to Toronto Canada. Where they had to clear Canadian and American customs. From Toronto, they ride a bus to Washington DC. When the UN Peacekeepers finally arrive they are tired, and shocked to see what waits for them. As the troops ride through the countryside, they see hand painted signs saying, “UN GO HOME.” And “Pretty blue helmets make good targets.” What shocks them the most is a bumper sticker they see on thousands of cars, it’s a blue UN helmet with bullet holes in it. A few whisper among themselves, a German sergeant asks the officer, “Sir, I thought the American government disarmed the population.”

“Sergeant, according to our intel, the Americans have been disarmed, we have nothing to fear” Just then two bullets hit the bus sending most of the UN troops diving to the floor of the bus.

“Sir, what do you call that?”

“Sergeant, I call that trouble with a capital T, I think we’re getting into a hotter situation then our senior officers briefed us on.”

“Do you think we’re going to have to fight the people?”

“Sergeant, we’re going to follow our orders.”

“Sir, some of my people are not going to fire on unarmed citizens regardless of our orders. Many of our grandfathers fought in the Second World War, we heard the stories. No sir, many of us are not going to fire on unarmed citizens. We’re not going to face murder charges.”

“Sergeant, if you and/or your people don’t follow legal orders, I’ll have you arrested. Do you understand?”

“Sir, an order, to fire on unarmed people, isn’t a legal order, my people won’t follow illegal orders.”

“Sergeant, I have no idea how you ever became an NCO, but you are, and until you refuse to follow my orders, I’ll let you manage your people, if you refuse to follow my or any other order, I’ll court marshal you, if I have to, I’ll shoot you myself.”

“Sir, that is your option, of course, it’s a shame that sometimes officers catch rounds that ricochet. Just facts on a battlefield.”

“Sergeant, we’ve never served together, I’m looking forward to enjoying this mission, meeting some nice young women, so don’t piss me off.”

“Yes sir.”

Everyone on the bus overheard the exchange; none wants to break the silence. The bus continues to Washington DC in silence.

@@@@@

July 1 dawns over the Capital Mall, which is covered in tents as far as the eye can see. Anywhere there is a patch of grass there’s a sleeping bag and or a tent. People have moved the barricades that closed the national monuments so that people can camp in them. Thousands of people have been put up in the 8th Street Marine barracks, more in the Navy Yard, thousands are staying at the National War College. The US Military opens the gates of every base in Washington to support the people they are pledged to protect. The military provides water, hot food and medical support to any who require it. While at the same time, the Parks Department is trying to tell everyone, they have to leave because they don’t have a permit. Parks officers are poking their heads into people’s tents saying, “The Mall is closed, the monuments are closed, it’s against the law to move the barricades.” After annoying everyone, they come in contact with a few Vietnam War veterans who grab the Parks officers, tie them up and place duct tape over their mouths, dragging them inside a rainbow colored tent. One vet says to the other, “That ought to quiet them down for a while, that tent is the meeting spot for the gay and lesbian transgender group, I’m sure they won’t be lonely.”

1.25 million people gather on the Mall on the morning of July 2nd; the numbers increase hourly, at 3PM on July 3rd, there are 5.3 million people surrounding the Mall. Walking is impossible; traffic is impossible. For all intents and purposes, Washington DC is closed; no one can get in or out of the city, at 5PM on July 3rd thousands of people are trying to walk over the bridges from Virginia and Maryland into DC. The Washington DC police have given up trying to force people out of the city, every government agency closed on July 1, the approaches from Maryland and Virginia were closed for all consumer vehicles on July 2nd Thousands have stormed the Capital building going office to office demanding impeachment. The Speaker of the House is discovered locked in his office, the crowd breaks down his door, grabbing him as he's trying to explain he's on the people's side of the issue. He’s dragged out of the building to face the American people. When they reach the front door of the Capital building, millions start shouting “IMPEACH, IMPEACH, IMPEACH.”

The Speaker tries to speak, he can’t hear himself think, the ground vibrates with the shouting and stamping of millions demanding impeachment. After twenty minutes, the Speaker can finally say something, he holds up a megaphone someone placed in his hands, “Americans” the crowd breaks into shouts of “USA, USA, USA, USA.”

“Please let me get a word in, please.”

The crowd starts to settle down, “I hear you, the Congress hears you. I’m calling Congress back into session. All members who are watching, all who hear this in any manner, come back, we have to vote to handle. I want Congress to return so we can vote on impeachment of the President.”

The crowd goes wild, watching on television, the President, throws a heavy crystal ashtray into the 60” HD television shattering the screen that spreads small pieces of glass all over the Oval Office. “Damn him, damn them. I want this crowd broken up right now. I want the Mall cleared; I want the entire city clear of this riff raft; they have to go now. I don’t care how; just get them out of my city. They’re an embarrassment to the country.”

The aide says, “Mr. President, this is their city…”

He never finishes as the President looks at him saying, “Secret Service! This man threatened me, arrest him.” Five agents run into the Oval office arresting the aide who’s screaming, “I didn’t threaten him, I didn’t.”

@@@@@

“General, you’re not going to believe what we have to tell you.”

Closing his laptop, General Brownstone looks up smiling, he says, “OK, this sounds like it’s going to be good. What’s up?”

“One of the Seal Teams had time on their hands, they decided to break into the closed hotel wing; you won’t believe who was being held there.”

“OK, I’m game, did DHS arrest Santa? Or the Easter Bunny because he left chocolate and not salads?”

The staff laughs, the Captain, says, “General, if you don’t mind, may I show you who was being held there?”

“Sure, I’m up for any good surprise right about now, however if you jokers dressed up some Seal as the Easter bunny, I promise you, you’ll be eating old MRE crackers and water for a week.”

The door opens, in walks Rash and Glenn, the general stands up so quickly his chair falls over backward, “Oh my God, I thought you two were dead. You mean you’ve been held in the hotel above our heads this entire time?”

Rash laughs saying, “General, Glenn and I are very much alive, and yes we were kidnaped and held in the hotel, no outside communications, no TV, nothing. We lost track of the days.”

“The three men hug each other, the general says, “Medic get in here ASAP, I want these two men checked out ASAP. Rash, Glenn we have a fully staffed small hospital down here.”

Glenn says, “General, we’re fine, how is it possible you’re sitting right under the DHS, and they don’t even know you’re here. Just before we were grabbed, we heard that the DHS was going crazy looking for you.”

“This bunker was closed and sealed years ago; it was my people who did the sealing; we come and go via the back door which exits in the woods. What can I do for you Gentlemen?”

“Both men say, “Would you happen to have internet access?”

Laughing, the general says, “Internet, hell, we have a full television studio here.”

The two are led off to be medically checked, get a hot meal and check the internet. They learn of the march in Washington DC, when the General joins them in the mess hall, Rash asks, “General is there a way you can get Glenn and I to DC?”

“You mean like a helicopter?”

“You have one?”

“Glenn, more than one, I think we can arrange that, first get some rest, we’ll leave at 0600, I have the perfect bird, it’s rigged up for Psy-ops, it has a loud speaker system installed, you can broadcast right from the bird, we can hover right over the Mall.”

“General, what about the UN troops?”

“You guys do what you do best, leave them to me. We’ve prepared for tomorrow, the fourth for a very long time.”

Both men look at the General, “Sir, can you share so we can use the information in our broadcasts?”

“In fact, that’s a very good idea. Let’s start in the beginning.”

@@@@@

“Admiral, there are more than five million people in the Mall with more trying to enter the city. They need food, water, and medical supplies.”

“What’s the parks department doing?”

“Sir, they’re trying to get people to go home.”

Laughing, the Admiral says, “Turn the battle group North towards DC, load up helicopters with supplies, we’ll make some vertical supply drops.”

“Admiral, what about the UN troops?”

“I’d like them to take a shot at us; I’m sure the Seals and Rangers would love to grab some blue helmets for souvenirs. Let’s go to DC. Let’s go support our people!”

“Admiral, we just got a message from the General, you’ll never guess who he’s hosting.”

“I have no idea, but if you tell me that General Sherman has returned, I’m tossing you overboard.”

“Would you believe, Rash Linebacker and Glenn Backer? They were being held in a closed wing of the hotel the DHS took over. A SEAL practiced breaking into the hotel rescuing a kidnaped captive, boy were they surprised when they broke into a locked hotel room to find the two of them playing chess.”

“I’d write those seals up, whoever heard of a seal team with time on their hands. “ Laughing, the Admiral continued, I guess the General is going to bring them with him to the Mall tomorrow?”

“Yes, sir, he didn’t tell his guests the plans, I think he assumes they’ll broadcast the truth that will excite the crowd even more than they already are,”

“That’s for sure.”

Picking up the internal phone, the Admiral says, “Captain take the reactors to 100%, you have permission to leave the escorts behind if they can’t keep up. The subs can keep up with the Lincoln. Fly four Hornets as CAP providing protective cover for the Lincoln.”

“Yes sir, the subs can, but not much else except for the four LCS ships.”

“Son don’t call the LCS a ship, they are a waste of good money. However, they have large flight decks and can travel at over 45 knots, send them with us. Ask the CAG to see me.”

A couple of minutes later, a Navy captain knocks on the Admiral’s door, “Admiral, you wanted to see me?”

“CAG, I’m concerned DHS will be flying armed drones over the crowd; I think they might turn tomorrow into a false flag event as an excuse to stop all such gatherings. What can we do to stop them from flying drones?”

“Sir, how much leeway so I have?”

“Captain, how much do you need?”

“Admiral, if we were to fly an F/A 18G electronic warfare fighter over the Mall, we can identify and jam all of their control signals.”

“I like it, what’s the problem?”

“We’re not supposed to fly military aircraft over the Mall unless a state of emergency has been declared.”

“You get your crews briefed; I’ll get the emergency order issued. I still have friends in the Pentagon.”

Smiling the CAG salutes and leaves the flag bridge, thinking, I hate being called up here, but this mission is going to be kickass, I’m going to fly it myself.

@@@@@

July 4th dawns clear, hot and very humid. Millions of US citizens have gathered on the Mall to express their displeasure with the Federal Government. 2,000 armed UN Peacekeepers are trying to ensure the crowd stays under control and also away of the White House. The UN troops are trying to remotely operate two drones over the crowd; the drones were launched to gather information and keep an eye on the large mass of people. The drones are armed in case the crowd turns violent.

In the communications van which controls the two drones, “Sarge, I’ve got problems, I can’t hold control of my drone. She keeps ignoring my signals, I think I have a clear channel, the next moment the channels jammed.”

“Sarge, mine too, something’s jamming my control signals.”

“Impossible, the crowd doesn’t have anything that can jam our signals, we’re using frequency hopping equipment; only the US or Russian militaries possess the technology to jam the signals, we know the American military is sitting on the sidelines.

Unseen by the UN troops a US Navy F/A 18G electronic warfare plane is flying circles 45,000 feet above the beltway, just outside of restricted airspace jamming the UN’s drone channels. The pilot of the F/A 18 is having fun with the UN troops. He flips on and off the jamming to keep the UN off balance. He has the two drones locked in his fire control radar, if the drones move towards the crowd, he’s going to blow them out of the air.

Speaker after speaker address the crowd from the podium set up in the mall. Each one brings the millions to their feet cheering. The Speaker of the House tries to take to the stage, as soon as he steps to the makeshift stage he’s booed by millions. He’s also drowned out by a Blackhawk helicopter which hovers over the stage. The multi-screen backdrop is hacked by the crew on the helicopter, one minute the American flag image is waving on the screens, the next are images of Rash and Glenn who address the millions;

“America, Happy July 4th! America happy independence day! The rumors of our deaths have been just that rumors and lies. As you can see, we’re alive. We were kidnaped by agents of the Federal Government. We were held in a closed hotel in West Virginia. We were rescued yesterday by Seal Team Two. Thank you to the brave men and women of the American military.”

Millions gathered on the Mall go wild. Cheering, yelling, and chants of “USA USA USA” reverberate off the Mall.

Glenn continues, “America, together we can overthrow the yoke of tyranny; together we can overthrow the yoke of federal enslavement the king in the White House is putting on all of us. Our forefathers warned us against administrations such as this one. Our rights come from God, not from these elected puppets. Our Constitution exists to limit the powers of the federal government, not we the people.”

The crowd screams and cheers.

Rash says, “America, rally to the core values of our country, the values our forefathers died to establish. America is unique in the world; we believe our freedoms comes from God, not from a king or emperor. Our forefathers fought against the very type of government we suffer under today. Will you give up your freedom for a free cell phone? Are you prepared to give up your freedom of speech or the right to bear arms for the lies spread by the would be king and morally repulsive press? America are you willing to become slaves to the government who is supposed to be a slave to you? America just say NO to tyranny, America just say NO to the taking of our rights; American stand together for liberty, stand together for freedom of religion, stand together for your right to assemble. America stand together…….”

The speech is never completed; a shoulder-fired missile rises up from the sidelines striking the helicopter. The missile came from where the United Nations troops are blocking access to the White House. The helicopter spins down to the ground, landing amid thousands of citizens who help pull the passengers out of the crashed bird just before it explodes throwing burning fuel over a large number in the crowd. People scream; they try to run, but can’t. The mass of the crowd forces everyone together. The United Nations Peace Keepers start to march into the crowd to disperse them. Fire hoses are turned on to move the people back however there’s no place for them to go. Thousands are trampled; thousands are injured by people trying to get out of the way of the flames and the United Nations troops.

Screaming sirens of ambulances and fire engines trying to get to the wreckage deafen everyone on the Mall. The rescuers are blocked by the mass of people trying to get away from the center of the Mall. Admiral Zander is watching images of the panic being sent to the carrier from the electronic warfare F/A 18s. He orders helicopters sent to bring help to the injured, he also orders the Marines on board to drop onto the United Nations troops to keep them away from the citizens. He tells the Marines, “Don’t kill them out of hand, just stop them from hurting the people, if any blue helmet takes hostile action, you’re permitted to so whatever is required to protect the people and yourselves.”

The Marines and Seals supporting General Brownstone watch in shock as the General’s helicopter is shot down, the Marine Major yells, “Sound the alert, get as many people into planes and helicopters to DC ASAP. Stop the blue helmets from killing our people, find the General, if he’s been taken alive or if they have his body, get him back from them. I want our first people on the ground in less than an hour.”

The President’s watching the events on a new large screen TV in the Oval Office is shocked when the helicopter is shot down, he’s frozen in place watching it land among the people he wanted off of the Mall. “What the fuck are they doing? What’s going on out there?”

The head of the President’s secret service details runs into the Oval Office, yelling, Mr. President, it’s not safe here, hundreds of thousands of people are coming this way. Sir, please come with us, we’re taking you to the bunker under the White House. They can’t access the elevator.”

“Stop them, they are radical racists who have to be stopped.”

“Mr. President our first objective is your safety. The Park Police, DC Police, Capital Police, and the FBI can handle the crowds. “

The crowd starts throwing everything they can get their hands on at the United Nations Peace Keepers, many yell, “Death to the UN.”

“Kill the UN troops, they killed Rash and Glenn.”

"The UN declared war on America."

“The young UN troopers are scared. They’re not used to be attacked by such a large crowd, the United Nations officer is afraid for his life, he orders, “Fire into the crowd, they’re rioting out of control, we must stop them from reaching the White House. FIRE.”

Many UN troopers refuse the order, some turn and try to get away from the ongoing mob, others fire into the mob. Given the wall of scared humanity in front of the UN troops, they can’t miss. Hundreds of people fall before the crowd grabs the UN troopers, some are gunned down with their own weapons while others are torn apart by the crowd. The Navy helicopters arrive; Seals and Marines drop down to help guide the people, twenty minutes later the general’s troops arrive to do the same. Major Grover, who's leading the Navy Seals and Marines, looks at the bodies of the dead UN troops. He turns to an LT Commander Seal saying, “I think they’ve done it this time, the UN is going to use this as an excuse to land more troops and help the President maintain total control. We can’t allow this to happen.”

“Major, are the people ready to rise up, not the million here, but the average John and Jane?”

“Commander, that's the real question, isn’t it?”

Chapter 26

6:00 PM EDT the time when most of America watches one of the network news programs, the thirty minutes when the majority of Americans are programmed for the next 24 hours. The White House provides the media with the day’s talking points. Tonight every news program opens with an image showing 5,724 American flags flying at half mast, images of bodies lying on the Capital Mall, images of the smoking crashed helicopter, images of a little girl trying to wake up her mother who died from a UN bullet. The newscasters all wear black armbands on their right arms, many have had tears sprayed on their faces. They look into the camera’s lens and say, “American, today is our saddest day, today domestic terrorists have killed 5,724 of our brothers, sisters, mothers, fathers and children. Yes, children. These monsters didn’t care about crushing the life out of the small hearts of our children, look at the images from the Capital Mall, see the bodies, see the destruction, see the broken bodies. Look at the lines of volunteers helping our heroic first responders (all of the images of the US Military assisting have either been altered to change their uniforms or the military has been completely cut from the images and videos). Even the United Nations sent over a thousand support workers to help establish order. The United Nations have offered the President assistance to hunt down these domestic terrorists. The President, who will shortly address the grieving nation, has accepted the United Nations selfless act of assistance. America, today racist domestic terrorists have struck on our day of celebration; they struck the peaceful families who gather in Washington DC every year to celebrate our independence day. America, in 1941 just under 3,000 people were lost when Pear Harbor was attacked, on 9/11/2001, just over 3,000 people died when we were attacked, today we lost 5,724 innocents. Today our country has been given the largest black eye in our history. Join with us in a moment of silent prayer for the families of the 5,724 who were murdered today, Yes, they were murdered, America, the President of the United States;

Sitting behind his desk, wearing a black armband the President looks into the cameras saying, “My fellow American’s, today, on our independence day, domestic terrorists struck the peaceful crowds on the Mall here is Washington DC. Today is the darkest day in our long history. Today these domestic terrorists killed more of our brothers, sisters and children than died on 9/11. Today, 5,274 of our fellow American’s gave up their lives. Why? Why would anyone attack families who came to Washington DC to join the celebration? What kind of animals would do this on July 4th? What kind of demons would ascend from hell and murder innocents? I’ll tell you what we’ve found out about these murdering demons so far, the investigation has just started; in the days, to come we’ll have much more information. I’m coming to you and asking for your help in helping us catch these evil murders. We know who their leader is; it breaks my heart to say that one of bravest, one of most loyal, one of the military officers who’s served this country for 30 years led the attack. It’s clear now that when we dissolved the US Marines, because we don’t need 180,000 trained killers representing America. General Rodney Brownstone, the last Commandant of the Marine Corps, masterminded the attack on the Capital Mall. We don’t know who else supported him, but we do know that he has been hiding in a secret base where he’s been plotting to overthrow the legally elected government of the United States. My fellow Americans, this administration was legally elected. I am the legally elected President of these United States. My administration has done so much good for our people; I increased the minimum wage; I brought affordable health care to everyone. I’ve made it possible for every family to have free preschool. I’ve made it possible that everyone, who wants to go to college, can do so without cost to them. I’ve taken guns off the streets, for the first time in our 236-year history our streets are SAFE. I did this by buying back the firearms and ammo; we’ve paid out $1.74 billion in cash, cash, to buy back these unnecessary firearms. I’ve cleaned up the air and water; we’ve stopped the fracking from polluting our water supplies. I’ve passed regulations to increase fuel efficiently in cars to 65 MPG. I’ve increased the standards for large trucks from 4 or 5 to 15MPG, I’ve cut carbon dioxide pollution. I’m stopping the tides from rising due to slowing Global Warming. I’ve cut taxes on the poor while making the 1% pay their fair share. I’ve forced the 1% to share their wealth with the neediest. I’ve done all of this for the country, for all of you, yet these racist terrorists attack and kill our peaceful families because they can’t accept a black man sitting in the White House.

“My fellow American’s, I need your help. I need your eyes and ears. These racist domestic terrorists are hiding among us. I need you to help us find them. If you see them, if you see an ex-Marine we want to speak with them, everyone knows that Marines are an unusual group of people, they live by the saying, “once a Marine always a Marine.” These people pledge their allegiance to each other and not to me, their Commander in Chief. They place themselves above the rest of us because we weren’t one of them. I ask you, is this, right? We as a people should never have allowed an organization like the Marines to have been established. The nation made a mistake, a mistake the country paid for today. Help me find them, help me bring these animals to justice. Help me make sure an attack like this never happens again.

I’m announcing the formation of a Citizen Defense Force to help defeat domestic terrorism. The Citizen Defense Force will be led by the Department of Homeland Security; it’s open to everyone above the age of 18. Remember unlike most right-wing organizations, my citizen force is open to all races; I encourage our African American inner city young to apply, help us, help you. We have to overturn every rock to find these terrorists, I come before you tonight to pledge, I will find these terrorists and I’ll bring them to justice. I’ll find them guilty of mass murder. I will break the back of these right wing racist murderers. Let me say, not every Republican or member of the Tea Baggers is a murderer. However I know that they are all capable of turning against the greater good. Help me root these demons out of their dark holes, help me force them to stand in the light and accept the punishment for the murdering of the innocents. Our friends around the world have shed tears with us; they stand with us shoulder to shoulder. The Secretary-General of the United Nations has pledged to help us in the hunt for these criminals. Our friends in the UN will be easy to see, they will be driving bright white vehicles with the blue UN painted on their sides, their peaceful support staff will be wearing blue helmets. They wear these, so they are easy to see. If you see someone suspicious, if you know of a group hiding who may be a part of a right-wing terrorists group report them to our friends from the United Nations. They are here to help us. Don’t fear these new visitors, they are our friends. They’re here to help our first responders until our Citizen Defense Force is up to full strength to help patrol our neighborhoods. I’m asking every one of you to help us in our country's time of need. America, I pledge to you such attacks are going to end. America, I thank you for your support. I’m ordering the normal fireworks displays that celebrate the 4th of July to be suspended this year in memory of the 5,724 who died today.”

Headlines flash across every television screen and internet pages:

“5,724 souls killed by right wing Marine four-star general.”

“The President asks for our help.”

Pictures of the general and pictures of ex-US Marine senior officers who the President knows support the general are shown on every channel. Wanted posters offering millions in reward for information are posted on buildings walls, post offices, telephone poles and the internet. Anchors on the World News Network take to the air saying, “Did you see Rash and Glenn fly into the Mall with the terrorists today? Did you believe they were killed? These two charlatans are partners hand in hand with General Brownstone and the attack on the Mall. The entire story of their being kidnaped was so much bullshit, they made up the entire story so when they returned their ratings would skyrocket. Their attack helicopter crashed in a bombing run on the families on the Mall; no one has seen these two rebels since their attack. We as a reliable news organization have to ask you, our viewers, why would these two national radio and television hosts partner with criminal elements who murdered 5,724 Americans on the 4th of July? We should force their programs off the air; their programs have stayed on the air with guest hosts while these two demons have been collecting the profits while others performed the work. What other proof does anyone need that these two are members of the dreaded 1% and are stealing from all of us, then they partner with the murderers? We must come together to demand their shows be taken off the air. Call the FCC today to demand their programs be blocked. This isn’t a freedom of speech issue; watching or listening to these two programs supporting the demons that helped kill 5,724 of us.”

@@@@@

Twenty bright white vehicles with the blue UN symbol painted on their sides pull up to the main front gate of the Pentagon. “Guard, I am UN General Vladimir Pushkin, my orders come directly from the United Nations Secretary-General and your President, your Commander and Chief to allow us entry. My orders are to take over as the temporary commanding general for the remaining United States Military. I have a signed order from your President for the termination of all US Military officers above the rank of 06. I’m to present myself to your General Dempsey, who is ordered to assist me the transfer of command. You will now open the gate and grant us access.”

“Sir, the Pentagon is currently on lockdown, I will need to verify your orders with my commander, if you could please give me a copy of your orders and your ID I’ll contact my chain of command.”

“Sergeant, I just informed you, I am your chain of command, I am your new commanding general.”

“Sir, yes, you have so informed me, however as I’m sure you understand all orders have to be verified. If I were to allow you entry and you were not who you say, you are there would be many issues.”

“Sergeant, OPEN the gate, this is a direct order.”

“Sir, you cannot give me an order, you are not in my chain of command, and you are not an American officer. I don’t recognize your authority. If you would please wait, I’ll contact my officer.”

“Who is your commanding officer?”

“Sir, Major Grover, he has recently returned from a brief deployment with Admiral Zander.”

“Ah yes, the famous Admiral Zander, where is he? We’ve been looking for him for a while; we have a warrant for him for crimes against humanity.”

“Sir, I don’t know the Admiral’s location.”

“Don’t worry sergeant, we’ll locate all of these rebels, we’ll bring them to justice. Where is your Major Grover?”

“Sir, he’s on the way with our rapid response force.”

Coming around the right-hand side of the Pentagon are six Bradley fighting vehicles escorting six Abrams main battle tanks, the tank’s 120mm canons are pointing at the line of twenty white vehicles lined up at the Pentagon’s main gate. The UN troops look up, hearing the sound of helicopters, they see five American AH 64D attack helicopters flying directly towards them.

Major Grover steps out of the lead Humvee, he snaps to attention in front of the UN general, the major says, “General, what brings you to the Pentagon?”

“Ah Grover, I see you got yourself promoted, who did you kill to accomplish this? Major, I’d like to say it’s good to see you again, but it’s not. Who the hell put you in charge of security, you’re nothing more than a special ops assassin. Do you plan to use your force to kill me?”

“No General, I plan to show you its a very bad idea to visit us today, maybe if you had called ahead, we could have booked an appointment. I think the General has an opening in his calendar for July 30, 2029, do have your staff call his to confirm the appointment.”

“Major, I have valid orders, I am entering and following my orders.”

“General, one word from me, and none of you will live to have lunch. It’s your choice. If my troops open fire, it only means I have more forms to fill out, and I hate paperwork.”

“Yes, I heard that about you. I understand you only like wet work. (Assassinations) We have a little score to settle from one of your missions in Africa; your target was a close friend of mine.”

“General, I carry out my orders, I’m sorry if my mission was a friend of yours, I always accomplish my missions, my current mission is the security of the Pentagon, I will carry out my mission to the best of my ability.”

“Major, we’re leaving; however, we will return, and I will see you hang.”

“General have a good day, and make sure you have your staff confirm the appointment with the General.”

“Major, fuck you.”

@@@@@

“Admiral, the UN has tried to enter the Pentagon, they have orders to replace all of our officers above the grade of 06.”

“I think it’s time to empty the Pentagon and relocate to our backup headquarters. Move most of the staffs to the carriers, they’re much harder for the UN to attack. We should be able to empty the Pentagon and be gone before the blue helmets return, won’t they be surprised? Tell Major Grover to make sure he leaves a few welcome gifts for the UN in the Pentagon.”

The Admiral’s aide smiles, “Aye aye sir.

@@@@@

Lines had formed before dawn in front of the Citizen Defense Force recruiting offices, getting a job that encouraged getting even with the 1% and other racists were better than a dream come true. Every person who applied was accepted, “Sir, I gots me a record, I spent three years in jail.”

“No problem, know how to use a gun?”

“Sure dude, want to see mine?”

“No, just sign here.”

The President’s Citizen Defense Force grew overnight to over a hundred thousand, in a week the numbers reached six hundred thousand. The only issue that slowed down the growth of the citizen force is the shortage of the new black uniforms.

@@@@@

“Brad, what do you think?”

“Ron, this can’t be America. Citizen Defense Force, signing up inner city youth with no experience, declaring the attack on the Mall a domestic terrorist attack when the UN brought the General’s helicopter down? They started it. The President set up the entire thing. He did it to remove conservatives from the picture. He did it to ensure he and his party ruled forever. “

“Brad, look at how the people are eating it up, they believe him, they believe we attacked the people on the Mall, we didn’t do it, we were both there, we saw the UN fire the missile, we saw them fire into the crowd. What happened to the truth?”

“The winners always get to write their version of history, right now the President thinks he’s winning, he’s telling his version of the truth, he’ll have his version of history written, our children and their children will be taught the Tea Party and conservatives are demons. How does it feel to be a demon?”

“Damn, I must have left my claws at the front door. Why don’t the people see the truth? Millions must have seen the missile rise from the UN position.”

“No, they didn’t, those images never made it online. The administration will never allow that video to be seen. Anyone, who videotaped it on their phones, will lose their phones, anyone, who tries to post the real images, will find the NSA takes their images down, and they will get a visit from the FBI or DHS agents showing them the error of their ways.”

@@@@@

“General, we’re having problems trying to gain momentum, the administration controls the press, and the internet, they control what people see and hear. Blaming us for the attack was a brilliant plan by the administration, they turned the entire country against us they turned our neighbors against us. In one speech, the President won the PR battle. We’re fighting a retreating holding action. We need to get ahead of the press war, or we’ll lose the people once the people are lost, the country is lost.”

“Captain, the President pulled a fast one on us. He outmaneuvered us. Let’s go back to trying to sway some members of the press again, it had started to work, the three we scared the crap out of started to question some of what was going on, let’s go back and pay these three another visit, maybe they can help introduce us to some of their friends.”

“General, do you think they’ll find us here?”

“I'm sure they will; I’ve made plans with Admiral Zander to transfer us to one of his carriers, we’re leaving tomorrow at 0400. We’ll take helicopters to a small airstrip on the Virginia coast; we’ll refuel and fly to the carrier that is off the coast.”

“Yes sir, I’ll get the staff packing.”

Just as the two are finishing their conversation, the alarm sounds, a broadcast sounds through the entire bunker, “Now hear this, now hear this, DHS in depth is approaching the hotel, 20 plus vehicles, many MRAPs.”

The General says, “That didn’t take long, get the staff out the back door, anything, they can't carry, is to be destroyed. Hurry, this is no place to fight, there are innocents upstairs in the hotel.”

Chapter 27

Every television channel, broadcast and cable, every website, every cell phone is frozen, an alarm sounds from every device. A face wearing a Guy Fawkes mask appears on every device, screen saying, “America we are Anonymous. We have warned you that the Federal Government has lied to you. Let us show you what happened on July 4 on the Capital Mall. Watch and learn the truth.” The displays change to a view of the Capital Mall; the crowd is viewed from different angles and different viewpoints, images of hundreds of banners and signs are displayed. “America, these were not families on the Mall just waiting for the fireworks; these people were you, your neighbors, your brothers and sisters who flooded the Mall to protest the overreaching government and President. Look at these signs, most are handmade, look at the peacefulness of the people, now let’s look at the sidelines, do you see the lines of UN blue helmets? Do you see them standing on the sidelines dressed in riot gear? Do you see them holding assault rifles? Let’s zoom in and check these long black tubes the two people on the left are holding, America do you see them? These are shoulder-fired anti-air defense missiles. Who fired against whom? America do you see any weapons in the hands of the protesters? Do you see the weapons in the hands of the UN troops, now let’s look at the DC police, do you see what we’re zooming in on? Do you see the weapons? Do you see the riot gear? Do you see the tear gas launchers? America do you see the armored tank-like vehicles? The Federal Government, the President, wanted a riot; he wanted violence, he’s using the violence he created to become a dictator. America the President is censoring and making up stories through his friends in Hollywood. He’s creating false news stories. Do not believe what you see on the network broadcast programs. America do you know the Federal Government has censors in every newsroom? America do you know you’re about to lose your bill of rights? America, the helicopter, was shot down by the UN troops, the UN fired on the defenseless crowd. The UN killed your brothers and sisters. Think Rash and Glenn made up the story? Here are the images of the hotel they were kept in; here are images of the room they were locked in. Notice, there’s no TV, no telephones, notice their clothing is still in the closet. Notice the tags on the food trays, America do you see their names printed on the meal cards and menus? The DHS kidnaped and held them hostage. America open your eyes; America do you think you have a free press? America last year the country was ranked 47th in the world for having a free press. Why is the government arresting journalists who write a story not on their approved list? America, we are the only country in the world where freedom of the press is written into our bill of rights, and yet we are falling below 50th in the world for having a free press. America wake up before it’s too late. The Tea Party didn’t initiate violence; the Federal Government did. The President asked the UN to send troops to America to control you. Here is a copy of the agreement signed by the UN Secretary-General and our would-be king, the President. Read it here, download it read it yourself. The troops are here to control you. The President is planning to break America's back; the President is planning on the UN making our laws. He wants the UN to tax our people, to control our lives. America this isn’t who you elected. America the time is now to rise up and say NO MORE, ENOUGH IS ENOUGH. America your time is running out. We are Anonymous. We now return the control of your broadcasts to the Federal Government.”

Every device returns to normal, the media “talking heads” are confused by the interruption of the countries communications networks by Anonymous. None of the news people can explain how this was done, some try to explain the images just shown were photoshopped images, some say the images and videos were computer generated, after all why would the peaceful UN shoot at Americans?”

On the other hand, many in Middle America start asking themselves what’s the real truth. Some question what’s going on in their country. Some think that the story, the media has been saying, isn’t logical. Many think Anonymous is starting to make sense. Why would they take over the entire broadcast network and make up lies, On the other hand, the local news broadcasts have changed recently. There are more stories about the right wing, showing anyone who disagrees with the administration in a bad light. The local media and press have destroyed various families for their outspoken opposition to the current administration. Many have heard stories of homes being broken into in the middle of the night. Children come home from school telling tales of children who aren’t in school anymore, stories about families that no longer live in the homes they used to. They appear to have just disappeared.

Not all agree that Anonymous is telling the truth, most of the minorities, who got the President elected, know their savior wouldn’t, couldn’t do any of the things Anonymous has accused him of. They “know” the UN is here to protect them from the racists, they “know” the 1% has been enslaving them, they “know” the President found a mess when he took office. He’s been spending every waking moment working to improve the average person’s life. He’s trying to correct the wrongs the previous racist Presidents put in place to hold the minorities down. Their President is working for them every minute of the day. They decide to not accept some clown wearing a mask vs. their President, who's always sided with them.

@@@@@

Three reporters wake up to find a hand being held over their mouths. “Good morning, how are you this fine morning? We’d like to remind you we had an agreement. We had what we considered a deal, if we think the deal was broken, we’re going to have to ensure we move ahead with what we promised would happen to you. Do you remember what we discussed? If you do, blink your eyes twice. Good for you. Now, I’m going to leave an outline of the story we want you to report on your night stand if you don’t report this story in a good light within 48 hours we’ll be back, only next time we won’t be so friendly. You don’t want that do you? If you don’t want us to return blink twice. Good we’re in agreement. Now I’m sure we’re going to enjoy watching your news program. Oh and please don’t try any of that censor bullshit crap, we don’t buy it, you’ll find a way to slip this into your reports. If we do have to return, you won’t like it, it will be, shall we say, very painful for you. I have a friend who likes to deliver pain, lots of pain, think about having certain parts of your body slowly removed. What’s that? Are you getting sick thinking about the cost of not doing what we’re asking? Very good, we’re going to leave you now, remember, 48 hours, or we’ll be back with my friend.”

@@@@@

Hundreds of DHS and UN troops arrive at the Greenbrier Resort and Hotel. Some surround the buildings; some run into the building searching for the elevator to the bunker. What the agents and UN troops don’t know is the hotel walled over the elevators when the bunker was sealed and closed. No one remains at the hotel who remembers where the elevators were. The DHS agents and UN troops have to use metal scanners looking for metal behind the walls of the hotel lobby. Of course, there is a small problem with this plan, that problem is the hotel is built of steel, behind every wall are steel frames. The UN Captain suggests to the DHS lead agent they start tearing the walls apart to see what’s behind them, the DHS agent agrees when a lawyer appears with a court order informing the agents that they are on private property, they require a search warrant to be on the hotel premises, and they require probable cause to do anything to the building. The lawyer hands them a document stating without proper court ordered documents they have to leave the hotel. Two local television crews are filming the entire interaction between the agents and lawyer. They have also recorded the agents using metal wands over the lobby walls while at the same time refusing to answer the hotel General Manager’s questions. The news crews record the interaction between the agents and the hotel guests who are ordered to leave the lobby and not ask any questions; they record the TSA agents trying to search every hotel guest. This continues for an hour, when ten West Virginia State Police cars arrive; the cars are followed by four West Virginia SWAT MRAP vehicles. The state police surround the agents and UN troops saying, “I’m West Virginia State Police Captain Lewis Andrews, who are you? What are you doing here? And why haven’t you left when the General Manager of this facility politely requested you leave the facility. We’ve received complainants stating you’re stopping guests without probable cause; you’re searching the guests’ bodies, and you’re damaging private property.”

“Listen, Captain Andrews, we’re here as representatives of the Federal Government, we’re here searching for domestic terrorists, we have every right to be here. I want you to leave, you’re interfering with a federal investigation.”

“Agent Browns if I don’t have proper court signed documents in my hand in one minute my people will place your people under arrest.”

“Captain, if your people take one step forward, I’ll order mine to open fire.”

“Agent, did you just tell me you were going to order your people to open fire on my officers?”

“You got it, Captain redneck, now leave us alone.”

“Agent, you have made a threat against West Virginia State Police officers, you and all of your people are hereby under arrest. SWAT, disarm these people and place them under arrest for threatening us.”

“Listen Captain crap for brains, you can’t touch us, we’re federal police officers, and we’re here with United Nations troops.”

“First of all agent, none of you are police officers, you're paper pushing government workers who've been given a phony badge, secondly the United Nations has no authority in America and none at all in West Virginia. Lower your weapons and put your hands over your head.”

“Captain, just go away, this is none of your business.”

The State police captain says, “Arrest them, use of force is authorized.”

The two groups aim weapons at each other, the UN captain says, “Captain we have more people, lower your weapons and leave us.”

A voice is heard behind the UN captain, “Look behind you; I have forty heavily armed SWAT people surrounding you, we will open fire if we have to. Lower your weapons and raise your hands before I count to five. Otherwise, you will all die here. One, two, three, four...”

The UN commander says, “Wait! Men, lower your weapons, put your hands up.”

The West Virginia police arrest the agents and UN troops, they are taken to a holding facility; the West Virginia Governor has signed a declaration stating the DHS agents and UN troops are domestic terrorists they are not allowed a phone call or outside contact.

@@@@@

UN troops in Arlington Virginia watch the steady flow of helicopters shuttling the senior officers out of the Pentagon, the lower ranks are being taken by escorted bus to a destination where they will be provided transportation to one of the alternative military headquarters or to the fleet off the coast of Virginia.

“General, can’t we do anything?”

“Major, how? We don’t have any heavy weapons; they have main battle tanks watching us watch them, they are flying attack helicopters over the Pentagon, look up, see the fighters, there must be at least two of their carriers off the coast. Each can hold an air force of up to 72 warplanes. How do we fight that?”

“Sir, we have missiles.”

“I’d like to live another day, if we fire one missile or even pick one up, we’ll be dead, either by rockets from the attack helicopters or a bomb dropped by one of their fighters. There’s nothing we can do to stop or slow them down. I have a grand total of 2,000 people under my command; they’ve moved more than 5,000 in the past hour. Just one of their carriers has 5,000 sailors on it. One of their Marine transport ships carries 2,000 Marines. Do you want to fight 2,000 or more US Marines who are unhappy we’re even standing on their soil? They think we’re contaminating their land; they look at us like we’re a disease to be killed. I’ve seen the look of pure hate in the guard’s eyes. Major Grover is a cold-hearted assassin, one of their best; he’s a US Marine. If he’s given the mission to take one of us out, he will get us. We won’t be able to hide anywhere. I’ve seen his handiwork; I don’t want to be one of his trophies. I think we’ll sit here and watch, when they’re done we’ll comply with our orders and take control of the Pentagon after they leave. It’ll be empty and useless, but we’ll be able to say we completed our orders.”

“Captain, we were told there are no more Marines.”

“Yes you’re correct, the American President said he dissolved the Marines, would you like to tell those Marines sitting offshore they are no longer relevant? Would you like to tell the assassin Major Grover he’s no longer a Marine? If you do, tell me now, so I have some time to compose a nice letter to your wife. I’ve seen the American Marines fight; they think they are the world’s best fighters. In my opinion, they are most likely correct. Every one of them is a warrior; every one of them is a rifleman first. We won’t see tomorrow if we go to war against them. They have their own land warriors, air force, and armor. We are light troops; we won’t survive five minutes of contact with them. This mission isn’t worth my life, is it worth yours?”

@@@@@

“Middle America” is thinking something is very wrong. The topic of conversation at local coffee shops, bars, and restaurants is, “Why did the President lie, what’s the real story, why did the troops fire on the people of the Mall? What’s going on? More and more people start to open their eyes seeing their government is a new light, they begin to realize their way of life is at risk.

A few decide it’s time to seek out the grass roots anti-government protesters. Some start to post comments and questions on social network sites, they’re amazed to see their posts disappear, they type in new comments while they watch their comments are deleted from the sites. After four attempts, they get the message they are being blocked, their profile is blocked, their right to post comments is suspended due to hate speech and racist comments. They are also informed their posts have been forwarded to the US Department of Homeland Security for review. Accessing their email account, they discover their email accounts frozen with a screen that says they're online privileges have been suspended due to hate speech and potential seditious statements. Some try to access the web from different browsers; all are locked. Most sit in front of their computer screens with a shocked look on their faces. None of them believed they could be censored here in the middle of America. Many receive an automated phone call informing them they are being watched by the Department of Homeland Security for their seditious actions. They should not leave their city, and if they own a passport, it has been suspended. Their right and privilege to travel by air has been suspended, they learn they have been placed on the no-fly list until their case is closed. When trying to talk to a case officer, the people learn they can’t reach a live person; the government has the right to place anyone at any time on the no-fly list and doesn’t have to explain their reason for it, not do they have to even agree to have a hearing over the no-fly status.

College students discover they can’t fly to their schools, business people learn they can’t fly to meetings. They learn they have been corralled and forced to remain in their towns. Those trying to leave by their cars learn the roads have been blocked; they are stopped and told to return to their homes.

Suddenly messages start to appear all over America, “Fed up? Had enough? Think it’s time to fight back? Think you have what it takes to be a minute man? Call 888-555-5555, leave your email address. We’ll check you out and contact you.”

Craigslist has messages asking, “Are you fed up? Had enough? Call 888-555-5555 leave your email.”

Many think it’s the government trying to see who’s getting ready fight back, the next day Anonymous posts, “America this is Anonymous, we know who you are when you call 888-555-5555, don’t be afraid, we know you and your actions by your IP address, we’ll know who’s been naughty and who’s been nice, we’re watching everyone. We know whose heart is pure and whose heart is dark. DHS/NSA/FBI if you think you can trick us, come try. Go to the library, go to a web café, borrow a computer, there are ways you can get online, we’ll see you. We see everything. We are Anonymous.”

@@@@@

“Ron, look at these posts, do think we should call?”

“Why? When Joshua wants us, he’ll contact us.”

“What if he’s been captured? What if he can’t contact us? What do we have to lose?”

“Talked me into it, anyway, I’m not here, I was never here, I don’t exist. Laughing, I pick up the phone and dial 1-888-555-5555 a voice answers saying, “Hello, we are Anonymous, America we are here to help you overthrow tyranny, if you think you have what it takes to be a new minute man, speak your email. Now.”

“I say, BRAD@aol.com.”

“Thank you, please hold one minute, we hope you enjoy the music we have selected for your enjoyment.”

My favorite song starts playing. A moment later a voice says, “Brad thank you for calling, someone will be in touch with you within 48 hours, by the way, Joshua has a message for you, he says, the minutes are counting down. Goodbye Brad.” Click. Anyone trying to listen to the phone calls only hears static.

Chapter 28

The President flies to Detroit so he can meet with the local Muslim leaders who claim control of 70% of the inner city. The local leaders have close ties to the international Muslim Brotherhood whom the President has provided both verbal and financial support in addition to weapons in his previous five years in office.

The President decides to make the trip into a major PR event, he informs the networks he’ll be giving a national address at 4:00PM EDT, timed to ensure the evening national news broadcasts carry his remarks.

“I’m here today in central Detroit; many have said that the city of Detroit went bankrupt because of the policies of the Democrat party, this is a total lie. Look around this city, the city that used to be the worldwide leader of the automotive industry. Look at it now, Detroit looks like a war zone, why? Because the 1% that controls the automotive industry shipped jobs overseas, they closed factories rather than pay these good and decent people a living wage. They left this city empty; they killed the very soul of Detroit and moved it out of the country. America how can we trust industrial leaders who strip our cities, how can we trust industrial leaders who only care about their profits? They don’t care one penny about the people they left behind. They’ve broken families; they’ve left these people hungry, homeless and without hope. Why would they do this? They did it for an additional dollar on their bottom line. The people of Detroit have suffered due to the greed of the 1% racist class. How many of the leaders of the automotive industry are minorities? How many of their board members are minorities? Who in these companies that have revenues in the tens of billions of dollars is looking out for the people they enslave to build their products? Look at the latest news, a major international automotive company opened a new factory in one of our southern states, this is very good news, they decided to bring the jobs here, building the cars our people buy, to be made by our people here. Sounds great doesn’t it? But wait, the UAW tries to help these poor workers; they tried to bring union protection and security to the factory’s workers, what happened? The 1% managing class threatened the poor enslaved workers that if they voted for the union, they would be fired for cause without any benefits. The racist 1% forced these poor workers to lose the benefits the union was ready to bestow on the poor overworked people. This must end! I’m going to sign an executive order mandating that every factory, every company that employees more than 50 people are going to have to hold a union vote, a vote overseen by our friends from the United Nations who will ensure it's a fair vote.

“Let’s come back to Detroit. This poor city was left without hope, without support, without even sufficient first responders to support the people who were left behind here. Did anyone come forward to provide support for these poor people? YES, who is this group who came here to provide comfort, provide food for both the people’s bodies and souls, provide housing, these people are the local branch of the Muslim Brotherhood. They are the ONLY group who’s come forward to provide the help these poor people required after the 1% left them behind like one leave trash on the curb for someone else to pick up.

“I’m here today to provide the local Muslim Brotherhood with a check for $50 million. I’m also here to provide them with a certificate empowering them to carry side arms like our regular first responders do. This group is here protecting the lives of those left behind. We as a charitable country will never allow our people to be left behind like yesterday's trash. I’m reaching out to all of the other local chapters of the peace loving and charitable Muslim Brotherhood, do the same in the cities they live in, the Federal Government will do the same for you as we’re doing here in Detroit.

“I’m also ordering the IRS to ensure companies that employ more than 100 people don’t shift jobs out of the country, if you shift the jobs; the IRS will penalize you. We need you to look after the very people who enabled you to build your companies. You didn’t build your companies by yourself; you couldn’t have built your company if it hadn’t been for the government providing you with support, and the infrastructure you use to run your companies. You will pay the people back for the expense of using the resources they paid for.

“My fellow American’s we must come together and work together improving all of our lives, not just enrich the 1%. We can’t be swayed by phony PR broadcasts and web announcements, I beg you to look at the group that calls themselves Anonymous as a group of criminals, these criminals have illegally taken over our broadcasts and hacked the internet we all require for our daily lives. I know who I can trust, why would you give half a seconds thought to someone wearing a Halloween mask in July? If this Anonymous was serious wouldn’t they want you to know who they are? Why do they hide? What are they afraid of?”

Within four days, the Muslim Brotherhood in Detroit starts forcing non-Muslims out of Detroit. They fly the Muslim Brotherhood flag on all of the buildings in the area they control. They outlaw flying the American flag; they storm and burn every Catholic Church and Jewish Synagogue. Every Jewish owned business is burned; every Jewish owned home and business is burned, every Jewish person, who remained in Detroit, is forced out of the city at gunpoint. The Jewish Defense League arrives in Detroit to protect the Jewish families; they are armed with weapons smuggled in from the Israeli embassy. The JDL sets up a barricade closing off a part of Detroit; the Muslim Brotherhood rushes the barricade, only to be cut down by automatic rifle fire. The Muslim Brotherhood regroups and rushes the barricade armed with their weapons. The battle rages for hours; Molotov Cocktails fly from both groups. The barricade catches fire which spreads to nearby buildings. The fire department refuses to respond in the middle of a firefight. Local families call and email the Governor’s office for help. She decides this is a local event, which the local police should be able to handle. That is until the media picks up the story; they start reporting the lines of bodies, rows of buildings burning out of control. The media reports the poor Muslims who are just trying to improve the local families who were attacked by the racists 1% Jewish families and outside help provided by the Israeli Army, the press screams Detroit has been invaded by a foreign military. The President orders the Federalized National Guard to break up the battle and arrest the members of the JDL.

The images of the battle are carried across the country, the mainstream media reports the JDL attacked the Muslims, the internet and Wolf News reports the JDL came to protect the Jews left in Detroit from another Holocaust, which the mainstream media reports never happened, it was all made up by the Zionists who control the world’s financial networks.

@@@@@

The evening news programs report the battle in Detroit and also battles in Atlantic City, New Jersey where the local President’s Citizen Defense Forces, made up mostly of the inner city youth decide the casino’s that line the boardwalk are loaded with the racist 1%. Their call for taking over the casinos has been broadcast for days, the Jersey Shore Patriotic militia decides they’re not going to allow the casinos be burned down. Hundreds of patriots from the South Jersey Shore and Eastern Pennsylvania jump into their cars and trucks to defend Atlantic City. The two groups meet three blocks from the boardwalk. Both sides are armed with outlawed weapons; the patriots built barricades of schools buses and trucks to block the CDF from reaching the boardwalk and casinos. The battle rages for hours; the CDF rushes the barricade again and again. The patriots hold them off. That is until the CDF figures out they can use side streets to get around the patriots; three hundred manage to slip in behind the barricade, attacking the patriots from their rear. The patriots weren’t watching their rear; they are quickly overwhelmed with 85% of them killed. The CDF storm the casinos, they drag out the people in the gambling areas, where everyone is beaten. The hotel rooms are ransacked; then the hotels are set on fire. The flames of the burning casinos can be seen by ships traveling as far as the horizon. Many call the Coast Guard to report what appears to be a large ship on fire. The Coast Guard dispatches two C 130 search planes to look for the burning ships. They don’t locate a burning ship, the USCG sees the boardwalk casinos and stores along the boardwalk burning out of control. The Coast Guard calls the Atlantic City fire department, who informs the Coasties about the two groups fighting it out. The Mayor of Atlantic City ordered the fire department not to respond to calls for help. The mayor justified his decision by saying on national news the next day; his city is out of money they can’t afford to have any of the fire department trucks damaged or lost since the city doesn’t have the funds to replace them. He publically blamed the battle and fires on the so-called patriots. He calls for them to be arrested and their personal assets to be seized to be applied to the loss of the hotels. The press picks up the demand for the patriot’s personal assets to be seized. It’s a story they know will resonate with the country, they push the story, they demand the President act.

At 9:00PM EDT three days after the Atlantic City battle, the President takes to the airwaves to announce he’s signed an executive order whereby any so-called patriot, which causes loss of property or revenue to a city, will lose their personal assets which will be used to compensate the property owners and the cities where the damage was caused. He announces the assets will be turned over to the local mayors who will distribute them.

Half of the country realizes this means the government can now take anyone’s personal assets if the government claims the person is a patriot or is deemed to be a member of any patriotic organization by the government, this scares many into protesting the President’s regulations. Local militias see their membership grow, the Tea Party’s membership swells overnight, as does the size of the Citizen Defense Force who’s getting ready to fight for the President.

The Tea Party’s lawyers prepare to file an emergency stay case with the United States Supreme Court to stop the President or any local, state or Federal Government agency from seizing the assets of people the government deems are a member of a patriot or dissenting group.

Before the Supreme Court can discuss if they’ll take the case under review the President makes the case the Supreme Court shouldn’t review the case since the Tea Party by itself hasn’t been harmed. Hence, it has no standing to make the case. The President claims the court has to wait until assets are taken, and then the harmed person or persons will have cause to bring a suit, however they should bring it to the local federal court, and then the federal appeals court before the Supreme Court decides if they’re going to review it. The Supreme Court agrees with the President, turning the Tea Party’s request down.

@@@@@

The President calls the United Nations Secretary-General, “Mr. Secretary-General, I’m calling to request additional peacekeepers. America is on the edge, we require many more people to ensure peace. Our first responders are overwhelmed. My Citizen Defense Force isn't fully trained yet. I required an additional 50,000 troops as soon as you can send them.”

“Mr. President, I’m sorry; however I don’t think the United Nations can supply 50,000 peacekeepers, we lost 6,000 troops due to many different accidents during your July 4th uprising. You have a large and very strong military; we suggest you use your own forces to bring peace to your country.”

“Mr. Secretary-General, how much will it cost us to ensure you find a way to send us additional troops?”

“Mr. President, it’s not all about money. Some of the member countries are concerned about the recent losses of their people. They are concerned that your country is going to slip into anarchy, in which case no number of peacekeepers is going to be enough to hold your country together. We think America is going to break up into four or five countries. We’ve been holding discussions with some of the Security Council members who think it’s best for the entire world if America does break up into smaller countries. As such Mr. President, I’m afraid I don’t have support of the Security Council members to send additional troops right now.

“Mr. Security-General, this is insane, no one in their right mind wants to see America break up, it will destabilize the world.”

“Mr. President, the Security Council thinks that America as a super power has destabilized the world. If America is weakened by breaking up into smaller less powerful countries, the world will be safer. Mr. President, until the situation in America, stabilizes, the United Nations is going to move our meetings to Geneva. Good luck to you, personally, I wish you all the luck to be able to get control of your internal situation.”

“Mr. Secretary-General, what’s to happen to the 2,000 troops that are already here in Washington DC?”

“I’ve decided they can stay as part of your personal security force. I’m not sure I can get them home safely right now.”

“Thank you, Mr. Secretary-General.”

After the President hangs up the phone his temper explodes; he starts throwing things around the Oval Office, he screams out a steady stream of curses. “I hate the damn upper class, they all are going to have to go, once we have settled the issues here, I’m going to deal with the damn United Nations. They should be taking orders from me.”

The President’s aides know it’s going to take a miracle for the President to get the current situation under control. Incidents are reported in city after city. Clashes between various groups pushing their agendas are reported almost hourly. The President reads pages of lists of incidents, of clashes, of violence across the country. He decides the time has come for him to make an announcement about the violence, he informs his staff, “Inform the networks, I’ll be needing thirty minutes of time tonight at 9:00PM EDT, I’m going to make a major announcement that will have an impact on everyone. Tell them I’m taking their broadcast systems over for the thirty minutes, don’t ask, TELL them.”

At 9:00 PM EDT, the President sitting behind his desk in the Oval Office looks into the camera, he’s still wearing his black armband he looks tired and sad. Many of the media “talking heads” remark on how tired the President looks, he begins. “My fellow American’s today is the day I never thought would happen. I have spent the day in meetings and reading reports about the numerous clashes between various groups in our country. I don’t understand why we all can’t get along; we’re all Americans we all want the same things, we all want our children to be safe, we all want our brothers and sisters to be safe, to be free to live the life they want. We all want our children to have a better life than the one we have; we all want to go to bed without being hungry, we all want to be educated. We all want everyone to have an equal and fair chance; we all want everyone to pay their fair share. We all want the homeless to have a home. I sit here this evening having to ask, what has Congress done to overcome any of these issues? Who other then I have done anything to address these issues? Who other then I have ever addressed income inequality? Who other then I have worked so hard to bring peace among all of our people? What has Congress done in the past six years? If it wasn’t for the bills, I submitted to Congress they wouldn’t have done anything. We can’t wait for Congress to act, we can’t wait for 500 people to sit around and debate what they think their corporate interests want. Every day we wait, more of our children die; more of us go to bed hungry. Why should we wait? Why should we be held hostage to 500 people? Tonight, I’m declaring a national state of emergency. I’m sending Congress home for the duration. I’ll rule via executive order and cabinet regulations. We can’t wait for the normal political bullshit process to work its way through two house of Congress. Hopefully, this state of National Emergency won’t last long. I’m sure I can count on every one of you to support your President. America things will start improving as of tomorrow, good night and may God bless America.”

Chapter 29

Minutes after the President’s address the silence is broken by the internet exploding with rants and posts. Social media posts tripled in number. Twitter reports the highest number of tweets in the company’s history. Many sites are jammed with so many posts they freeze. Facebook crashes four times within two hours. The ratio of comments for and against the President runs 60% against and 40% pro. The 40% pro is very vocal in defending the President. They claim the time has come for a major change in America, the old system, simply didn’t work, a new system a system that responded quickly to the needs of the many. The 60% “scream” the President needs to be removed from office. Some question how did we even get to this point? How did we allow a sitting President to send Congress home and rule by decree? Why did the media miss the warning signs, or were they part of the bigger problem?

Even the media starts questioning the President’s motives, many “talking heads” who are supposed to be constitutional experts debate the President’s actions. Some are saying he’s taking extraordinary measures because of the unusual times and situation the country finds itself in. Some of the so-called experts say that Congress put us into the current situation and question if Congress is even necessary. Many are saying Congress sold their souls to whoever paid them the most, many congressmen held office for so long that a political class rules America. The forefathers thought that people would run for office hold it for a short while and then return to their lives, they never foresaw people who represented people in areas they no longer lived in and shared very little or nothing with. How could such people represent the people? Laws were passed based not what was good for the people but in exchange for future or past owed votes and favors. Bills became so long and convoluted no one read them before voting on them. 2,000-page bills became the norm. It became normal that the only time, anyone understood what was in the bill, was after it was passed, and people started to look into it. Many bills contained rules that conflicted with others already on the books. The entire theory of equal treatment was tossed into the trash can of history. The famous walked from crimes that would see the average person sit in jail for years. Many talked themselves into thinking that maybe the President was right; our current system was simply unworkable. Maybe the founders were wrong, or maybe as time moved forward government like everything else had to adopt. Many in the media talked themselves into supporting the President’s actions.

A few brave souls spoke out that America was founded to get out from under a king; the last thing, America needed, is a new king. George Washington was offered the chance to be a king, he turned it down saying America should never have a king. Middle America is disgusted with everything coming out of Washington. They agreed change is required, however they didn’t agree the country needed or should have a sole ruler or a ruling class. Local media shouted that the President should step down and cease his plan versus breaking the country in two.

The next day’s early morning news programs start off with a review of the President’s speech. Almost all of the show’s guests are pleased with the President’s address, they agreed with his handling of the current situation. Most of their guests are Hollywood stars who are to the left of Lenin. Wolf News put on history professors who discussed the forefather’s view of America, they discussed the Federalist Papers, 85 essays outlining how the new government would operate and why this type of government was the best choice for the United States of America. All of the essays were signed "PUBLIUS" and the actual authors of some are still under dispute, but the consensus is that Alexander Hamilton wrote 52, James Madison wrote 28, and John Jay contributed the remaining 5. The history professors are shocked at the President’s decision; they agree that the President may have pushed the country over the tipping point into a second revolution or civil war. All agree that if the country moves to a second civil war, it’ll tear the country apart; most of the professors think the result will be two Americas, one progressive/socialist and the other conservative based on the original Constitution. All agree fighting a war with modern weapons and technology will tear the country apart. Some of the professors think splitting the country is a good thing, the country can’t continue as it is. 55% of the country are takers while only 45% work to support the 55%.

At 8:00AM CDT 150,000 people march in Downtown Des Moines Iowa shutting down the city, they refuse to move or allow cars to enter the state government building’s parking lots. The police set up barricades to block the marchers from reaching the government buildings. The marchers demand the President resign and recall Congress. Des Monies comes to a complete stop; neither side will move. The state government is closed for the duration.

At the same time in sixty other cities around the country, similar protests are taking place. Local and national media are recording the marches and protests. Pro President protesters meet each protest against the President. Most of the time the two sides clash, thousands are sent to hospitals; hundreds are killed, and millions of dollars in damage is done. In a few cities, the protesters build barricades, to stop the police from reaching and arresting them. The police try remove the barricades, when they get close or in some cases on top of the barricades, the protesters set them on fire; some of the police are caught in the fire, receiving 3rd-degree burns before they can get off the burning barricades.

In Charlotte South Carolina, rocks, bottles, bricks and Molotov Cocktails are thrown by both sides. Some protesters have organized a row of archers behind the main body of protesters. The arrows fly over the protesters and barricade striking the pro-President protesters. The arrows come as a rude surprise to those on the receiving end. None of the arrows falls on the police locations which would have returned fire with their firearms. The police call on the fire department to bring high-pressure fire hoses to break up the protests. When the fire department arrives, they are greeted with flights of arrows; they refuse to move forward, moving their trucks back out of the range of the arrows. The police demand the fire department set up their hoses to break up the protests; the fire chief arrives on the scene; he decides he isn’t going to risk his people to do the police’s work. He swore an oath that he decides is more important. Two local militias arrive which encircle the pro-President protesters; they run into the liberal group; fists fly. The liberals learn that sometimes violence is required to settle the issue. All of them are bruised many have broken bones and concussions. After breaking up the anti-protest protest, the militia starts to retreat when the police approach the militia leaders handing them a citation for disturbing the peace. John, one of the militia leaders, asks the police officer, “Rob, what’s the story with the citation?”

“John, you, and your people, did disturb the peace, the chief said we had to issue citations to all parties of today’s march, as such, you and your men have earned a citation for disturbing the peace. You can plead guilty pay the $15 fine and not have to show up for a court hearing.”

“Rob, just out of curiosity, what are you charging the protesters with?”

“Hunting without a license, bow hunting season doesn’t start for another two months, their fine is $25. They will also get a warning for not wearing an orange hunting vest while hunting.”

John laughs, “What about the guys we beat up?”

“They blocked the street; they used profanity in public, they threatened police officers, plus they littered. They will have to appear in court to face the judge."

“I see you’re taking this protest very seriously.”

“Look John, most of us don’t agree with the President. However, we’re charged with keeping the peace in this city. We can’t allow it to turn into a civil war; we’ve already done that once before, it didn’t work out so well for us the first time we tried it.”

In Normal Illinois, two equal sized groups meet each other in the towns square. Each side tried to stay on their side of the street. At first this worked until the name calling and rock throwing got the best of each group; both sides rushed to meet the other, after twenty minutes the police arrived to separate the two sides, a total of forty-two are taken to the hospital.

The press is having a field day reporting only one side of the story; they report only the violence performed by the anti-President protesters.

@@@@@

At 6: 30PM three broadcast anchors go on the air with scripted reports reporting the President’s actions in a positive manner, in the middle of their scripted remarks the three reporters look directly into the camera. They pause; they veer off script to start talking about the dangerous path the President has set the country on. They start discussing the impact of a civil war in America when each of the three of them is cut off the air. Government censors have a “kill” switch which can cut the transmission of any seditious comment. The three kept their promise to the people who woke them in the middle of the night, they honestly tried to speak out against the President’s plans. However, anyone, who speaks out against the President, isn’t just considered an opponent, they are classified as an enemy of the President and an enemy of the state. An enemy of the state is attacked with everything the government can bring to bear, the IRS tears into their financial dealings, DHS tears into everything else, from their internet posts and web searches to their phone calls and even what they eat and drink. From now on their lives are open books that the government vultures now pick clean and use against them and their families.

@@@@@

“General Brownstone, the country, is starting to burn, so far most of the demonstrations have used limited violence, one group in Charlotte South Carolina used a row of archers to attack the pro-President side.”

The general spit up his coffee, “Archers, like in the Middle Ages?”

“Yes sir, they were ticketed for bow hunting out of season and not wearing orange hunting vests.”

“I want to meet that police officer who wrote those tickets; he’s got a hell of a sense of humor.”

“Sir, Rash, and Glenn are trying to organize a mass march on the White House.”

“That’s one of the harebrained ideas that got us into this mess, where are they? I need to talk with both of them.”

“Sir, when the bird went down, they got out with some minor bruises and minor burns, they were both picked up in a white cargo van and disappeared before we could get to them.”

“Captain where are they?”

“Sir, we think their hiding in Richmond, Virginia.”

“I should have known that, knowing how much both of them studied history. Richmond was the Capital of the South in the Civil War, I wonder what their planning. My gut tells me they’re going to excite their listeners to push the President over the edge.”

“General, I think the country has reached the tipping point, I think Middle America is saying they’re not accepting the President taking sole control of the country.”

“Captain, frankly it’s what I’m afraid of, what have we heard from the other senior staff?”

“General, the Air Force is still sitting on the fence. The odds are most will sit it out, the Army is split 60/40 for, the Marines or should I say the ex-Marines are 90/10 for, the Navy is 75/25 for, the Guard is split almost 50/50. The reserves are mostly against the President.”

“I don’t want to watch the country ripped apart the way other countries have been in civil wars.”

“General, maybe shows of force and mass protests will convince the President to change his mind.”

“Captain, how many countries have we served together in? How many civil wars have we seen? In how many of those did the king or dictator, warlord whatever title they used ever surrender power from demonstrations without violence?”

“General, that’s not a fair question, every country we’ve served together in, when the demonstrations didn’t think their voices were being heard, they all turned to violence, it was a threat and many times the outright violence that forced the dictator out. I can’t think of one who just looked outside his window and said, my people aren’t happy, I better pack up and leave.”

“My point exactly. We need to find a different way to get the President’s attention.”

The phone on the general’s desk rings, he picks it up, “Hello, yes I understand, and I’ll be there tomorrow.”

“Captain, I think we just crossed over the tipping point; a group in New Hampshire just took over their entire town. They hanged the Mayor and town council who supported the President. When the local police came to investigate, they were forced to stop at a roadblock the patriots built. The police were surrounded; half of the officers turned around, taking as many of the militias with them as they could, the other half returned to their station reporting they couldn’t go any further due to the barricade. Pictures of the hanged Mayor and town council have been posted on the internet. Each was hanged with a sign around their necks reading “traitor." The Mayor was running for Governor; he was a large financial backer of the President. The President responded by sending hundreds of DHS agents and his Citizen Defense Forces to the town. They burned the homes and businesses of the patriots to the ground. Many of their homes were burnt with their families trapped inside of them. DHS burned those people alive. Someone posted the pictures of the burned homes, in some cases the homes burned to their foundations sitting next to a house untouched, pictures of the burned to death family members somehow slip through the censors and ended up posted on social media before the DHS censors realized their error and took them down, the outrage is spreading faster than the flu. I think we crossed the line. The President showed his hand, we’re going to have to cut his hands off him.”

Chapter 30

Rash kicks off his return to his radio program with “Ladies and Gentlemen thank you for joining me on my first day back from my forced vacation. I got to spend a few weeks in an all expense paid resort in West Virginia. The nice people at the Department of Homeland Security provided Glenn and me with a partially furnished suite. We were locked in, of course, we were told it was all for our safety. We didn’t have a television because they didn’t want us to have a heart attack having to watch what the government says is news. I think if we had to watch the censored news we might have had a heart attack or worse, how do people watch these programs and accept the stories as truth? How can even the low information voter listen and watch these reports and not question what’s going on? How? Because their President is not causing these issues, he’s working 24/7 to correct the issues. He’s doing everything he can to fix the problems. The low information voters don’t spend any time looking into the full story; their information comes from 30 second sound bites. They think everything is great, they’ve got their free iPhones, their free health insurance, their free food stamps and their welfare checks. They don’t have to work; the President’s Full Employment Act didn’t turn out very good for anyone. All the people hired by the government got paid by you and me to do nothing. Many dug holes that others filled back in. Almost everything these new government workers touched turned to crap. Even the President realized his plan wasn’t going to work. He had to allow most of the managers to fire the new workers. Many of these people were happy to be sent home to sit in front of their televisions and get paid by us to do nothing, they’re happy to suck on the government tit. The government is happy to provide them with their benefits, so they always vote for the Democrats. Their news is censored, but they don’t care, just wait until next year when the government starts providing free marijuana, the young of our country will never work again, it will be the end of America as we know it.”

@@@@@

Glenn returns to his internet program saying, “My friends; I’m back; we don’t have a lot of time ahead of us, our country is slipping away right in front of our eyes. We can’t stay home and hope this all will go away, when it does goes away; it’s going to take our bill of rights and Constitution with it. Is this what you want? Are we going to do nothing and allow the world’s last chance for freedom to slip away because we’re more interested in the goings and comings of the brainless Hollywood stars? Does it really matter who’s sleeping with whom? Does it really matter who tweeted what to whom compared to losing our bill of rights? When we started the 9/13 project it was to educate. Educate so this day never arrived, we failed; the President sent the Congress home; only a very few voices in Congress even spoke out about them being dissolved. How is it most of the members of Congress and Senators haven’t said a word about Congress being dissolved? How is it possible they went into the night without a whimper? Could it be because the NSA has collected so much information on these elected Congressmen and Senators they can’t speak out? Could it be if they speak out the IRS will audit them down to the last penny? Has the President turned the agencies under his control into a modern secret police? Are all of us next? Has the President won through the use of technology? I’m telling you; it doesn’t matter, if we don’t win this battle and restore our country, the DHS which is the new American SS troops will show up and invite us to move, of course for our safety to one of their FEMA camps. A camp we’ll never exit from, sort of like a new Hotel California, we can check in but never check out. I’m telling you; I’m not going, I’ll fight them any way I can, with a rock in my hand, with an axe, with anything, I’m not going to go silently into the night. The only way, the government, is going to silence me, is to kill me, and I know that’s an idea floating around a large number of people in the DHS. What a joke the Department for Homeland Security is. Homeland Security? Security for the President and his buddies, insecurity for the rest of us. I’m calling for another mass rally to surround Washington. I’m calling on millions of you, come join me to circle Washington DC, we’re going to stand on the shoulder of the 495 loop, we can stand next to each other, holding hands circling Washington, we can do this. We’ll pray and sing ‘we shall overcome’. I’m asking you to come on Labor Day, three weeks from now, join me in holding hands around our Capital. We’ll ring the capital with our strength; we’ll show the President we’re not going to allow him to steal our rights, we’re not accepting him as a dictator. Let’s do this as a nonviolent march. If millions of us show up and ring the Capital the entire world will have to sit up and take notice, the media won’t be able to ignore us. We’re going to stay on the shoulder, we’re not going to block traffic, and we’re not going to break any laws, don’t bring any weapons, and not even a pocket knife. Order and wear your 1776 T-shirts which are now available on our website, and we’ve priced them at only $5 so everyone can afford one. Remember Labor Day, we’ll show the President our voices can’t be silenced.”

No matter the amount of government censoring, word spreads of the rally which spreads like wildfire. Social media experiences their highest number of posts in a single day, even with Facebook trying to censor posts; they are overwhelmed with the number of posts supporting the Hands-around-DC march. Hand painted billboards pop up all around the country, bumper stickers, T-shirts, flyers, and signs in store windows announcing they’re going to be closed so they can take part in the Hands-around-DC march. Everywhere people look they see the Hands-around-DC message. By August 20th, five million people have signed up for the march, tens of thousands sign up every day, so many signs up that the Hands-around-DC website crashes a few times a day. The NSA tries to flood the site, shutting it down; they fail to breach the sites firewalls, which were designed by ex-NSA employees.

The President calls the Secretary of Homeland Security, “What’s with this Hands-around-DC bullshit?”

“Mr. President, it’s another of Glenn’s harebrained ideas to give him some trash to talk about on his program.”

“Can’t we get him off the internet?”

“Mr. President, we’ve tried, he keeps changing his hosting locations. We haven’t been able to keep him from broadcasting for more than twenty minutes.”

“I get it, ok, find out what country is hosting his program, offer them aid to shut his program down, if that doesn’t work, threaten them with a few cruise missiles, if that doesn’t work, freeze their assets until they shut down his program. Since this march is on Labor Day, I want millions of union members brought in to surpass his march. If he lines up five million people to stand around DC, I want ten million union members. It’s Labor Day so get labor to show their support. God knows we’ve supported them; we’ve handed them everything they’ve asked for. We’ve tripled their membership roles, their rolling in money. I want to see them return the support we’ve given them. If Glenn’s march is on the right-hand shoulder, the union members should be on the left-hand shoulder, I want all of our people wearing union T-shirts. Maybe we can convince some of Glenn’s people to switch to our side. Don’t stop the traffic, we don’t want the news to lead off with a story of how we blocked or shut down the beltway, heaven knows the beltway bandits will never forgive us, their wallets will close if we hurt their business.”

“Sir, it’ll be Labor Day, none of the beltway bandits will be working.”

“Some of them will be so they can charge us double rates for working on a holiday. Set up field kitchens and have some medical people standing by. I know, get the damn military to turn out, give them union T-shirts to wear, their federal employees, why aren’t they in the one of the Federal Government Unions? Get the military to join one of the unions. Change the Army’s orders, no one gets off for the holiday; they’re to show up for the march supporting this administration.”

“Sir, I’m not sure the military should join a union?”

“Why the fuck not?”

“Mr. President, can you imagine us going to war or attacking someone and the soldiers going on strike?”

“You’re such an idiot, change the bylaws of their union so they can’t go on strike, see problem solved, we’ll control them through me being their commander and by us controlling the unions. I’ll own their souls. If Glenn has five million people show up, we’ll have 10, maybe 15 million, the media will show the world the country supports only me, and not that crazy big mouth who’s done nothing except host an internet show. Don’t forget I want him off the air.”

@@@@@

“General, have you heard about the Hands-around-DC march?”

“Captain, yes, I’ve also heard the President is sending his union thugs to double the number of people that Glenn’s rally plans on showing up.”

“General, it gets much worse; the President has decided the military and National Guard should join a union.”

Spitting out his coffee, the general says, “Unionize the military? I knew he was crazy, but this goes way over the transom. Can’t he see the problems this is going to cause?”

“Sir, he’s very serious, he’s sending union reps to every base to sign up every service member. He plans to control the military from two fronts.”

“I can just see the Army walking a protest line and striking for better working hours, Oh my God if this weren't so serious it'd be funny. Let’s hold a union vote to see if we should go to war. This is what we get when a community organizer gets elected.”

“General, what should we do about it?”

“Send word that I’d LIKE, keyword, LIKE not order as many Marines as possible join the Hands-around-DC march. If the President is going to use the Army and the unions to line up opposite Glenn’s marchers, then we’ll supply the Marines to provide support to the honest marchers. My bones tell me Labor Day is going to be a bad day.”

“General, what if the President sends his Citizen Defense Force to the march too?”

“He will. He’ll use them as thugs to control his marchers; we’ll protect the real American’s from the President’s thugs. Tell our people to be ready to protect the people. Even if there’s no longer any official Marine Corps, once a Marine, always a Marine. I’m going to ask Admiral Zander to have some air support on call in case things turn ugly,”

@@@@@

“Hey Brad, have you heard about the Hands-around-DC event?”

“Yes, Kathy and I are going, what about you?”

“I’m going as are a number of my buddies, all who are “oath takers” who left various police and sheriff offices rather than accept the President’s orders. I’m estimating there will be over two thousand of us coming.”

“Do you think the President will leave us alone to hold a protest?”

“Brad, did you fall on your head this morning? Of course, he won’t. He can’t leave us alone, he’s tried to get the various websites shut down, there’s a rumor floating around he’s trying to find out where the sites are hosted. If he finds them, he’ll pressure them into closing the sites. He’s not going to give in easily. He’s going to fight for every inch of power he’s already stolen. I’m sure the two of you realize this isn’t going to be a 60’s peace march, no matter what Glenn says; the President will do something to incite violence so he can use it against us. I hope the two of you know the march; the entire area is going to be a very dangerous place to be on Labor Day.”

“Ron, Kathy and I have discussed our options; we can't sit here and so nothing; we don’t want our grandchildren never to know what freedom means, we don’t want them to grow up under a king or dictator. We may lose, or we may die, if we do at least our blood will join those of our forefathers and the founders of the country. We agree with Thomas Jefferson that the “tree of liberty must be refreshed from time to time with the blood of patriots and tyrants. It is its natural manure.” As such, we’re in all the way. Kathy has started selling our investments; we’re going to turn everything we own into gold and silver if a real civil war breaks out; paper money isn’t going to be worth the paper it’s printed on. We’re going to remove the firearms we stored inside the shell of our washer, Ron we’re going to be as ready as we can by the time Labor Day arrives.”

Kathy walks into the family room saying, “Ron; we know it’s going to be a dangerous place to be. I think the entire country is going to go into labor on Labor Day, I think the beltway is going to run red with blood. There’s no way the President is going to allow millions of people to hold hands and pray for a change in Washington; he’s going to have his so-called Citizen Defense Force, there with thousands of his union thugs. I think it’s going to take God’s intervention to save America. The more of us acting peaceful and praying there are, the better chance we have of God hearing our prayers.”

Chapter 31

Glenn takes to the air on his internet radio program; he starts the program with, “WOW, I can’t believe it, our server for the Hands-around-DC march has crashed many times. Your response has been unbelievable. None of my staff can keep up with the demand for passes and hotel information. Let me give you a short update, every hotel we know of within 25 miles of the Washington DC beltway is sold out. Yes, every single hotel room is sold out. We think we ought to get a commission for selling out the entire Washington DC hotel inventory. There are hotels further west and east of the beltway that have rooms available; we’ll post these on our site within an hour. There are a couple of dos and don’ts we want to discuss. We’ve heard that the administration is going to hold a march in support of their decisions. The administration is planning on having the unions’ bus in hundreds of thousands of their members; the administration is ordering Federal Government workers and members of the military to attend the support march. We plan to stand along the right-hand shoulder of the beltway, holding hands in prayer completely around DC, the President plans to have his people stand on the left lane shoulder, which is very dangerous because, in some places on the beltway, there isn’t any left-hand lane shoulder. Also, they are going to have to cross three or in some cases five lanes of traffic to get to the left-hand shoulder. I know how excited everyone is, I understand how frustrated everyone listening is, however we need to discuss a few what I’m going to call good behavior practices, these are, 1) Thou shall do no harm, let me repeat this, thou shall do not harm. Do not damage the beltway, do not damage any parked cars. 2) Thou shall not harm any innocents; the people on the other shoulder are our brothers and sisters, when this is all over we have to live together, doing anything on Labor Day, which you’ll regret the next day is something you shouldn’t do. Pause before you lift a hand in anger, do you want them to remember us as peaceful people or as monsters?  Act like adults, act responsible. 3.) Sticks and stones may break your bones, but words will never hurt you, don’t let the other side use words and lies to taunt you into actions you and we will regret. What are words? Vibrations in the air, let these words flow around and over you, let these vibrations flow away from you don’t give in their childish actions. The other side uses words designed to cause reactions. They want us to react so they can record our actions to use them against us. Don’t be fooled by and swayed by their words. They choose their words to get us to respond, they want to get under our skin to irritate us, and they want us to attack them. Their friends in the media want to see us attack first. They want to blame all of the violence on us. Remember what the lord said, turn the other cheek. It may hurt; it may burn, your blood may feel like it’s boiling, but I beg you, pause before you act. Every one of you, every single one of the millions of people who will hold Hands-around-DC is representing everything good about America, don’t allow the media to show us in the worst light possible. Remember the world is watching us, let’s show the world we can disagree with our government without destroying our ideals and morals. We’ll shouldn’t sink to their level. 4.) Do no harm to our infrastructure. I bet every one of you will want to go home and enjoy your air conditioned homes, have a cool drink, if you damage the infrastructure, you’re only harming yourself. If you damage the electrical network or water systems when you get home, you may not have any electrically or water. Remember we live here. The infrastructure you damage is yours also. We as a nation needs all of the infrastructures we have. We’re going to be a combined country again. Remember a smart man or woman doesn’t cut off their own nose to spite their face. Now I understand we have a caller from Northern Virginia, hello Jay, I understand you disagree with me?”

“Glenn, thank you very much for taking my call. I’m sorry, I usually agree with you on everything, on this issue I have to disagree. I don’t think we can have a combined new America. I think we’ve drifted too far apart. The two sides of the political spectrum have become so polarized we have a hard time even talking to each other. I don’t see how we can overcome the build in distrust of each side has for the other side in order to work together on anything. How are they going to work together to correct the problems they helped create and made worse? I think our goal should be to force the administration to recognize two Americas. Let all of the progressives live and tax each other to their hearts content, let them ban everything from chewing gum to guns, let them live in a politically correct country where every day new words are deemed hate speech. The rest of us can move to the center of the country. We can live as our forefathers and founders wanted to in a free America. We’ll be free as we were supposed to be. I say; we use every means we need to force the administration to let us go; we stop paying taxes, we use force to get what we want, they’ve been using force against us for years. Look around the world, many countries have figured out they can’t live together, we should have done the same thing years ago.”

“Jay, if we use force, they’ll respond with overwhelming force, we can’t win this type of battle. They have the National Guard and the military against us.”

“Glenn, there’s where you’re wrong. The police, the military all swore oaths; they’re not going to turn their weapons on us, they’re our brothers and sisters, and we’re all Americans.”

“Jay, the President can and most likely has already designated us as domestic terrorists, he will tell the police and military we present a clear and present danger to America. Once we’re so designated we’ve become the enemies of the country, as enemies of the country we’ll have targets painted on us, every law enforcement officer, and member of the military will be hunting us.”

“Glenn, there are too many of us for them to arrest.”

“Jay, many said the government couldn’t collect the 300 million guns in the people’s hands. They grabbed more than 90% of them. If you’d asked the average internet posting gun owner, prey from my dead hands, you’ll find most of them sold their weapons and ammo to the government, they took the tax-free money with the justification their families needed the money. How many people hid their firearms?”

r“Glenn, there are more of us than anyone in the government knows.”

“Jay, if you’re one of them or even know one, I don’t want to know about it. I don’t think you want to say anything on the internet, do you want the government to break down your door in the middle of the night, tearing your home and everything you own apart looking for the firearms, we both know you sold back to the government. A lot of people are very brave sitting behind a keyboard, only a very small number will stand on the line and say no more; only a very small number will risk everything they own and their very lives for what they believe. In the revolutionary war that very small number was 3%. Jay don’t respond, don’t tell me, you’re one of the new 3%, just keep my words close to your heart. Jay I assume you’re married?”

“Yes, for 20 years, her name is Patty.”

“Jay, if you want to see her every night think before you speak, remember once you type of say anything online, it’s out there forever, everything becomes real, as does the bullets and blood. I’m trying to save my listeners and patriots their blood. Jay, believe me, God is watching us, and he is on our side. He’s always on the side of the righteous. If you cross the line, God won’t support you, we need God to support every one of us.”

“Glenn, we’ve too far apart, half the country takes while we, the other half work to support them plus our families, my back is breaking paying all of the taxes, fees and other surcharges so my other family can sit home enjoying the fruits of my labor.”

“Jay, we’ve gone far, we can come together again, it’s not too late, and if it is too late, then I believe God will give us a sign to tell us which direction we should be going. Jay, take the hate out of your heart, leave the passion, it’s the passion that makes us what we are. We all love our country; we’re all thankful to God we were born here in America vs. being born someplace else. We are going to wake the administration up, we already have, if they didn’t fear us, they wouldn’t have called on their union buddies to form a counter-demonstration across the traffic lanes from us. They fear us, they fear our message will resonate with the average American. Jay, we’re winning before we even set one foot on the shoulder of the beltway. Believe me, we’re winning. Thank you for calling. I’m sorry, but this is all the time we have today, tune back tomorrow for more news about our Hands-around-DC march.”

@@@@@

The President calls his Chief of Staff into the Oval Office, “Did you hear him? Did you hear what he said? He just told millions that I’m afraid of him! Me? Afraid of him? I want him stopped, find the site that’s hosting his program, shut it down; he’s a domestic terrorist, I’m signing an executive order stating he presents a clear and present danger to the security of America.”

“Mr. President, we’ve searched, we can’t figure out where he’s being hosted.”

“All, I get from you, is excuses, enough, get me the Director of Homeland Security, he’ll find a way to stop this threat to us. Call the union’s I want double the number of people who he signs up for his march to show up on our side.”

“Mr. President, many of the union members aren’t happy about losing their holiday weekend.”

“Do you think I care? If it weren't for me, most of them wouldn’t have a job. They owe me this, and I’m going to address the nation reminding them they owe me. If it weren't for me, the nation would be in a depression. I want press releases issued reminding the nation I saved them from another global depression.”

“Yes sir.”

@@@@@

As Labor Day nears, hundreds of thousands start gathering in the Washington DC area. Many drive along the beltway placing name tags and folding chairs marking their spots. Entire families plan on attending the march to show their displeasure with the President’s decision to disband Congress.

One hundred and six Congressmen and women hold a press conference to announce they are joining the Hands-around-DC march, they’re going to attend with their families to show support for the average American and to tell the President he’s wrong and needs to change his decision.

Thirty minutes later 53 Senators hold a joint press conference to announce they're joining the Hands-around-DC march,

The President announces his cabinet will be joining the union’s march.”

Five Senator’s petition the Supreme Court asking the court to stop the President’s cabinet from joining the march, to do so would show they are performing political deeds while in office.

The President considers disbanding the Supreme Court; he calls the Chief Justice, “Jack if you vote against my cabinet joining the union march I’ll release the pictures and emails I have, should I remind you again what I have? It'd be a shame if your wife saw the pictures on the front page of the Washington Times. You voted as I asked you to on the health care bill and the pictures stayed in my safe; it was for the best for the country, you should vote for the future of the country, do you understand?”

“Mr. President, your call is very timely, the other judges and I were just discussing that you’ve gone too far when you sent Congress home. We think since Congress can’t impeach you; we may impeach you.”

“Jack, you can’t do that, the Constitution doesn’t provide for the court to impeach me.”

“Who the hell are you to talk to me or anyone else about the Constitution? You should have been impeached a long time ago; you’ve gone too far. I don’t care about the pictures. I’ve talked with my wife about them. Go ahead and release the pictures, go ahead. You’re offering me my reputation or the country I choose the country. You’re not going to succeed; the people are rising up against you.”

“Jack, you are so wrong, the people believe what we tell them to believe, as long as I provide them with welfare and free phones and healthcare they’ll side with me.”

“Mr. President, not all, you’ll see in a few days when the people show up along the beltway. I plan to hold a press conference tomorrow to announce you're blackmailing me. We’ll see what the media says about you tomorrow.”

@@@@@

The President calls his Director of Homeland Security, “I think it’s time the Chief Justice retire; tonight would be the right time, make it look like an accident, say a hit and run.”

“Yes sir.”

The morning news programs lead off with the story of the horrible hit and run accident which killed the Chief Justice of the Supreme Court. Every news program runs his life story.

@@@@@

Glenn starts his 9:00AM program with the statement, “The President had the Chief Justice murdered last night. He had something on the Chief Justice he used to blackmail him to force him to change his vote on the health care act; the Supreme Court was getting ready to bust the President, so he had him taken out. I’m betting I’m next or at least on his top five of his hit list.”

@@@@@

Labor Day dawns warm without a cloud in the sky, as the sun rises above the horizon; there are already six million people lining the right-hand side of Beltway holding hands and talking. Media camera people are leaning out of car and van windows as they’re driven around the beltway recording the protest. At 8AM the union buses start arriving, the buses are lined up for five miles; hundreds, thousands, in total a million union members and the President’s Citizen Defense Force punks line up on the left-hand shoulder of the beltway. Traffic is backed up for ten miles. At first the two sides just nod at each other; each side tries to ignore the other. By noon, the tempers of both groups rise with the humidly and heat. The two sides stare at each other, some of the union members start walking across the beltway to taunt the Hands-around-DC protesters. Union thugs start to cross the three traffic lanes with clubs and baseball bats.

The union reps are nothing more than glorified henchmen; they’re bullies who are used to using violence to get what they want. They taunt the marchers to get them to cross the Beltway and make the first move against the union, no matter how much the union thugs taunt the marchers, they refuse to take the bait and cross the Beltway to mix it up with the union members. Any, who start to cross the traffic lanes, are pulled back by others in the march, they remind everyone to stay cool, the union wants the marchers to make the first move, they want to record the Tea Party turned violent first. The President wants the media filled with images of the marchers attacking the union’s line. They want to fill the airwaves to push those in the middle across the line The President has offered the unions a bonus to incite the marchers into making the first violent moves. Five hours into the protest, the union is getting worried the marchers aren’t going to cross the traffic lanes, they decide to dress a few of their thugs and organizers in clothing similar to what the marchers are wearing, they don freedom shirts and jeans, thus dressed, they walk on an angle towards the right-hand shoulder where the marchers are; they mingle with the marchers, pretending to be late comers, before three of them get into a mock fight daring the marchers to get involved. Other union members have worked their way into the marcher’s lines; they too start small fights with others. Once the fights get going, lots of pushing and shoving, the first punch lands, breaking a marcher’s jaw, counter punches land, small groups start fighting each other.

As the fighting increases, some of the union members start running across the three lanes crashing into the marchers, several are hit and knocked out, at first the hands across DC marchers don’t respond, when the union thugs hit a teenage girl with a bat, the marchers respond, the two groups meet in the middle of the freeway. The police arrive trying to separate the two sides which don’t want to be separated. In the middle of the melee gunshots ring out, a ten-year-old boy cries out falling to the street, the two sides pause as heads turn towards the scream, seeing it’s a child, the marchers tear into the union thugs. Another gunshot is heard; another marcher goes down; two union reps go down with crossbow bolts in their chests. All along the beltway the two sides are fighting. All of Glenn’s warning messages are forgotten. Thirty fire departments show up to the hose down both sides in the initial battle for America. Both sides look at the dead and wounded; they shake their heads while they start walking off the exit ramps leaving the Beltway. A father picks up his dead ten-year-old son; his eyes are filled with tears as he carries the body of his son home.

End of Book 1

The Civil war erupts in Book 2

Other books by the author available on Amazon Kindle

37 Miles (Revised Edition)

37 Miles, Book 2, Patty’s Journey

My Story

A History Lesson (Short story)

2015 Second American Civil War, Book 1

2015 Second American Civil War, Book 2

2015 Second American Civil War, Book 3

2015 Second American Civil War, Book 4

2015 Second American Civil War, Book 5

By the Light of the Moon, Book 1

By the Light of the Moon Book 2

By the Light of the Moon Book 3

By the Light of the Moon Book 4 (December 2015)

Christmas Eve

The Shelter, Book 1, The Beginning

The Shelter, Book 2, A Long Day’s Night

The Shelter, Book 3, (coming soon)

In the Year 2050, America’s Religious Civil War

In the Year 2050, Book 2, The world Burns, (coming soon)

Silent Death (Coming October 2015)

Feel free to contact me at itabankin@aol.com